EXPERIMENTAL 
 -WIRELESS 
 STATIONS 
 
 THEIR 
 
 THEORY, DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION 
 AND OPERATION 
 
 INCLUDING WIRELESS TELEPHONY AND 
 QUENCHED SPARK SYSTEMS. 
 
 A complete account of sharply tuned modern wireless 
 
 installations for experimental purposes which 
 
 comply with the new wireless law, with 
 
 more than 80 illustrations. 
 
 By 
 PHILIP E. EDELMAN 
 
 t t 
 
 Author, "Inventions and Patents," "Simple Experiments 
 
 in Chemistry," "An Experimental Quenched Arc 
 
 System," "How to Comply with the New 
 
 Wireless Law," and many other 
 
 articles in the technical 
 
 press. 
 
 THIRD REVISED EDITION 
 
 Fourth Printing. 
 
 Published by die '*$&? 
 MINNEAPOLIS, MINN., U. 3. A. * 
 
 1915 ... . - . . 
 
Copyright, 1912-4 
 
 by 
 
 PHILIP E. EDELMAN, MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 
 All rights reserved, including translations. 
 
 FIRST EDITION PUBLISHED NOVEMBER, 1912. 
 
 BOOKS BY PHILIP E. EDELMAN. 
 
 (Now ready, or in preparation.) 
 
 "Experimental Wireless Stations" . . . . $1.50 
 
 "Experiments" A book which takes the reader into the 
 very inside of experimenting, electricity, wireless, high 
 frequency, chemistry and physics . . . . $1.50 
 
 "How to Make and Use a Wireless Station" Complete 
 instructions for an inexpensive set that complies with 
 the law 12c 
 
 "Inventions and Patents" A book for inventors and all 
 who are concerned with patent rights . . . $1.00 
 
 "Applied Radio communication" A work which covers 
 the commercial side of wireless telegraphy, telephony, 
 and control as thoroughly as this volume covers the 
 experimental field. 
 
 "Small Transformers" A working manual showing how 
 to make .11 sizes cf small transformers for radio, high 
 frequency, shop, arid laboratory purposes. 
 
the faculty of the West High School, Minneapolis, 
 
 and particularly to Mr. John H. Cook of the 
 
 Physics Department, as an appreciation 
 
 of the interest taken in the 
 
 Author. 
 
 343115 
 
FOREWORD. 
 
 This book was written to fill a noticeable gap in the 
 literature on the art of wireless telegraphy. As its name 
 implies it is intended particularly for experimenters, that 
 sane body of voluntary workers who take up the art as a 
 hobby, study, or spare time vocation and who are gener- 
 ally misnamed, "amateurs." It is intended particularly as 
 a guide to a rational worth while study of the art and only 
 matter which directly contributes to the practical presenta- 
 tion of the art has been included. 
 
 One of the main objects of the book is to provide a 
 standard design for so-called "Amateur stations," which 
 will take the place of the many varieties of hit and miss 
 apparatus constructed and purchased by experimenters. 
 
 This book is intended for experimenters who regard 
 the art as more than a mere idle plaything, and it is hoped 
 that it will serve as a stepping stone to a serious prepara- 
 tion for high positions in the practical field of the art. 
 The earnest experimenter is separated from the wireless 
 engineer and commercial wireless inventor by a very 
 small space of time and application to study, while the 
 position of an expert wireless operator is even easier to 
 attain. Wireless today offers opportunities which are 
 perhaps not exceeded by any other art or trade. The 
 field is open and ready for serious workers, the work of 
 absorbing interest, and the remuneration limited only by 
 the capabilities and temperament of the individual and the 
 circumstances concerned. 
 
Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Inasmuch as both innocent and wilfull interference 
 with other stations has to a large extent hindered experi- 
 menters as well as commercial operators, the design in 
 this book is directed particularly to standard apparatus 
 and stations of sane sharp tuned wave lengths which will 
 not interfere with others. As far as the author is aware 
 this is the first book to appear in which standard designs 
 are given. On account of the new wireless law, experi- 
 menters are now forcefully restricted to this rational type 
 of apparatus. In any case, serious workers will realize 
 that it is only fair and even desirable. At the present 
 stage of development, wireless experiments must be con- 
 ducted on a strict basis of live and let live. 
 
 The matter in this book has been written with particu- 
 lar regard to clearness, simplicity, and direct use fullness. 
 Makeshifts have been suggested in some cases and it is 
 hoped that experimenters with limited means will wel- 
 come them. It is quite possible to have a wireless station 
 at an outlay of less than one dollar. The approximate 
 cost of the apparatus is given in some cases. 
 
 The author will be pleased to receive suggestions and 
 corrections from his readers, but cannot promise or agree 
 to give individual advice, further individual instructions, 
 or answer other communications which require much time, 
 since his time is all taken up with other activities. 
 
 In order to get directly to the pith of the subject little 
 or no preparatory history and elementary matter has been 
 given, as the readers are assumed to have some little 
 knowledge of the fundamentals of electricity, magnetism, 
 and mathematics. (This does not mean an extensive or 
 complete knowledge.) The important principles upon 
 which the wireless systems depend together with the 
 working principles of the separate instruments have, how- 
 ever, been treated in some detail and in most cases "How 
 
Foreword. 
 
 it works and how to make it," have been combined. It is 
 believed that several items are presented for the first time 
 in this volume and the best modern practice has been pre- 
 sented, so that it comes within the limitations of the aver- 
 age experimenter. 
 
 The majority of the material given is the result of the 
 author's own experiences together with the experiences 
 of others, and it is believed that credit has been given for 
 the important items or abridgements from other sources, 
 which have been included. In many cases only the vital 
 points for an instrument have been given, so that the indi- 
 vidual can use his own ingenuity in working out the de- 
 tails. The reader is thus given an opportunity to be orig- 
 inal without the usual waste of "cut and try." Every am- 
 bitious reader will very likely read from cover to cover, 
 but the matter has been so arranged that each chapter is 
 complete in itself. The advanced reader can turn to the 
 particular subject in which he is interested without going 
 through matter already familiar to him. 
 
 Although several manufacturers have offered cuts for 
 this book, it has seemed best to give simple line drawings 
 to illustrate constructional details rather than half tones 
 which only show the general appearance of a particular 
 type of instrument. Most of the drawings have been pre- 
 pared specially for this book and the few taken from 
 other sources have in most cases been credited. 
 
 In conclusion it may be remarked that no author is in- 
 sensible to appreciation, and if you obtain more than the 
 mere intrinsic worth from this book, the author will ap- 
 preciate your courtesy in telling others so. 
 
 Philip E. Edelman. 
 
 Minneapolis, Minnesota, 
 October 15, 1912. 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 NATURE AND THEORY OF WIRELESS TRANS- 
 MISSION OF INTELLIGENCE. 
 
 Before beginning the details of equipment, a brief out- 
 line of the essential theories which aid in understanding 
 the art will be given. To begin with, it should be under- 
 stood that many of the elementary theories have only been 
 partially substantiated and that in any case they serve 
 more for convenience than as scientific fact. It should 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 C 
 
 \ 
 
 7 A * A-V 
 
 c' 
 
 
 PI 
 
 i s 
 
 * 
 < 
 
 ^i rstnFi 
 
 8 ] gj.PYn 
 
 T 
 
 "*^^ 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 FIG. 1. 
 
 A. Al aerials. C. Cl condensers. T transformer or coil. 
 D. detector. I. II inductances. S Spark gap. G. ground. 
 R. telephone receiver. 
 
 also be remembered, that while lines of force and similar 
 terms are used as though the lines were visible and a mat- 
 ter of fact, they are merely imaginary and used for con- 
 venience. 
 
 In the practical wireless station with which we are 
 concerned, electromagnetic waves are utilized to transmit 
 intelligence in a telegraph code without the use of a con- 
 ductor or wire between the transmitting and receiving sta- 
 
Theories of Transmission. 
 
 tions. It has been found that these electromagnetic waves 
 closely resemble light waves and for this reason some 
 knowledge of the physics of light will be useful and an 
 aid in the mastery of the wireless art. 
 
 In fig. 1 a simple diagram of the relations of the sta- 
 tions is shown. Briefly, electromagnetic waves are gen- 
 erated by means of a discharge through a suitable gap 
 which sets up oscillations in a shunt circuit of capacity and 
 inductance and these oscillations are in turn radiated from 
 the aerial in wave trains representing the dots and dashes 
 
 //////////////////////////////// 
 
 FIC. I^. THEORY OF THE ACTION OF WIRELESS WAVES 
 
 of the code. By referring to the figure it will be observed 
 that the sending and the receiving station are connected 
 through the earth and that they have a second circuit 
 through the space between their respective aerial capaci- 
 ties. It has not been established whether the ground acts 
 as the return circuit or whether the space serves for this 
 purpose, but experiments have shown that a considerable 
 part of the efficiency of transmission is dependent on hav- 
 ing good ground connections through soil, which is a com- 
 paratively good conductor. In fact, the variable conduc- 
 tivity over different portions of the earth materially af- 
 fects the range and clearness of transmission, ranging 
 from maximum over water, to a minimum over dry un- 
 
10 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 even expanses of land. The earth is an imperfect and 
 variable conductor in itself and it is for this reason that 
 transmission over different portions of the earth's surface 
 varies considerably. It has not been established whether 
 or not the curvature of the earth materially affects trans- 
 mission, but it is not likely that it does. Good earth con- 
 nections then, are essential to efficient wireless transmis- 
 sion. 
 
 A commonly accepted theory of the action of wireless 
 waves is illustrated in fig. 1 a. The aerial (A) is repre- 
 sented by the upper part of a spark gap and the lower 
 part terminates in a ground E. The aerial becomes 
 
 :5|A' 
 
 n 
 
 charged and sets up a field of force, the area of which de- 
 pends on the intensity of the charge and other natural 
 conditions. The lines of electrical strain are represented 
 by the dotted lines and should be understood as of spheri- 
 cal form, although shown as in a plane on the paper. Now 
 after the charge accumulates to a certain point, a spark 
 passes between the gap electrodes, making the gap a tem- 
 porary conductor. The aerial discharges at this point and 
 as a result the strain in the electrostatic field is relieved. 
 However, a new current is simultaneously produced which 
 charges the aerial in substantially the opposite polarity to 
 
Theories of Transmission. 11 
 
 that of the first charge, and the process is repeated very 
 rapidly a number of times. That is, the aerial is said to 
 oscillate or vibrate. Now, each reversal of the polarity of 
 the charge causes the direction of the strain to change so 
 that the lines resulting from the first charge are displaced 
 by lines running in the opposite direction, thus forming 
 partial loops. These loops form a circular series of rip- 
 ples or waves about the aerial and travel away from it at 
 the rate of 300,000,000 meters per second (186,000 miles 
 per second), or the speed of light. In the figure, the ar- 
 rows represent the direction of the lines of strain and a 
 little study of this imaginary diagram will aid in the un- 
 derstanding of wireless phenomena. It is understood, of 
 course, that the gap is charged by a suitable condenser and 
 source of power, which are not shown. 
 
 Two complete oscillations are represented by the loops 
 of fig. la. and the aerial is ready for a third discharge. 
 
 Stratq. 
 
 I] \ ::'.' 
 
 1H IS' 
 
 Jsigijt -.- i - 
 
 T 7 T A> 
 
 G. 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 RE. 
 
 These oscillations really occur at an exceedingly rapid 
 rate and has already been explained, the lines are only 
 imagined to exist for the sake of tangible theoretical con- 
 sideration. 
 
 The function of the aerial capacities of the stations 
 
12 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 will be best understood perhaps, when they are likened to 
 a simple condenser. (See fig. 2.) If this theory is ac- 
 cepted, a wireless circuit is practically a closed circuit in 
 which one branch takes the form of a condenser. How- 
 ever, since the distance between the two aerials concerned 
 is generally many miles, it is not unlikely that the effect 
 is similar to that indicated by fig. 3, since it has been estab- 
 lished that the upper strata of the atmosphere and the sur- 
 rounding space form practically a perfect conductor. At 
 any rate, the distance to which transmission may be car- 
 ried out is less with relatively low aerials than with high 
 ones, the other conditions remaining the same, and for 
 this reason the higher the aerial can be supported, the bet- 
 ter. The item of cost is the practical limit, however, 
 since after a moderate height is reached the expense in- 
 creases in a proportion many times greater than the corre- 
 sponding increase in height. In fact, the height of ex- 
 perimental aerials will naturally be limited for this reason 
 and even in the few large commercial stations, tho. aerial 
 supports form one of the largest items of expense. 
 
 Now the transmitted wave impulses do not travel only 
 in the desired direction to the receiving station, but spread 
 out in all directions with practically equal force. The 
 direction of transmission can be regulated to some extent, 
 however, by means of directive aerials which tend to 
 make the range of transmission greater in one desired 
 direction than in other directions. Wireless transmission 
 is perhaps best understood by a comparison to the waves 
 which result when a small stone is thrown into a smooth 
 body of water. It is suggested that the reader try the 
 experiment when the opportunity is presented, if he has 
 not already done so. The stone thrown into the water 
 corresponds to the wave generator at the transmitting 
 station in wireless telegraphy, the water to the space or 
 
Theories of Transmission. 13 
 
 ether and the ripples to the electromagnetic waves. It 
 should be observed that the ripples spread out contin- 
 ually in the form of a circle and that they gradually be- 
 come feeble and feebler, until they are no longer visible. 
 Wireless transmission presents a similar property and the 
 electromagnetic waves become feebler so that the ampli- 
 tude is approximately inversely proportional to the dis- 
 tance from the sending station.* Another factor which 
 limits the transmitter's effective range is the item of ab- 
 sorbtion. Now, it has been found that the absorbtion 
 varies in some cases with the wave length employed. In 
 general, long wave lengths are subjected to less absorption 
 than wave lengths which are relatively short. Inasmuch 
 as the experimenter is expected to confine his experiments 
 to the use of short wave lengths this is a matter of some 
 importance. In transmission over water short wave 
 lengths are nearly as good as the long ones, but over ordi- 
 nary land, long wave lengths are a material advantage. 
 However in the case of land transmission over dry soil, 
 neither long nor short wave lengths appear to have an 
 advantage. It is understood that short waves mean those 
 having a wave length of 200 meters or less, while long 
 waves refer to waves having from 1,200 to 4,000 or more 
 meters for their wave length. Wave lengths between 300 
 and 600 meters are generally recognized as the most ad- 
 vantageous for ordinary purposes and since they are used 
 for commercial purposes the experimenter is expected to 
 use wave lengths which do not come within this range to- 
 gether with a safe margin, in order to avoid needless and 
 useless confusion. 
 
 Other items which affect the transmission are irregu- 
 larities in the composition of the earth such as mountains, 
 
 This is not a rigid rule or even exact. 
 
14 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 minerals, etc., and daylight. It has been found that mes- 
 sages can be received over much greater distances at night 
 than during the daytime. The difference is not marked 
 or important over short distances and can be overcome to 
 a considerable extent over long distances, by the use of 
 long wave lengths. The reason why daylight affects the 
 transmission is not really understood at the present time, 
 although there are several theories. It is believed that 
 the effect is due either to the ionization of the air or the 
 upper strata or both, by the sun's light. When the theory 
 that the aerial capacities of the stations form a condenser 
 is used and it is remembered that the action of a condenser 
 depends largely upon having a good dielectric material so 
 that there will be little leakage, this theory seems plaus- 
 ible. Rain and damp weather have a similar effect on 
 transmission because the dielectric is presumably rendered 
 less conductive to the waves and more conductive to 
 leakage. 
 
 Now since the waves tend to spread out in all direc- 
 tions, it will be evident that all the receiving stations with- 
 in the range of a transmitting station will be capable of re- 
 ceiving the same message equally well, other conditions 
 remaining the same. This lack of secrecy is a consider- 
 able detriment to the advance of the art and efforts are 
 constantly being made to overcome this lack of direct 
 communication in a desired straight line. Instruments and 
 apparatus have been developed which make it possible to 
 either receive or not receive a given message with a cer- 
 tain degree of precision and directive methods have been 
 developed to a certain degree as has already been men- 
 tioned. Another serious drawback to the advancement of 
 the art is the matter of interference. This is an item 
 which directly concerns the experimenter and although 
 several arrangements to overcome this objectionable fea- 
 
Theories of Transmission. 15 
 
 ture have been developed, there is considerable room for 
 improvements. 
 
 Interference can be understood by reference to the ex- 
 periment of throwing the stone into the water. If two 
 stones instead of one are thrown into the water, and if one 
 is considerably larger than the other, it will be noticed that 
 the ripples or waves from the larger stone tend to absorb 
 and superpose those of the smaller stone. A similar 
 drowning out occurs in wireless transmission, and when 
 several stations are sending simultaneously it becomes 
 practically impossible to select a desired message unless 
 it is noticeably stronger than the remainder of the im- 
 pulses. It frequently happens that six or more stations 
 are sending simultaneously with approximately the same 
 wave length and with strong apparatus, making it nearly 
 impossible to receive an intelligible message from a single 
 one of them. Further, when a long distance message is 
 being received, and another station sending at approxi- 
 mately the same wave length and situated in the neighbor- 
 hood of the receiving station starts in, the result is ob- 
 vious. To be sure, apparatus has been developed which 
 makes the selection of desired signals, to the exclusion of 
 others, certain within limits, but such cases as the one 
 mentioned can of course not be entirely avoided, with 
 the best of the present apparatus. When the stations are 
 all sending at wave lengths, which differs considerably 
 from one another and are sharply tuned, the desired mes- 
 sage can generally be received without much difficulty. 
 However, if untuned or only loosely tuned signals are sent 
 out from a moderately strong or neighboring station, it 
 becomes practically impossible to tune them out because 
 they are received by forced oscillations. It is like trying 
 to hear a phonograph a block away when a band is play- 
 ing within a few feet of your ears. 
 
16 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 When tuned or sharply tuned waves are spoken of, it 
 means waves such as are transmitted from tuned trans- 
 mitting stations so that it is necessary to tune within a 
 very few per cent in order to receive them. When un- 
 tuned or forced oscillations are spoken of, it means waves 
 which may be received without sharp tuning or signals 
 which have several wave lengths without any definite 
 characteristics. This is the sort which is so generally em- 
 ployed by beginners and even by commercial stations in 
 some cases and can be received by all stations within 
 range without any special effort. This property is cer- 
 tainly useful in case of emergencies at sea, but in ordi- 
 nary transmission the stations with untuned wave trans- 
 mission are like noxious weeds, and should be gotten rid 
 of as soon as possible whenever they interfere with other 
 stations. The matter of tuning will be more fully taken 
 up, later. 
 
 The only other natural condition of importance which 
 affects wireless transmission is the matter of atmospheric 
 disturbances. Ordinary static disturbances resenible the 
 disturbances caused by untuned waves and are practi- 
 cally impossible to entirely exclude, particularly when 
 they are present in a large quantity. Certain localities 
 have less trouble from static interferences than others, 
 but there are only a few localities in which static does 
 not cause more or less trouble. In cases of local elec- 
 trical storms, transmission or reception becomes imprac- 
 ticable and even dangerous. 
 
 The sending and the receiving stations of a wireless 
 system are similar and the same aerial capacity may be 
 used for both sending and receiving. The receiving ap- 
 paratus of an up-to-date wireless system generally in- 
 cludes a detector to detect or rectify the incoming os- 
 cillations, sensitive recorders, which generally take the 
 
Theories of Transmission. 17 
 
 form of telephone receivers, to receive the intelligence, 
 and various inductive and capacity apparatus to tune 
 the station to receive desired signals to the exclusion of 
 undesired signals. 
 
 These points and the practical considerations which 
 they involve will be discussed in detail in the following 
 chapters. 
 
 The reader should always bear in mind that the radiant 
 energy used for wireless work is as real as is the radiant 
 energy of the sun. The length of the electric waves with 
 which we are concerned can be controlled at will and 
 while they may be made a fraction of an inch or several 
 miles long by merely altering the oscillatory cir;uit as 
 described in chapter four, practical work is at present 
 carried out within 150 to 6,000 meters. 
 
 The matter in this chapter is only a mere outlitre of 
 the many conditions involved in wireless transmission, 
 and the reader is referred to works by Pierce, Fleming, 
 Murray, and others, for further accounts of the history 
 and theories of wireless transmission. The mathematical 
 reader will find these volumes of particular interest. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 AERIALS. 
 
 The essential conditions for wireless transmission have 
 been briefly outlined and we will now take up the matter 
 of aerials. It will be remembered that short waves are 
 more easily dissipated than long waves. This is particu- 
 larly true during the summer months and when the trans- 
 mitting station is in the vicinity of a large number of 
 trees. Both the sunlight, and the foliage on the trees 
 tend to absorb the shorter waves to a greater extent 
 than the longer waves. Perhaps it is well to more fully 
 define what is meant by wave length at this time. 
 
 Now the electromagnetic waves which are generated 
 and radiated at the sending station are similar to light 
 waves in that they have the same velocity (186,000 miles 
 per second) in air of the same temperature and pressure, 
 have the physical properties of reflection, refraction and 
 polarization, but are different in that light waves have a 
 relatively short wave length while the electrical oscilla- 
 tions have a relatively long wave length. It may be ex- 
 plained also, that the length of a wave means the distance 
 between like points on any two consecutive waves. It 
 will be remembered and noted that the transmitter of a 
 wireless station sends out a series of waves at a very 
 rapid rate, so that by the time one has left the aerial and 
 another leaves, the first will have traveled a distance 
 roughly equal to the wave length. Since these wave im- 
 
Design for Aerials. 19 
 
 pulses occur at a very rapid rate (high frequency), a 
 single transmitted dot may be made up of several wave 
 impulses. 
 
 The aerial capacity or antenna consists of metallic 
 conductors insulated from foreign objects and elevated 
 in the air. It is generally made up of a number of sim- 
 ilar wires, and its purpose is to radiate electromagnetic 
 waves when used as the aerial for a transmitter, and to 
 receive or regenerate intercepted waves when used with 
 receiving apparatus. The aerial itself may take a number 
 of shapes and since each has individual characteristics, 
 different effects are obtainable from different combina- 
 tions of conductors. In the early stages of the art solid 
 metal or wire network aerials were adopted and the ex- 
 perimenters used chicken netting, bronze screen and sim- 
 ilar materials for aerials, but it was soon found that 
 uniform conductors separated by a uniform distance were 
 better suited for this purpose. 
 
 Now the dimensions of the aerial is one of the main 
 factors which determine the efficiency of the wireless sta- 
 tion and also limit the efficient wave length of the trans- 
 mitted impulses. In accordance with good practice and 
 in order to keep within the regulations embodied in pend- 
 ing wireless legislation,* the experimenter is expected and 
 will very likely be required to limit his experiments to 
 wave lengths which are not over two hundred meters 
 long, or else to use wave lengths of a very long length, 
 (2,000 meters or more) . Now although low wave lengths 
 are more readily absorbed and dissipated they are also 
 more suited to low power apparatus than the long wave 
 lengths. However, if the reader proposes to use power in 
 excess of one K. W., it will be advisable to use the long 
 waves for the experiments in order to obtain a desired 
 
20 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 degree of efficiency.* 
 
 When the experiments are to be carried out in the 
 vicinity of considerable foliage it will be advisable per- 
 haps, to use the long wave length, but in all ordinary con- 
 ditions and particularly in cities having numbers of other 
 stations, the short wave length only should be used. It 
 should be remembered that the aerial itself is only one 
 of the factors which determine the transmitted wave 
 length and that the experimenter has a variable range 
 of wave lengths at his service by employing tuning helixes, 
 oscillation transformers, or if very high wave lengths are 
 desired he may use a loading coil. 
 
 The first item to consider is the exact location for the 
 aerial support, or the support and the height for the same. 
 As has already been pointed out, the higher the aerial is 
 placed above the surface of the earth, the better. When 
 only occasional experiments are to be conducted, a tandem 
 of kites, preferably box kites, will serve very well. The 
 unsteady height resulting from the rising and falling 
 motion is, however, not suited to delicate tuning, since the 
 capacity of the aerial is thereby altered. There is no 
 limit to the ingenuity which may be called to act in the 
 selection of inexpensive aerial supports. A simple insul- 
 ated wire dropped from the roof or an upper story of an 
 apartment house, flat, water tower, or similar structure to 
 a position some distance below (30 to 130 feet), will serve 
 as a fair aerial. Insulated telephone cables may be im- 
 pressed into service for receiving purposes alone. Two 
 grounds may be used in place of an aerial, if no supports 
 are available. Thus the water pipes may be used as an 
 
 * See Chapter 19. The law referred to has been en- 
 acted. 
 
Design for Aerials. 21 
 
 aerial while the gas pipes, or a cistern is used as the 
 ground. Or the steel frame or tin roof of a building may 
 be used for an aerial while another part of another build- 
 ing is used for a ground. Even leader pipes and gutters 
 have been impressed into service in certain cases. Com- 
 mon wire netting suspended from trees or telephone poles 
 may be utilized. It is always desirable to insulate even 
 makeshift aerials and when two grounds are used, one 
 should be connected through a condenser to the instru- 
 ments. The author has even made use of a small aerial 
 suspended in an attic, a brass bed in an upper story of a 
 residence; and for very short distances such common 
 things as dishpans, bed springs, and what not! may be 
 utilized if nothing else is obtainable. During some ex- 
 periments in Tripoli, Mr. Marconi is reported to have laid 
 both the aerial and a similar set of conductors to act as a 
 ground directly on the sand, parallel to the direction in 
 which the signals were to be sent. It is said that no aerial 
 supports were necessary because the sand was perfectly 
 dry and resembled glass in its conducting properties. 
 These items are merely suggested as suitable makeshifts 
 in case other and more business like arrangements are not 
 practicable and good results may be obtained with them 
 by exercising reasonable skill. 
 
 The supports should take the form of natural supports 
 whenever possible as this will save considerable expense. 
 Thus short extensions to trees, houses and building tops, 
 and similar structures make excellent supports. Permis- 
 sion may often be obtained from the local telephone or 
 light companies to place extensions on one or more of 
 their poles so that they will not interfere with the regular 
 service and some companies will even give aid if properly 
 approached. The author has utilized such poles for his 
 experiments for a good many years. 
 
22 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The erection of large poles from the ground up is a 
 difficult task and one which had best be referred to the 
 company which sells the pole or else to experienced erec- 
 tors. 
 
 Good straight grained 2x2 stock is suitable for small 
 poles up to 40 feet, and the size mentioned is preferably 
 arranged into two or three lengths. Perhaps the best sup- 
 port for experimental stations, when natural supports 
 are not available, is iron pipe. This form of support may 
 also be used in addition to natural supports such as house- 
 tops, etc. The height of the aerial should always be suf- 
 ficient to clear objects between stations if possible. For 
 experimental purposes a height of about 50 feet is a good 
 average, though a higher one is preferable when possible. 
 
 After the height has been determined, the other di- 
 mension to be considered is the spread of the aerial. In 
 many cases a low height can be compensated by a corre- 
 sponding increase in the aerial spread. However, since 
 an increase in the horizontal spread of an aerial also in- 
 creases the minimum wave length of the transmitted im- 
 pulses, this dimension must be limited so that the mini- 
 mum wave length will be about 150 meters if the wave 
 length is to be limited to 200 meters or less, the difference 
 being left to the adjustment of the transmitting induct- 
 ance. When possible it is a good plan to have a duplex 
 aerial, which is nothing more or less than two separate 
 aerials, one for receiving and sending in short wave 
 lengths, and the other for receiving in the commercial 
 wave lengths, but not for sending. While this means two 
 separate aerials and should be regarded as such, much 
 ingenuity may be used in utilizing the same supports for 
 the two aerials. Thus one may be supported some dis- 
 tance below the other, and similar arrangements may be 
 carried out in a variety of ways. The main objection 
 
Design for Aerials. 
 
 23 
 
 to a duplex aerial is that part of the transmitted energy 
 is absorbed by the idle aerial. (See fig. 4.) This can be 
 overcome to an extent by placing the two aerials at right 
 angles to each other. 
 
 The large receiving aerial of a duplex system may 
 have a length of from 100 to 1,000 feet depending on 
 the individual conditions, about 400 feet being a good 
 length. The length means the effective length including 
 the several parts. For the vertical, horizontal, or dipped 
 
 FIG. 
 
 FIC.-d.B 
 
 A. Al receiving aerial. 1-2 leads. A2 sending 1 aerial. B 
 Al A2 divided aerial. 1-2-3 leads. Transmitting short 
 circuit 2-3 and use or leave 2-3 open and use either 1 or 2. 
 Receiving use 1 with 2-3 closed, other variations also. 
 
 aerial (straightaway) the length of one of the wires is the 
 effective length. (See the figures.) The effective length 
 of the T aerial is the length of the vertical part plus one- 
 half of the horizontal portion, while that of the reversed 
 L aerial is the length of the horizontal part plus the length 
 of the vertical portion. In a loop aerial the length is the 
 sum of the lengths of the sides of the reversed U loop. 
 With the ordinary umbrella aerial, the length is roughly 
 equal to the length of one of the uniform aerial conduc- 
 tors, as is also the case in a directive aerial having several 
 independent and uniform conductors. In order to keep 
 
24 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 within the limits of the standard short wave length, an 
 effective length of 120 or 125 feet should not be exceed- 
 ed.* The transmitting aerial should, therefore, be made 
 so that the effective length is within this limit. It is 
 understood that the length of the lead-in is included in the 
 effective length. The effective length is really the dis- 
 tance from the transmitting instruments to the aerial 
 proper, plus the effective length of the aerial itself. In 
 case a long ground lead is necessary to secure a ground to 
 the instruments, its length must also be added to the 
 effective length. In the latter case, the aerial itself must 
 obviously be still further limited. It is suggested that the 
 short length can be partially compensated for by making 
 the capacity of the aerial correspondingly larger, but this 
 must not be carried too far so that the capacity is too 
 large for the charging capacity of the sending instru- 
 ments. It is understood that the capacity of the aerial 
 can be increased by adding more wires to it. A large 
 electrostatic capacity in the aerial means greater energy 
 and more power in the transmitted waves provided the 
 transmitting instruments are able to charge it with a 
 sufficient potential. The wires should always be arranged 
 symmetrically and evenly spaced in order to decrease the 
 effect of mutual induction between the adjacent wires as 
 much as possible. An increase in the conductors of the 
 aerial does not increase the capacity to a corresponding 
 extent on account of this mutual induction. The distance 
 between the respective conductors of an ordinary aerial 
 should not be less than .02 of their common length. Thus 
 in an aerial 100 feet long, the wires should be spaced 
 at least 2 feet apart, or even more if possible. In addition 
 
 * This means that the length of the aerial proper should 
 not exceed 75 feet, in order to allow for lead-ins. 
 
Design for Aerials. 25 
 
 to increasing the capacity of the aerial, an increase in the 
 number of conductors decreases the resistance. A mini- 
 mum of three wires and a maximum of 8 or 10 is the 
 range of the number of conductors suitable for the aver- 
 age experimental station and it is not desirable to exceed 
 these limits. Some results may of course be had with 
 even a single conductor, but for efficiency a plurality of 
 conductors is desirable. 
 
 FIG, S, 
 
 The number of conductors used affects the transmis- 
 sion more than the reception of signals. It is desirable 
 to use two conductors placed 6 feet apart instead of four 
 wires only nine or twelve inches apart and the same rule 
 may be applied for other dimensions, since much of the 
 effect of the extra wires is lost by reason of their close 
 proximity. When only two wires are used, they should 
 of course have a correspondingly increased capacity. In 
 any case, the size of the aerial conductors should not 
 exceed No. 8, since larger sizes are wasteful and of pro- 
 hibitive weight. No. 12 is a convenient size for experi- 
 
26 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 mental aerials. The constructional details will be more 
 fully taken up a little later. 
 
 For short wave lengths, the author considers that the 
 umbrella aerial or perhaps a modified umbrella will prove 
 the most satisfactory because of the large capacity which 
 is possible in a small space. Suitable forms for this type 
 
 FIC.G. 
 
 of aerial are indicated in fig. 5. This aerial is called the 
 umbrella presumably by reason of its resemblance to the 
 ribs of the umbrella. This arrangement may easily be 
 converted into a directive aerial as shown in fig. 6, in 
 which form it will doubtless be the most useful to experi- 
 menters. The several conductors are preferably insulated 
 from each other in this case, though they may be con- 
 nected together at the top or pole end. Each wire is sep- 
 
Design -for Aerials. 27 
 
 arately connected to a single pole switch, preferably of 
 the common porcelain base type. With this arrangement, 
 one or more wires may be used independently from the 
 remainder, or all may be used if considerable capacity for 
 transmitting purposes is desired. This form of aerial is 
 well adapted to experimental purposes and has the addi- 
 tional advantage of being mechanically strong and requir- 
 
 FIG.V. 
 
 FIG. a. 
 
 FIG. 9 
 
 ing only a single pole support. This type of aerial is par- 
 ticularly suited to house tops, the roofs of buildings, and 
 similar places. 
 
 In congested places where the available space for the 
 aerial is limited, as on ships, various types of horizontal 
 or flat top aerials are used. Experimenters will find these 
 types well adapted to their purposes. These aerials are 
 also known by names which correspond to their respective 
 shapes. The reversed L type is shown in fig. 7, and is 
 highly directive by reason of its shape. The maximum 
 radiation is in a direction opposite to that in which its 
 
28 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 free end points and it also receives signals at the best 
 from the same general direction. The leads are taken off 
 from one end of the aerial, and if the two ends are of 
 uneven length, the lead should be taken off from the lower 
 end. In the latter case, the aerial is called an inclined 
 aerial. When the leads are taken off in the form of a T 
 as in fig. 8, signals are sent and received the best in the 
 plane of the aerial, but the directive effect is considerably 
 less than with the L type. Instead of taking the leads off 
 at right angles it is often necessary or convenient to take 
 them at an angle to form an oblique lead. The several 
 wires are preferably connected together at one end, al- 
 though this is not essential. 
 
 By taking a double lead as illustrated in fig. 9, either 
 as a T or L type, a looped aerial is formed. This inverted 
 U type is adapted to close tuning and eliminates humming 
 caused by neighboring telephone and power lines. These 
 types may of course be considerably varied, but a simple 
 form is desirable in order to secure close, sharp tuning. 
 
 Having gained some idea of the several types and 
 general features of aerials, some of the constructional 
 details will now be considered. 
 
 INSULATORS. 
 
 It is important that the aerial be suspended so that it 
 is thoroughly insulated. The insulation should be effect- 
 ive during all kinds of weather and faulty insulation 
 should be avoided with considerable care if an efficient 
 station is desired. 
 
 Hard rubber, fibre, and unglazed porcelain are not 
 very desirable as aerial insulators. A material known bv 
 the trade name of Electrose is made into a number of 
 suitable forms. This type of insulator is also mechanic- 
 
Design for Aerials. 29 
 
 ally strong, since metal rings are molded directly into 
 the insulating material. Corrugations are provided to 
 increase the distance over which a surface charge must 
 pass and also serve to prevent the formation of a con- 
 ducting film. 
 
 Aerials for transmitting purposes are necessarily bet- 
 ter insulated than those used for receiving purposes only, 
 but in any case the aerial conductors should not touch 
 foreign or partially conductive materials. Common two 
 wire glazed porcelain cleats make convenient insulators 
 for small stations. These may be had for a few cents 
 a piece. The holes are \y 2 inches apart, so that a single 
 cleat is sufficient insulation for a receiving aerial and also 
 for a transmitting station in which only 100 watts or a 
 one inch coil is used. 
 
 When more power or larger coils are to be used, sev- 
 eral of these cleats may be arranged in tandem. The 
 cleats may be joined, and used by passing wire through 
 the two holes so that the wire to be insulated is separated 
 by the insulator from the wire attached to the support. 
 There are various other forms of porcelain and glass 
 insulators which may be had at supply houses and since 
 they are all used in much the same manner, no further 
 comment seems necessary. Strain insulators are useful 
 in breaking up the guy wires used in supporting the poles, 
 so that the transmitted waves are not unduly absorbed. 
 This form of insulator is also useful for the main aerial 
 supports. The leads or lead-in wires should be insulated 
 with the same care as the aerial itself. The supports 
 which hold the leads should have insulations of the same 
 general nature as that provided for the aerial. 
 
 A problem is sometimes presented when it comes to 
 bringing the wires into the building. A good way is to 
 
30 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 bore holes for the wires, in a glass window. Heavy por- 
 celain tubes placed in holes in the woodwork are also 
 suitable for small stations. A fairly good lead-in insu- 
 lator can be made by using a nest of tubes, one over the 
 other, starting with a half inch in outside diameter and 
 ending in the largest convenient outside diameter. A 
 
 Ft 
 
 a. W. window. H. hole in glass. 3 insulator to take up 
 strain. L Lead-in, b. P windowpane. K slide casing. B 
 board with insulators, window casing rests on B. c. Tl. T2 
 Porcelain tubes. 
 
 number of special insulators may be had at supply houses. 
 See fig. 10 for several details of construction for the 
 lead-ins. The wires should be anchored by an insulator 
 just before entering the building in order to take up the 
 strain. 
 
 The general manner of suspending an aerial is 
 illustrated in fig. 11. The spreaders can be of wood or 
 bamboo. Curtain poles are suitable for this purpose. 
 Twisted wires, screw eyes, mast withes and similar hard- 
 
Design for Aerials. 
 
 31 
 
 ware or improvised hardware are useful in fastening the 
 insulators and supports. 
 
 ASSEMBLING. CONDUCTORS. 
 
 In assembling the aerial conductors and the spreaders, 
 it is advisable to arrange everything on the ground first. 
 The wires may be of copper, tinned copper, aluminum, 
 or phosphor bronze. Iron wire is not recommended, al- 
 
 though it may be used. The phosphor bronze is the most 
 desirable because it is strong, springy, and may be had in 
 a standard strand of seven No. 22 B&S conductors. It 
 is generally sold by the foot. Stranded conductors have 
 a slight advantage over solid conductors. 
 
 Although copper has less than one-half the tensile 
 strength of phosphor bronze, it is very easily obtained 
 and quite suited to aerials. It has a good conductivity, 
 
32 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 is pliable, can be easily soldered, and may be had in 
 strands if desired. Ordinary No. 12 telephone copper 
 wire is suitable for experimental aerials. The wire used 
 should never exceed No. 16 or its equivalent in fineness 
 or No. 8 in coarseness. 
 
 Aluminum is not so good a conductor nor is it as 
 strong as copper wire, but it is pliable and very cheap 
 when compared foot by foot. The main difficulties with 
 aluminum aerials are that the wires are easily broken by 
 twisting and that a non-conductive coating soon forms 
 which practically insulates the joints unless they have 
 been well soldered. 
 
 In using aluminum wires, kinks, bends, and excessive 
 strains should be avoided. This also applies to other 
 wires. Aluminum is difficult to solder but special solders 
 are obtainable which make the operation reasonably sure 
 provided the joint is well cleaned to begin with. All 
 joints in the aerial should be soldered and it is also 
 advisable to tape them with a good quality of electrician's 
 tape and rubber solution. Loose contacts in an aerial 
 cut down the efficiency materially and also make the aerial 
 weak mechanically. The high frequency currents must 
 have as clear and as good a conducting path as possible 
 if the waves are to be radiated without considerable loss. 
 
 JOINTS. 
 
 Fig. 12 shows a fairly good way to make a joint with- 
 out solder. The wires should be cleaned and the joint 
 made tight, after which, wrap several layers of tinfoil 
 about the joint and tape well.* When the aerial is con- 
 structed with every concern for efficiency, the wires will 
 
 * These points have appeared in several magazines and 
 in general use. 
 
 x 
 
 are in general use. 
 
Design for Aerials. 
 
 33 
 
 be thoroughly insulated even at the points where they 
 make contact with the metal connections of insulators. 
 This may be done by tape, and the chief object is to 
 prevent thermo-electric and galvanic action between the 
 dissimilar metals. Fig. 13 illustrates a suitable joint for 
 lead wires which prevents the wire from breaking by the 
 swaying motion given it by the wind. When electrician's 
 tape and liquid insulation are used, a very good water and 
 
 -a 
 
 FIG, IE, 
 
 rust tight joint is insured. The wire conductors should 
 be kept free from nicks, kinks, and sharp bends, since 
 they are easily parted at such points. 
 
 WIRES. SIZE. 
 
 Large spans require larger sizes of wires than short 
 spans, since they are subject to greater strains. Numbers 
 8 to 10 are suitable for spans in excess of 200 feet, while 
 numbers 11 to 15 are suitable for the shorter spans. In 
 planning the conductors larger sizes should be used when 
 aluminum wire is used than for copper, larger for copper 
 than for phosphor bronze, and larger sizes should also 
 be used according to the increase in the span. 
 
34 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 AERIAL SUPPORTS. 
 
 It is always advisable to support the aerial by means 
 of pulleys and ropes, so that it may be lowered for re- 
 pairs when necessary. Good galvanized pulleys may be 
 had at a low price at hardware and supply houses and 
 ropes and flexible wires may also be had at these places. 
 Flexible wire is preferable to rope, since the latter re- 
 quires frequent renewals. The rope or wire should al- 
 ways be sufficient in size to take up all the strains as well 
 
 HE. 
 
 as a large overload. The working strain of manila rope 
 may be found by dividing the square of the circumfer- 
 ence in inches by 8 for the strain in tons. Thus, to find 
 the size of rope required, estimate the weight, allowing 
 for excess strains, and multiply the resulting weight in 
 tons by 8. Extract the square root to get the circumfer- 
 ence in inches. The safe strain for wire rope is found by 
 multiplying the square of the circumference in inches by 
 .3 for iron and .8 for steel wire. For small aerials a 
 good grade of clothes line or clothes wire is suitable. 
 
Design for Aerials. 35 
 
 LEAD-IN WIRES. 
 
 The lead-in wires should have a capacity equal to the 
 capacity of the aerial. Thus, if the aerial is composed 
 of six number 12 wires, the lead-ins should have a capa- 
 city equal to that of six No. 12 wires, and this is prefer- 
 ably obtained by twisting six No. 12 wires together. When 
 the lead-ins have a smaller capacity than the aerial itself, 
 they offer impedence to the high frequency oscillations 
 and the radiation is accordingly reduced. The lead-ins 
 should always be as short and direct as possible and 
 should be connected to the lower end of the aerial. When 
 long variously twisted lead-ins are used, sharp tuning 
 is practically impossible. The lead-in wires are essentially 
 not intended to radiate the energy but to conduct it up 
 to the aerial, from which point it is most efficiently ra- 
 diated. When this is not possible, the aerial itself should 
 be extended directly to the vicinity of the transmitting 
 instruments. The lead-in wires should have nearly a 
 straightaway course, i. e. without angles, bends, joints, 
 or the like. If the term may be used, high frequency 
 currents abhor all joints, kinks, bends, and other defectt 
 in tht conductor. 
 
 POLES. 
 
 While a number of suitable aerial supports have al- 
 ready been suggested, a few notes on poles may be well 
 taken. Many experimenters will find bamboo an excel- 
 lent material for short poles as well as for aerial spread- 
 ers. Portable poles may be made from this material. 
 Jointed wooden poles are not desirable for poles exceed- 
 ing 40 feet in length, a wooden truss work being more 
 suitable for larger poles. Experimenters have made poles 
 from 100 to 150 ft. high on the truss plan without great 
 
36 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 difficulties. In this form of construction, the pole is 
 built up in the form of a long, narrow pyramid with a 
 
 FIG. 14 
 
 base so that the builders can construct it piece by piece. 
 (See fig. 14.) 
 
 Iron pipe makes a good material for aerial poles. The 
 pipe can be had at any plumbers' or hardware supply 
 house in nearly every locality. The stock should be what 
 is known as "heavy." The pole may be made in sections, 
 the lower section being the largest and the upper section 
 
Design for Aerials. 37 
 
 the smallest of the progression. The sections are joined 
 by reducing couplings, and the dealer should be consulted 
 for suitable sizes and dimensions. It will be convenient 
 to have the dealer cut and thread and fit the pipe unless 
 the reader has experience and tools for this purpose. The 
 pole and the joints should be covered with a water proof 
 paint, such as a solution of asphalt. A hole to support 
 a pulley should be drilled near the top, through which 
 the rope to support the aerial is passed. It is desirable 
 to insulate the pole at its base when such procedure is 
 possible. Sockets for this purpose may be made from 
 insulating material or purchased from supply houses. 
 
 The dimensions for a 40 foot iron pipe pole follow. 
 
 Sections three. 
 
 1st. 15 foot length of 2 inch pipe. 
 2nd. 15 foot length of 1J4 mcn pipe. 
 3rd. 10 foot length of $4 inch pipe. 
 
 Reducers of malleable iron. 
 
 1st, between sections 1 and 2 2 by 1J4 mcn reducer. 
 2nd, between sections 2 and 3 1 J4 by J4 mc h reducer. 
 A top ornament or closure may also be provided. 
 
 Guy wires, four wires at approximately a 30 degree 
 angle from the top portion of each section. Size of wires, 
 No. 12 or 14 galvanized iron. The second and third 
 sets are preferably broken by means of insulators. 
 
38 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 GUY WIRES. 
 
 The experimenter should take considerable care to 
 make his aerial strong so that it will not need repairs after 
 every little wind blow. The iron pole will not support 
 itself without the aid of the guy wires. In the case of 
 an umbrella aerial the conductors take the place of the 
 top set of guy wires. Small aerials are easily erected 
 and the guy wires may be tightened by hand. Turnbuckles 
 should be provided for larger poles, however, in order to 
 take up the slack. The insulators in the guy wires should 
 be placed every ten or fifteen feet and may be of the 
 type already described. Strain insulators are preferable 
 for this purpose, however. 
 
 While the matter of aerials has now been considered 
 in some detail, the minor details are left to the individual 
 resources of the reader, since the conditions vary widely 
 in each case. The matter in this and other parts of the 
 book is intended largely as suggestive rather than dicta- 
 tive, and various details may be modified, provided that 
 the essential principles and dimensions are not violated. 
 It is suggested that the umbrella, variable directive aerial, 
 T aerial, and directive aerial will be most suited in the 
 order mentioned, and that the duplex idea should be 
 adopted if it is desirable to receive from the commercial 
 stations without interfering with them. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 GROUNDS AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION. 
 
 Equally or more important than a good aerial is the 
 item of a good ground. The quality of the ground con- 
 nection materially affects the efficiency of a station and its 
 operating range. Variations in the ground connection 
 may cause a difference of failure or success. A good 
 ground connection, then, is essential to an efficient wire- 
 less station. The various means for obtaining grounds 
 may be itemized and considered as follows : 
 
 GROUNDS IN WATER. 
 
 This form consists of a mass of metal suspended in 
 the ocean, a lake, a river, a well, or a cistern and forms 
 a good connection. In fact, the grounding of ship stations 
 through the hull affords a connection almost as good as 
 metal. When connection is made to a pump or cistern 
 pipe, the iron should be thoroughly cleaned and the con- 
 ductor soldered to it. 
 
 IMBEDDED GROUNDS. 
 
 A good connection can generally be had by burying a 
 large surface of sheet copper or zinc in damp earth, at 
 least 12 feet below the surface and preferably more. A 
 ground conductor should be soldered to the sheets which 
 should be well connected to each other. The sheets may 
 
40 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 be in the form of old copper boilers which may be had 
 from the scrap heap, and it is desirable to have a total 
 surface equal to a single flat sheet, 10 feet x 10 feet. It 
 is good practice to imbed the sheets in between layers of 
 coke in order to insure a uniformly good contact during 
 the different times of the year. 
 
 IMBEDDED GROUNDS. SPECIAL FORMS. 
 
 There are several ready made grounds to be had in 
 the market, but since these are rarely intended for other 
 than use for telephone lines and for lightning grounds, 
 several of them connected together must be used for an 
 effective wireless ground. They consist essentially of 
 sheet copper formed so as to present a large surface to 
 the ground and in some forms, a coke filling is used. 
 Chemical grounds consist of the ordinary imbedded 
 ground with layers of coke and calcium chloride, or cal- 
 cium chloride alone around the metal. The calcium chlor- 
 ide is very cheap and insures a state of moisture about 
 the plates at all times. About 50 pounds of coke and 25 
 pounds of calcium chloride will suffice in conjunction with 
 100 square feet of imbedded sheet metal to form a very 
 good ground. 
 
 CONNECTION TO GAS AND WATER PIPES. 
 
 In the cities, the gas and the water supply pipes are 
 commonly used, preferably the latter. Special ground 
 clamps may be had from supply houses for a very small 
 sum which are adapted for making good connection with 
 the pipes. When the pipes are used for a ground it is 
 advisable to short circuit the meter by means of a heavy 
 piece of wire. The wire from the instruments to the 
 ground should be run as straight and direct as possible 
 
Grounds and Lightning Protection. 41 
 
 and all joints should be soldered. When several pipes, 
 as water, drain, and gas, are in close proximity to each 
 other, it is advisable to connect all of them. 
 
 For small stations and also as a separate lightning 
 ground, an iron pipe or several iron pipes two or three 
 inches in diameter and ten feet long may be buried into 
 the ground just outside of the building in a convenient 
 position. The lower end is preferably pointed by ham- 
 mering the pipes into a V shape. (A blacksmith can do 
 this for you.) The ground wire should be thoroughly 
 soldered with care to this pipe and the joint covered with 
 pitch or asphaltum. If possible this ground should be 
 located over a drain pipe or otherwise provided with a 
 supply of water. 
 
 INDIRECT GROUNDS. 
 
 There are two general types of indirect grounds and 
 neither is as desirable as a good direct ground. In one 
 form, a second aerial is constructed and suspended in a 
 position close to but insulated from the ground. It thus 
 forms a capacity or condenser with the ground. This 
 type is adapted to close tuning and is convenient when a 
 direct ground is impracticable for one reason or another, 
 but is considerably less efficient. The other form of 
 indirect ground is similar, except that a large meshwork 
 of bare wires or a netting is spread over the surface in 
 the immediate vicinity of the station without insulation, 
 so that it makes both direct and indirect contact with the 
 earth. A very large area must be covered before this 
 method is efficient, but it is sometimes used for portable 
 outfits, in which case the network is spread out in grass or 
 a similar moist surface in preference to other places. 
 For experimental receiving purposes a fair ground may 
 be had by driving a spike into a tree and making contact 
 
42 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 therewith. The steel frame of buildings may be used as a 
 ground if nothing better is obtainable. In any case the 
 ground wire should be run direct from the instruments 
 and as short as is possible. 
 
 THE GROUND WIRE. 
 
 It is not necessary to insulate the ground wire, al- 
 though it is advisable to do so. When it is over 20 feet 
 in length it should be well insulated to prevent loss from 
 induced currents. The use of a ground wire no less than 
 No. 4, B. & S. in diameter is advised and even larger 
 sizes are desirable. Of course smaller sizes will serve 
 to a sufficient extent for experimental purposes, but the 
 larger size means a better direct ground. Grounding 
 should not be done by connecting to gas or electric fix- 
 tures, since these are often insulated from the ground and 
 in any case afford poor connections. 
 
 PROTECTION FROM LIGHTNING. 
 
 Wireless aerials do not attract lightning, as the term 
 is generally understood, but they do accumulate undesir- 
 able static charges during the stormy part of the year. 
 When well grounded OUTSIDE of the building, the 
 aerial forms an EFFICIENT LIGHTNING ROD and 
 actually protects the station and surrounding buildings. 
 These facts have been ascertained by the author by num- 
 erous experiments and although the author's station has 
 been struck several times, no damage has ever resulted. 
 Experiments were carried out with a condenser and gap 
 in the aerial during the electrical storms and large charges 
 were accumulated and experimented with at such times. 
 Inasmuch as the experiment is attended with some danger, 
 its repetition is not recommended. In the experiences of 
 
Grounds and Lightning Protection. 
 
 43 
 
 others with which the author is acquainted, several cases 
 have presented warnings. In one case, the operator had 
 his ears pierced while receiving (or trying to), from 
 which it may be inferred that it is NOT ADVISABLE to 
 operate during severe local storms. In another case, the 
 operator had his aerial, which was a high one, well 
 grounded and no harm resulted to it or the immediate 
 neighborhood, while a grocery a block away was com- 
 pletely demolished. It is always desirable to ground your 
 
 FiG.ia. 
 
 re. 
 
 aerial during storms and at all times when it is not in 
 use. This is conveniently accomplished by means of a 
 double throw switch on the outside of the building so 
 that the aerial is grounded to an outside ground when 
 not in use. The ground connection should be No. 4 B. 
 & S. wire or even larger and very direct. (See fig. 15.) 
 The switch should have a carrying capacity of 25 or 30 
 
44 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 amperes. Fifty or 100 ampere switches are the standard 
 size. 
 
 AN EFFICIENT LIGHTNING PROTECTION. 
 
 This arrangement takes advantage of the fact that 
 the high frequency surges abhor impedence from a choke 
 coil. The choke coils are in fact more advantageous than 
 insulators would be. See fig. 16 for the connections. The 
 
 FIG. IE 
 
 s.e Sw'.t 
 
 ,,,-., 
 
 )/ 
 
 & 
 
 CK,K Coils 
 
 D.P. SWltvJl 
 
 ^mmj-^i^ 
 
 S. P. S wi 
 
 When using instruments open (4), close (1), (2) and (3). 
 When not using instruments open (3), (1), and (2). Close (4). 
 
 main switch should be able to carry 30 amperes and when 
 the station is in use the choke coils are short circuited by 
 the auxiliary switches so that they will not impede the 
 
Grounds and Lightning Protection. 45 
 
 transmitted impulses. This arrangement prevents the 
 charge from damaging the instruments or the building. 
 The choke coils are made by winding 30 turns of No. 4 
 B. & S. wire on a large porcelain tube, two or three inches 
 in diameter. 
 
 Lightning grounds should always be carried out to 
 the outside of the building or station and if the regular 
 ground does not meet this requirement, a separate ground 
 must be used. Ordinary short gap lightning arresters 
 are useless in wireless stations, because the transmitted 
 impulses jump the short gap the same as lightning does. 
 
 The lightning protection for a station does not cost 
 a great deal and is well worth while. It is one of the 
 first items which should receive attention, particularly in 
 mountainous regions. 
 
 When the station is not to be used for a long time, 
 as during a vacation trip, it is desirable to lower the aerial 
 conductors so that the liability to become blown down 
 by winds or be struck by lightning is entirely removed. 
 
 It is not necessary to take the aerial down during stor- 
 my weather, however, or even desirable, provided that it 
 is well grounded. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 GENERAL FEATURES OF THE TRANSMITTER. 
 RESONANCE. 
 
 In arranging the material for this book, the author 
 spent considerable time in selecting a logical order for the 
 several items and it is suggested that the most benefit will 
 result from a consideration of the matter in the order 
 given. It is certainly possible and perhaps even desirable 
 to start in with any one chapter and to find the desired 
 matter without reading through matter of indirect interest. 
 In the present chapter the general features of the trans- 
 mitter together with a consideration of resonance is to 
 be considered, and it is suggested that this matter be un^ 
 derstood before referring to the chapters on the several 
 details. 
 
 To begin with, we are only to consider tuned transmit- 
 ters, i. e. those which are coupled to the antenna circuit. 
 There are two general types of coupled transmitters, the 
 direct coupled and the indirect or inductively coupled. 
 Each has certain characteristics which will be considered 
 more fully. The exact circuits employed are of course 
 somewhat varied, but since the general features are the 
 same the circuit shown in fig. 17 may be regarded as typ- 
 ical of the direct coupled type, while that shown in fig. 
 18 may be regarded as typical for the inductively coupled 
 type. For the present the circuits will be regarded as 
 excited only by means of ordinary spark gaps. Other 
 
The Transmitter. Resonance. 
 
 47 
 
 means for excitation which are within the limits of the 
 average experimenter, will be considered in detail, later. 
 
 The first point to be thoroughly understood is that the 
 transmitting circuits are oscillatory in nature and that the 
 transmitted impulses are radiated as waves having char- 
 acteristic properties. In wireless transmitters, the essen- 
 tial characteristics of the circuits are that they may be 
 caused to vibrate at a very high rate. The phenomena 
 is very much like other vibrations. For instance, in sound, 
 if a bell is struck a sharp blow, it vibrates and the vibra- 
 
 FIG. 17 
 
 tions in turn cause sound waves to be radiated from the 
 surface of the bell. The loudness of the sound will vary 
 according to the dimensions of the bell and the force with 
 which it is struck. The tone of the resulting sound will 
 also vary according to the dimensions of the bell itself, 
 i. e. its characteristic dimensions and vibratory period. 
 
 In a wireless transmitter, we have the same features. 
 The current which causes a high potential to charge a 
 condenser, corresponds to the force which strikes a bell. 
 
48 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The condenser in turn sets up vibrations in the circuits 
 so that waves are radiated from the antenna, in much the 
 same manner as the vibrations of the bell cause sound 
 waves to be radiated. In fact the difference in the waves 
 radiated by the bell and a wireless transmitter lies in the 
 characteristic properties (wave length, frequency, per- 
 sistency, etc.) and in the medium through which the re- 
 spective radiations are carried. (Air for sound and ether 
 (space) for wireless waves.) 
 
 Now then, the circuits of the transmitter can be vi- 
 brated the same as a bell is vibrated and the character 
 
 FIE. 1 6. 
 
 of the radiations will vary according to the electrical di- 
 mensions of the circuits and the force with which they 
 are set into vibration. This is the keynote to an under- 
 standing of the why of wireless transmission. We can 
 vary the characteristics of the transmitted radiations by 
 changing the electrical dimensions or vibratory period of 
 the transmitting circuits. This is accomplished by adding 
 or subtracting capacity or inductance or both, in much the 
 same manner as a violinist varies the effective length of 
 a given string to produce different tones. It is understood 
 that even the slightest change in the capacity or induct- 
 
The Transmitter. Resonance. 49 
 
 ance of a circuit changes its electrical dimensions and 
 also changes the period or rate of vibration. The actual 
 vibration in the circuits is caused by the surgings of the 
 discharge from the condenser, or as it is more often 
 termed, the oscillatory discharge of the condenser. 
 
 By the referring to fig. 17, in which A represents the 
 aerial, G, the ground, I, the inductance which may be 
 varied and which also couples the condenser and the an- 
 tenna circuits, C, the condenser, S, the spark gap, T, a 
 transformer or spark coil, B, a source of current and 
 K, a circuit closing key, it will be obvious that when the 
 key K is closed the transformer or coil T, which is wound 
 to produce a high potential at the secondary terminals, 
 will cause a spark at the gap S. In practice the gap and 
 the condenser are adjusted so that the condenser is first 
 charged and then discharged through the gap S. Now 
 it has been definitely proven that although the coil T only 
 produces a secondary current at its terminals with a fre- 
 quency of say 120 cycles per second, this same current 
 when used to charge the condenser C and subsequently 
 discharged through the gap S, causes an oscillatory cur- 
 rent to discharge in the gap S which may have a frequency 
 enormously greater than the original frequency of 120 
 cycles per second. This high vibration may in fact be 
 as much as 250,000 per second or even more. It is this 
 high rate of oscillation in the condenser circuit which 
 causes radiations to be sent out, as has already been ex- 
 plained. The condenser circuit through the gap S, and 
 the inductance I, (the oscillations do not pass through the 
 secondary of T on account of the high resistance offered), 
 is the actual part of the wireless transmitter which corre- 
 sponds to the hammer of a bell. It differs from a simple 
 comparison, however. It is found that the exact nature 
 of the resulting vibrations depends on the dimensions of 
 
50 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 the several parts, S, C, and I. It will be obvious that 
 the condenser in discharging through the circuit I, S, C, 
 at a very high rate causes the turns of I through which 
 it passes to vibrate at a corresponding rate. The oscilla- 
 tions are thus made useful for transmission purposes by 
 forcing them to pass through a part of the inductance I. 
 Now it is further found, that if the dimensions of circuit 
 C, I, S, are changed, as by adding or subtracting capacity 
 or inductance, that the characteristic properties of the 
 resulting oscillations are varied, in much the same man- 
 ner as the tone from a bell is varied if a lead weight is 
 attached to its edge, or a violin string, if its effective di- 
 mensions are varied by the fingers of the violinist. 
 
 In further considering the circuit C, I, S, it should 
 be understood that for the maximum effect, the several 
 parts C, I, S, must be adjusted or varied so that they mu- 
 tually contribute to produce the maximum effect. It is 
 obvious that if there is too much capacity, the circuit will 
 be unbalanced and consequently the coil T will not be 
 able to fully charge it. Or if the gap S is too long the 
 condenser will not discharge through it, while if too short, 
 the condenser will not be fully charged before it dis- 
 charges. Or further, if the number of turns of I in the 
 circuit is too many or too little, the circuit will also be 
 unbalanced. In any case or combinations of any single 
 cases, the result will be similar to that when an excessive 
 weight is attached to the rim of a bell, that is, the circuit 
 through C, I, and S, cannot vibrate properly. If the dif- 
 ference between the adjustment and the ideal adjustment 
 is not great, the oscillatory effect will not be stopped, but 
 the properties of the oscillations will be correspondingly 
 varied. In practice it is generally found that there is a 
 certain adjustment for the circuit which produces a max- 
 imum result. It is of course understood that any change 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 51 
 
 in the dimensions of the parts of the circuits causes a 
 change in the natural wave length of the circuit and the 
 resulting oscillations, the same as changing the diameter 
 of a bell produces a different tone. Changing either the 
 inductance or capacity in even small amounts causes a 
 noticeable change in the wave length and intensity of the 
 resulting oscillations. The parts of the circuit have been 
 arranged in definite mathematical formulas so that the 
 proper dimension for the several parts to produce a given 
 result with a given station can be worked out by a simple 
 mathematical operation. This feature will be considered 
 a little later. 
 
 Now then, by referring to this same figure (17), it 
 will be obvious that when an oscillatory current passes 
 through some of the turns of I, that oscillations will also 
 be set up in the antenna circuit A, I, G, by mutual induc- 
 tion between the portions of the turns of I included re- 
 spectively in the antenna and in the condenser circuit. 
 The ratio and relation of the respective turns included in 
 the antenna and the condenser circuits determine the de- 
 gree of coupling between the two circuits. The oscilla- 
 tions in the inductance I are of very high frequency, as 
 has already been explained, and the two portions of the 
 inductance act as a transformer. The inductance I forms 
 in fact an auto transformer (step up). Now then, the 
 voltage as well as the frequency through the part of I 
 included in the condenser circuit is very high so that the 
 frequency through the antenna circuit is of substantially 
 the same frequency but a much higher potential, on ac- 
 count of the ratio between the turns included in the two 
 respective circuits. The antenna circuit is thus supplied 
 with a very high potential high oscillatory charge, cor- 
 responding to the oscillatory discharge of the condenser 
 C. The antenna circuit is consequently very powerfully 
 
52 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 vibrated and as a result radiations are transmitted from 
 this circuit in much the same manner as sound waves are 
 transmitted from the surface of a bell, except the sound 
 waves are transmitted through air, while electromagnetic 
 waves are transmitted through the ether and are caused 
 by the intimate relation of the vibrating antenna circuit 
 with the ether, which presumably disturbs the ether at a 
 corresponding rate. It is understood that the term 
 "ether" is the name for an all prevailing material which 
 is imagined and assumed to exist and to carry this elec- 
 trically generated vibratory motion in the same general 
 way in which the air carries the sound waves. 
 
 Now the exact nature of the radiations is determined 
 by the dimensions of the antenna and condenser circuits, 
 while their power is determined by the primary generating 
 source as well. 
 
 RESONANCE. 
 
 Resonance in the transmitter means the method or art 
 of producing resonant, attuned, or syntonic relations in 
 and between the condenser and antenna circuits and is 
 also further carried out between the condenser and the 
 transformer or coil T, when maximum results are desired. 
 In fig. 17, the condenser C, and transformer T are in 
 resonance when the capacity of C is adjusted so that it 
 is just enough and not too much to efficiently and econom- 
 ically receive a charge and discharge the same. This re- 
 lation can be determined by a simple mathematical opera- 
 tion from a formula, which will be fully presented, later. 
 Now, then, with the condenser determined, its capacity 
 must necessarily remain the same for a given coil T, so 
 that if the circuit through C, I, and S, is to be brought 
 into resonance, the respective parts must be suited to the 
 given capacity. The gap, S, is of itself a minor item, the 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 53 
 
 essential features being an ability to handle the full dis- 
 charge currents without undue heating and to be of the 
 proper length so that the condenser is properly charged 
 and discharged. The main tuning, then, must be done by 
 increasing or decreasing the number of turns of the in- 
 ductance I, through which the condenser circuit must dis- 
 charge. Now a wire or ribbon conductor, such as is 
 used for constructing the inductance I, has both capacity 
 and inductance, though the latter is in great excess so 
 that the capacity is nearly negligible. . In a like manner, 
 the condenser of itself consists essentially of capacity. 
 Even the connecting wires between the condenser and 
 the inductance have capacity and inductance, also resist- 
 ance, so that in order not to materially effect the resulting 
 oscillations they must be made very short and of large 
 capacity so as not to impede the high frequency oscilla- 
 tions. 
 
 Every conductor has a definite period of vibration for 
 electromagnetic waves, just as every wire in a piano has 
 a definite vibratory period. Now the separate periods 
 can be combined or superposed when a number of con- 
 ductors or circuits are coupled or connected in much the 
 same manner that two or more notes from a piano can 
 be caused to produce a pleasing or displeasing tone. The 
 condenser circuit, then, is made up of several parts which 
 must have very little resistance and practically no stray 
 inductance or capacity. Now, increasing the number of 
 turns through which the condenser circuit passes also in- 
 creases the time of the vibrations, causing a correspond- 
 ing increase in the wave length. The wave length of the 
 oscillations in the condenser can thus be varied by adding 
 or subtracting the desired amount of inductance through 
 which they pass, and the less the number of turns of in- 
 
54 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 ductance included in the circuit, the less will be the wave 
 length. 
 
 Now then, consider the resonant relations in the an- 
 tenna circuit. It is understood that the antenna itself, 
 being made up of a plurality of spaced wires, consists 
 essentially of capacity and also quite a little inductance. 
 The antenna forms the capacity of the circuit in conjunc- 
 tion with the ground. The inductance of the circuit, then, 
 will be the variable factor since the antenna is generally 
 
 FIG.I3. 
 
 P.E. 
 
 a fixed item. The wave length of the circuit A, I, and G, 
 then will be varied according to the variations in the 
 amount of inductance or turns of I, included in the cir- 
 cuit, in the same manner as has already been explained 
 for the condenser circuit. 
 
 That is, when the number of turns of I, through which 
 the antenna circuit is included, is increased, the wave 
 length of the circuit will be increased. It will be obvious 
 that since A is a fixed quantity the natural wave length 
 of the antenna circuit cannot be less than that of A and 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 55 
 
 G without inductance,* in the circuit shown in fig. 17, 
 and that the variations must then be limited to increase 
 the wave length of the antenna system. As in the case of 
 the condenser C, when the maximum results are desired, 
 the capacity of the antenna A must be made the proper 
 amount to begin with. This can be accomplished by using 
 the length and number of wires which will produce a 
 capacity and inductance within the limits of the minimum 
 wave length desired. It is possible to lower the wave 
 length by means of circuit like that of fig. 19, in which 
 a condenser is connected in series with the ground circuit, 
 but this method is not very desirable. In view of the lim- 
 ited wave lengths, to which experimenters are morally 
 and legally assigned, this method can be utilized in cases 
 in which aerials already in use slightly exceed the maxi- 
 mum wave length. The disadvantage of this arrangement 
 is that the transmission is less efficient. 
 
 But to return to fig. 17: In order that the antenna 
 and condenser circuits should be in resonance with each 
 other, it is necessary that the adjustments of the induct- 
 ance I, be made so that the wave length of the condenser 
 circuit is the same as the wave length of the antenna cir- 
 cuit. The circuits will then be in a position to produce a 
 maximum radiation. This condition is, however, diffi- 
 cult to obtain exactly and is further complicated by the 
 phenomena of beats, that is, the oscillations in the two 
 circuits superpose and interfere with each other so that 
 two wave lengths are produced instead of one. This fea- 
 ture will be presently more fully discussed. Now if the 
 circuits have been brought into resonance so that they are 
 both attuned to, say, 300 meters wave length, and if it is 
 desired to increase the transmitting wave length, both cir- 
 
 * See fig. 19 for exception. 
 
56 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 cuits must be increased accordingly. The wave length of 
 the condenser circuit is increased by adding more turns 
 of inductance and the maximum wave length for the con- 
 denser circuit will be reached when this circuit includes all 
 of the inductance. Since the wave length depends on the 
 product of the inductance and capacity of a circuit, the 
 maximum wave length of the antenna circuit will general- 
 ly be reached before the maximum wave length of the 
 condenser circuit is reached, so that after all of the turns 
 of the inductance of the coil, I, have been included in the 
 antenna circuit, the wave length cannot be further in- 
 creased. Increasing the inductance of the condenser cir- 
 
 FIG. ED. 
 
 r.E 
 
 cuit in this case will throw the circuit out of resonance. 
 The wave length is thus limited by the dimensions of the 
 antenna A and the inductance I. Since it is impractical 
 to have the inductance I too large and since the antenna A 
 is in practice a fixed quantity, the arrangement of fig. 20 
 must be used if extra long wave lengths are desired. This 
 method acts to increase the natural wave length of the an- 
 tenna circuit. The shunt antenna condenser may be 
 omitted if desired. The extra inductance is known as a 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 57 
 
 loading coil and extremely long wave lengths may be ob- 
 tained in this manner. As in the case of fig. 19, however, 
 the efficiency of transmission is considerably lowered, 
 since there is generally a limited range of wave lengths at 
 which a given station can economically operate. How- 
 ever, for experimental purposes, this arrangement can be 
 used to attain very long wave lengths (those exceeding 
 1,500 or 2,000 meters in length), a field as yet open to the 
 experimenter and not morally restricted or forbidden to 
 him.* 
 
 There is one other case of resonance with which the 
 experimenter is concerned. When spark coils or adjust- 
 able types of transformers are used in connection with 
 adjustable condensers in the condenser circuit, there may 
 be more than one adjustment of the condenser, C, which 
 will produce a maximum resonance effect with the in- 
 ductance of both the antenna and the condenser circuit in 
 a fixed ratio. This is a peculiar harmonic effect and it is 
 remarkable that a maximum effect can be had with two 
 different adjustments of the capacity through essentially 
 the same circuit. Now when the power used in the coil 
 or transformer T is decreased, (as when transmitting 
 over a very short distance), the condenser C, and the 
 other adjustments should also be changed if the maximum 
 effect is to be carried out. To sum up ; 
 
 The resonance relations and wave length of a trans- 
 mitter depend on the relations of the circuits and the ad- 
 justments of the several parts. Since some of these parts 
 are of fixed dimensions, the others must be adjusted to 
 correspond with them and co-operate to produce resonant 
 circuits. The order of tuning is practically, 
 
 * See chapter 19 for effect of the new law. 
 
58 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 1. The transformer or coil being fixed, the condenser 
 must be varied to resonate with it. If the power is 
 changed, a corresponding change must be made in the 
 condenser if the maximum effect is to be preserved. 
 
 2. With the condenser a fixed quantity, to produce a 
 given wave length in the condenser circuit, the inductance 
 must be varied to co-operate with the capacity, and al- 
 though the wave length may be greatly increased, the ad- 
 dition of excessive inductance cuts down the transmitting 
 efficiency. 
 
 3. The aerial being a fixed quantity, the antenna cir- 
 cuit can be adjusted for a desired wave length by the ad- 
 dition of inductance, but if too much inductance is used, 
 with or without a shunt capacity, the efficiency of trans- 
 mission is reduced. A series capacity may be used to 
 diminish the natural wave length. 
 
 4. The wave length of the two circuits should be very 
 nearly the same, and if one is changed, the other must 
 also be changed. In short, the several circuits and parts 
 must be maintained in a nice balance in order to obtain 
 the maximum results and resonance and this balance must 
 be maintained within the limits of the power employed in 
 order to maintain the efficiency of transmission. This 
 means that the small stations are naturally limited to small 
 wave lengths, while large stations may be operated at 
 longer wave lengths without appreciable loss, and often 
 with gain. 
 
 The relations in the circuit of fig. 18 are very similar 
 to those of fig. 17, and the adjustments are carried out in 
 the same manner. In fact the chief difference in the two 
 circuits is in the matter of the coupling, and the effect is 
 essentially the same in other respects. 
 
 In this arrangement the antenna and condenser cir- 
 cuits include the primary and secondary of a mutually in- 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 59 
 
 ductive system which is not directly connected. The rela- 
 tive distances between the two coils is also made adjust- 
 able in practice, so that the coefficient of coupling can be 
 varied. The chief advantage of this arrangement is that 
 it permits of sharper tuning, but it has a disadvantage in 
 that this is accomplished at the expense of the intensity 
 of the resulting radiations. 
 
 RESISTANCE. 
 
 Resistance is an important item in a wireless system. 
 The high frequency oscillations travel over the surface of 
 a conductor only and do not penetrate into the body of 
 the conductor, as in the case of low frequency currents. 
 Plenty of conducting surface must therefor be provided 
 in both the condenser and the inductance coil as well as 
 in all connecting wires or ribbons. Otherwise, a large 
 amount of power is wasted in heat. Resistance also aids 
 in preventing sharp tuning, so that there is an added rea- 
 son for making all the parts of the transmitter of large 
 and generous dimensions. A further desideratum is that 
 all of the circuits as well as the several parts, including 
 the antenna itself, should be as uniform as possible. That 
 is the several conductors should be as direct and uniform 
 as possible, all joints electrically strong, the aerial well 
 insulated, the ground good, the spark gap well cooled, and 
 the several contacts always well made. Observance of 
 these items together with reasonable skill in attuning the 
 several circuits is sure to produce very satisfactory results. 
 
 SHARP TUNING BEATS. 
 
 Reference has already been made to the phenomena of 
 beats in a wireless transmitter. Now it has been estab- 
 lished, that when the condenser and antenna circuits are 
 
60 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 coupled by either the direct or inductive method, that the 
 primary or condenser circuit has two periods of oscilla- 
 tion instead of one, and that the secondary or antenna cir- 
 cuit has the same two periods of oscillation. This holds 
 true with perhaps a few exceptions, in every case, includ- 
 ing the ideal coupling of the two circuits adjusted to the 
 same wave length. As a result, the transmitter emits two 
 distinct waves instead of one, thereby complicating the 
 difficulty of selective receiving from a field of stations, 
 still further. This is undoubtedly due to the fact that 
 the primary and secondary circuits are alternately charged 
 and discharged. The primary circuit starts out at a max- 
 imum, the secondary gradually building up while the pri- 
 mary decreases until the operation comes around to the 
 beginning of the cycle, and is again repeated. The phe- 
 nomena of beats is caused in much the same manner as 
 in sound waves and the reader is referred to an elemen- 
 tary text on Physics for a further understanding of the 
 term. The analogy is complete, when the electromagnetic 
 waves are regarded as having similar properties to those 
 of sound waves. 
 
 The experimenter is directly concerned with this phe- 
 nomena, in that it materially concerns the matter of sharp 
 tuning. Now when the transmitter is in resonance, the 
 station is said to be tuned and if the resonance is very 
 good, it is said to be sharply tuned. This is the desidera- 
 tum of real scientific wireless work. On the other hand 
 when the circuits are not in resonance, the station is said 
 to be untuned. 
 
 In this condition the station is only a very little bet- 
 ter than a direct untuned station (see fig. 21), and when 
 in this condition a wide band of wave lengths are sent out 
 which are difficult to tune out. Since this is the kind of 
 waves which have been largely employed by amateurs, 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 
 
 61 
 
 it has brought forth considerable criticism. Even com- 
 mercial operators have willfully or innocently used un- 
 tuned waves or at least poorly tuned waves in the past. 
 On account of the large number of stations in operation 
 at the present time, this form of "pick me up wave" is in 
 disrepute because it causes unwarranted interference. At 
 any rate it is not scientific or business like and is soon to 
 be stopped, let us hope. In fact, it is equally or more im- 
 portant to have a sharply tuned station than to have one 
 
 FIG-Et 
 
 of limited wave length alone without sharp tuning. By 
 reason of the limited wave length, tuning among experi- 
 menters themselves will become all the more difficult on 
 account of the limited range, and the sooner all amateurs 
 install and operate sharply tuned instruments, the better 
 it will be for all concerned. To make this clear, some 
 curves submitted to the radio communication committee 
 of the House of Representatives by Mr. Kolster of the 
 Bureau of Standards are reproduced here. 
 
 These curves are plats to show the amount of energy 
 
62 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 received under different conditions. By referring to Hiart 
 A the figures, 600, 700, 800, etc., at the bottom indicate 
 wave length in meters. The numbers at the side of the 
 sheet (95 to 140) represent the strength of the signal re- 
 ceived at the receiving station. Thus at 600 meters, the 
 
 14 
 
 700 
 
 aoo sco jooo HOO 1200 
 
 strength of the received signal is 105. At 700, it is 
 stronger, approximately 127, and so on. The curve thus 
 indicates the wave length and its corresponding loudness 
 of the signal. The signals are the loudest between the 
 wide range of 700 and 900 meters, and were taken from a 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 
 
 63 
 
 ship station. The station is sending out a wide band of 
 wave lengths (750-950 meters), so that it is sure to inter- 
 fere with other stations. At a short distance, within, 
 1,100 meters the current makes another rise. That is, 
 the particular station under consideration sends out a sec- 
 
 140 
 
 700 800 900 
 
 1000 
 
 1100 
 
 ond wave length defined at 1,100 meters as well as the 
 broad band of 700-950 meters. This station is not send- 
 ing out any definite wave length, so that it interferes with 
 all other stations within a considerable range. Amateurs 
 in the past have for the most part sent out wave bands of 
 
64 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 similar dimensions so that the meager efforts of commer- 
 cial operators to tune out interference with crude ap- 
 paratus have been of little avail. 
 
 The chart 1 shows the double wave length from an or- 
 dinary spark excited commercial station, one wave being 
 
 140 
 
 !35 
 
 130 
 
 125 
 
 ISO 
 
 THAN 
 MOO 
 VCR 
 
 S -HVTew c 
 
 110 
 
 105 
 
 100 
 
 95 
 
 700 fioo 900 toco 
 
 noo 
 
 approximately 830 meters and the other 980 meters. The 
 chart indicates that the station concerned was very badly 
 tuned. As a contrast to this chart, the curve of chart 3 
 may be noted. This was made from a well tuned modern 
 
Transmitters. Resonance. 65 
 
 wireless set and the signals are sharply defined within a 
 range of 75 meters.* This means that a difference of 75 
 meters would entirely cut out this station under good con- 
 ditions. 
 
 While details of tuning will be again discussed, it is 
 thought that every reader must realize the importance of 
 sharp tuning, resonance, and definite wave lengths. 
 
 DAMPING. 
 
 The damping of electromagnetic waves may be com- 
 pared to sound waves as in the case of the other proper- 
 ties. That is, damped electromagnetic waves correspond 
 to the sound which is emitted from a bell when a soft ob- 
 ject such as the finger touches it, so that the vibrations 
 are limited or damped. This is a common experiment 
 and when a similar property is understood for electro- 
 magnetic waves, the term should not be difficult to under- 
 stand. 
 
 Undamped waves, then, are those which are free to 
 vibrate without impedance while damped waves are those 
 which are more or less hampered.** Now, absolutely un- 
 damped waves are practically impossible, but the nearer 
 the transmitted waves approach this point, the more effi- 
 cient will be the transmission, just as the sound from 
 a bell is greater and lasts longer if the bell is free to 
 vibrate without impedance. When the transmitted waves 
 meet considerable impedance, they are said to be damped 
 or strongly damped and in this condition are not very 
 
 * Refers to a Quenched Spark Set. 
 ** Perfectly undamped waves are not obtainable in 
 practice but can be approximated by using arc systems. 
 See Chapter 12. 
 
66 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 efficient for wireless transmission. The damping is caused 
 largely by the resistance which the circuits offer to the 
 oscillations and generally speaking, the conditions for 
 undamped waves require a minimum resistance. 
 
 The ordinary spark system with a close coupled cir- 
 cuit similar to that of fig. 17, emits waves which are more 
 or less damped, depending upon the adjustment, while 
 the arrangement of fig. 18, emits waves which are less 
 damped, the other conditions being practically the same. 
 In the arrangement of fig. 18, the coupling is free, so 
 to speak, so that the vibration of the antenna circuit is 
 not greatly impeded, while in the arrangement of fig. 17, 
 the antenna circuit has a close coupling with the condenser 
 circuit so that its vibrations are hampered and limited 
 to a considerable extent. Undamped waves or continuous 
 waves are a desideratum in efficient long distance trans- 
 mission, and it is for this reason that the untuned and even 
 the close coupled circuits are gradually being superseded 
 by the inductively coupled circuits and also by high spark 
 rates instead of the ordinary spark rates resulting from 
 ordinary spark gaps. This matter will be more fully dis- 
 cussed later on. In order to keep the damping to the 
 smallest possible point, it is necessary to keep the resist- 
 ance of the circuits down to a minimum, and when it is 
 remembered that the resistance of a conductor to high 
 frequencies is greater than to currents of low frequencies, 
 the need for large direct conductors should be all the 
 more apparent. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 PLANNING THE TRANSMITTER. CALCULA- 
 TION OF WAVE LENGTH, CAPACITY, 
 AND CIRCUITS. 
 
 In planning the transmitter, the main conditions which 
 govern the design are the distance over which the trans- 
 mission is desired, the number of stations and their loca- 
 tion, to which it is desired to communicate, the local and 
 intervening conditions, such as the condition of the soil, 
 atmosphere, and other natural conditions, and the item 
 of expense. 
 
 Perhaps the matter of expense is the main item and 
 it is always desirable to keep within defined limits. 
 The matter of expense does not follow directly according 
 to the transmission distance and will in fact vary consid- 
 erably according to the conditions in each case. The 
 actual amount depends on the price paid for raw materials, 
 labor, transportation, and since all of these items are vari- 
 able, the exact amount must be figured for each case. 
 Thus, if the raw materials may be obtained so that no 
 transportation charges have to be paid, or if the apparatus 
 can be had second hand, or if the labor is negligible, and 
 so on, the cost will be materially reduced. Ordinary ex- 
 perimental stations do not entail a great deal of expense, 
 however. While everything should be made as workman- 
 like and businesslike as possible, extraordinary finishes 
 and polishes are not essential to success. 
 
- 
 68 ' Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 RANGE OF TRANSMISSION. 
 
 While this cannot be accurately determined to begin 
 with, it may be approximated to a sufficient extent. The 
 experimenter generally has a few definite stations with 
 which direct communication is desired and in all cases 
 which permit the use of a directive aerial, this type should 
 be adopted for the purpose specified. When communica- 
 tion is desired in all directions, the umbrella or T type 
 aerial will be the best to adopt. The distance to which a 
 given station can send is governed largely by natural con- 
 ditions, such as character of the soil, foliage, mountain^ 
 minerals, height of aerial, and other similar items, as well 
 as the per cent of efficiency which the apparatus is capable 
 of, by itself. The variables are so great that while trans- 
 mission has been carried out over a distance of 90 miles 
 or more by the use of a one inch spark coil at an expendi- 
 ture of perhaps 100 200 watts, there are other extreme 
 cases in which a 1 K. W. set has only been able to send 
 a few miles. Again, the same set will be able to send to 
 different distances under different conditions and at dif- 
 ferent times. Thus, the transmission in winter is gen- 
 erally better than during the summer, the transmission at 
 night is generally nearly twice as good as during the day 
 time, the transmission during favorable atmospheric con- 
 ditions is from two to ten times greater than when carried 
 out under unfavorable atmospheric conditions, and so on. 
 In order to obtain working data, the working distance 
 under practical conditions and with efficient well adjusted 
 sets is taken as a standard, and, of course, under favor- 
 able conditions, this limit is often greatly exceeded. 
 
 This standard transmission calls for a range of ne 
 mile for every ten watts of energy which is used at the 
 tmnsmittiag station. Tkus, a > K. W. (500 wa*fc$ efct 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 69 
 
 is expected to cover 50 miles, a J4 K. W. 25 miles, a 1 
 K. W. 100 miles, and so on. The range for spark coils 
 will be similar and should be reckoned on the watts used 
 instead of the spark length alone. 
 
 If the set is operated under very favorable conditions 
 this limit will generally be exceeded, but of course, if the 
 adjustment or the instruments, or the natural conditions 
 are poor, it is not likely that this limit can be attained. 
 With this basis and the desired range known, the power 
 required can be easily found. 
 
 This done, the question is limited to the immediate 
 selection of the type and size of transformer or spark 
 coil to be used. Since a transformer requires a source 
 of alternating current such as a lighting circuit and since 
 this method is simpler and more satisfactory for experi- 
 mental purposes, it should be adopted whenever possible. 
 Transformers may be had in the market at a figure which 
 can scarcely be duplicated by the experimenter, even if 
 his own time is not considered, and the same may be said 
 of spark coils. The construction of such apparatus of 
 course, affords considerable education and satisfaction, 
 but on account of the expense, little or no gain may be 
 expected. Very often, good second hand coils and trans- 
 formers may be had for little or nothing. Discarded 
 automobile spark coils are easily obtained at garages for 
 a mere song and are satisfactory for short distances. 
 
 There are two general types of transformers, the open 
 and closed core types. The former, while less efficient 
 from the electrical standpoint is more efficient for wire- 
 less purposes than the ordinary closed core transformer. 
 The latter type, to be of the greatest use for wireless pur- 
 poses must be specially designed. In wireless transmission 
 the secondary of the transformer is largely on open cir- 
 cuit and the conditions are different than the ordinary 
 
70 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 transformer loads. For the maximum results, it is nec- 
 essary to apportion the primary and secondary inductance 
 and the mutual inductance properly, just as it is necessary 
 to bring the condenser and antenna circuits into reso- 
 nance. Almost any high tension transformer or spark 
 coil will do, of course, but special designs are necessary 
 when efficiency is desired. In the ordinary transformer, 
 the load on the secondary increases in practically a direct 
 ratio with the current input, while in a wireless station the 
 load is essentially a condenser. This condenser reaches 
 a maximum charge only when the constants of the trans- 
 former bear a resonant relation to the capacity of the 
 condenser. When the resulting discharge causes a spark, 
 the secondary of the transformer becomes practically 
 short circuited so that the ordinary transformer would 
 draw a greatly increased amount of power and an arc 
 would be formed in the spark gap. Now this arc is very 
 undesirable since the condenser cannot be properly 
 charged while it lasts and as a result an ordinary trans- 
 former cannot produce good oscillations. 
 
 The wireless transformer, then, must be designed to 
 draw a comparatively small amount of power when the 
 condenser discharges and short-circuits the secondary 
 winding, so that the spark will extinguish just as soon as 
 the condenser has been discharged. 
 
 In practice this may be attained by using an auxiliary 
 adjustable resistance or reactance in the primary circuit 
 of an ordinary transformer, or an adjustable inductance 
 in series with the secondary of a closed core transformer, 
 or else by combining this principle in the transformer 
 itself. With the open core type of transformer, an adjust- 
 able inductance in the primary circuit becomes essential, 
 and this method also allows of considerable flexibility 
 in bringing the transformer into resonance with different 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 71 
 
 capacities in the condenser circuit. Wireless transformers 
 generally have several adjustments which allow the power 
 input to be varied so that a corresponding change may 
 be made in the condenser capacity without throwing the 
 circuit out of resonance. In practice, it is common to rely 
 upon the instinct of the operator to adjust the amount of 
 capacity and power input to the right point as indicated by 
 the appearance of the resulting spark discharge. The 
 main point is that the spark in the gap should not form 
 an arc. With spark coils this method must be largely 
 used since an accurate calculation of the required capacity 
 is difficult. Spark coils should only be used when alter- 
 nating current is not available. Either batteries or a 
 D. C. generator may be used to operate spark coils and 
 while they may be operated on 110 volts A. C. in con- 
 nection with an electrolytic interrupter, this method is 
 not very desirable. Data for wireless transformers and 
 spark coils will be found in Chapter 6. The auxiliary 
 primary apparatus such as keys, kickback preventers, and 
 other items will also be considered later since their design 
 depends largely on the amount of power used. 
 
 After the power and source of power to be used have 
 been decided upon, the proper amount of capacity to be 
 used should receive attention next. This item depends 
 on several quantities, which may be listed as 
 
 1. The power supplied to the condenser. (Watts.) 
 
 2. The frequency, or number of sparks per second. 
 
 3. The secondary discharge voltage. 
 
 In the case of an alternating current transformer, the 
 transformer supplies an amount of power to the con- 
 denser which may be represented by P kilowatts. If the 
 condenser and spark gap are arranged so that the con- 
 denser charges to a sparking potential once each half- 
 cycle, or the natural spark rate, (twice the natural fre- 
 
72 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 quency. Thus, 120 times per second if the primary fre- 
 quency is 60 cycles), 
 
 2 
 
 P = nCV Kilowatts 
 
 1,000 
 
 in which P represents the power, n the frequency (as 60 
 or 25 cycles), C the capacity of the condenser in farads, 
 and V the potential in volts to which the condenser is 
 charged at the time the spark begins. 
 
 This formula may be simplified to the following form : 
 C = 1,000 x Power in K. W. 
 
 Now, when the power, the number of cycles, and the 
 voltage to which the condenser is to be charged, are 
 known, the required capacity can easily be calculated from 
 this formula. It will be evident that the higher the fre- 
 quency, the less will be the needed capacity, so that for 
 the same output, a smaller capacity may be used for 60 
 cycles than for 25 cycles, and so on. 
 
 For example, suppose that the power source and 
 power conform to the following data after the desired 
 transmission range has been decided as approximately 25 
 miles. 
 
 Transformer, J4 K. W., primary voltage 110, fre- 
 quency 60 cycles, secondary voltage 20,000.* Substitut- 
 ing these values in the formula 
 
 * This example serves more for an illustration than as 
 a typical case. 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 73 
 
 C = 1,000 xj4 = 1,000 x. 25 
 
 60 x 20,000 x 20,000 60 x 400,000,000 
 
 .25 .0000000105 approximately 
 
 24,000,000 
 
 , that is .0000000105 of a Farad. 
 
 On account of the large unit represented by a farad, 
 wireless capacities are invariably calculated and carried 
 out in microfarads, a microfarad being 1,000,000th of 
 a farad. To change this result to microfarads then, the 
 answer is multiplied by 1,000,000, giving a result of .0105 
 microfarads. 
 
 This calculation is very simple and sufficiently accu- 
 rate for all ordinary purposes. When the construction 
 of condensers for transmitters is taken up, we shall see 
 how the desired capacity can be worked out. 
 
 It will be obvious from the formula that when a low 
 potential is used, the capacity must be relatively large, 
 and that if a high potential is used, the capacity will be 
 correspondingly small. In practice the transformer used 
 generally has a potential of from 15,000 volts for J4 an d 
 T/2 K. W. to perhaps 30,000 or more for the larger sizes. 
 However, there is no material gain in the amount of nec- 
 essary dielectric material for a given amount of power, 
 whether or not a high or low voltage is used since the 
 small capacity for a high voltage is compensated by the 
 corresponding increase in thickness which is necessary to 
 withstand the increased voltage without breaking down. 
 If the capacity is not properly designed, it is liable to 
 break down, as well as act to cut down the transmitting 
 efficiency considerably. An increase in the -frequency, 
 then, is the only factor which will materially decrease 
 the actual bulk of the condenser. Generally speaking, a 
 
74 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 high voltage within limits is advantageous for transmit- 
 ting purposes because of the resulting transmitting effi- 
 ciency, but this item should always be kept within limits 
 and particularly so, when small and only moderately in- 
 sulated aerials and instruments are used. 
 
 In estimating the voltage to substitute in the formula, 
 15,000 volts to the centimeter of spark length is gener- 
 ally allowed, (1 inch being 2.54 centimeters), since this 
 has been found the approximate value for a heated and 
 ionized spark gap. 
 
 Table of capacities required for condenser circuit when 
 Spark coils are used. 
 
 Length of spark in inches. Capacity in microfarads 
 
 y 4 inch 001 
 
 y 2 inch 002 
 
 1 inch 004 
 
 2 inches 008 
 
 3 inches 012 
 
 4 inches 016 
 
 These values are approximate, but will vary according 
 
 to the particular coil used. Spark coils for wireless pur- 
 poses should be rated in watts instead of spark lengths. 
 Manufacturers, please note. 
 
 Now, with the condenser and transformer decided 
 upon, the inductance for the primary or condenser circuit 
 is the next item to work out. We have already seen how 
 the wave length is varied by the amount of inductance 
 and capacity in the circuit and since the capacity is pre- 
 ferably a fixed value, (wireless manufacturers making 
 transformers generally supply a fixed condenser of the 
 proper dimensions to begin with), the amount of induct- 
 ance will decide the wave length in most cases. Indeed, 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 75 
 
 when the condenser is properly calculated and constructed 
 the author believes that this method is the preferred 
 standard. Before proceeding further, the method of de- 
 termining the wave length must be understood. This in- 
 volves only simple mathematics and can be easily mastered 
 by every reader, if it is not already familiar. A careful 
 reading together with the working of a few problems is 
 all that is necessary. 
 
 CALCULATION OF WAVE LENGTHS. 
 
 The wave length is expressed in the metric system as 
 a certain number of meters long. Now, feet can easily 
 be changed into meters (sometimes written "Metres") 
 by dividing the number of feet by 3.281, (1 meter being 
 39.37 inches) . If the time comes when a universal system 
 of measurement is adopted, we will be saved this constant 
 translation from one system to another. 
 
 The formula reads, 
 
 Wave length ( TT) = v x 2it VLC, 
 
 ( n ) being a symbol for wave length, v the velocity of 
 light in meters = 3 x 100,000,000 in one second, L= the 
 inductance in henrys, and C = the capacity in farads. n 
 = 3.1416. (.000001 Farad =1 microfarad. .000001 Henry 
 = 1 microhenry). 
 
 This formula can then be simplified as follows : 
 
 Wave length = 300,000,000 x 2x3.1416VL.C = 
 1,884,960,000 times the square root of the product of L 
 and C. or 1,884,960,000 times the square root of the 
 product of L and C in microhenrys and microfarads re- 
 spectively. 
 
 Now, for a given wave length, the product of L and 
 C will be a constant quantity, so that if the capacity C is 
 
76 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 large, L will be small, or if the inductance L is large, C 
 will be small. The quantity (LC) varies as the square 
 of the wave length, so that if the wave length is to be 
 doubled (LC) must be made four times as great, or if 
 a given wave length is to be tripled, (LC) must be made 
 nine times its original value. 
 
 Now, in the formula there are three items to be filled 
 in by mathematical quantities. If any two are known, 
 the value for the other one may be readily found. Thus, 
 if a wave length of 200 meters is desired with the use of 
 the .0105 microfarad condenser already calculated for the 
 case taken as an illustration, the necessary inductance 
 can be readily found. In order to still further simplify 
 the formula so that it will not be necessary to extract the 
 square root of (LC) it may be expressed, 
 
 (Wave length \ 2 __ L x C, expressed in henrys 
 1,884,960,000 / " and farads respectively. 
 
 Using this formula, and expressing L and C in micro- 
 henry s and microfarads respectively, 
 200 
 
 = L x .0105 
 
 1,884.960,000 
 cancelling and dividing, 
 1,884.960,000 ) 200... 1st 
 18.849,60000) 200.. 2nd. 
 9.424,800 ) 1. ( .1061, quotient.... 3rd 
 substituting this simplified value, 
 (.1061) 2 = LxC =Lx.0105 for the example taken 
 that is, 
 
 L = .011257 = .011257 = 1.072 approximately 
 ~~C~ .0105 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 77 
 
 that is, to obtain a wave length of 200 meters when the 
 inductance is an unknown quantity and the capacity is 
 .0105 microfarads, the formula gives 1.072 microhenrys 
 as the proper amount of inductance. 
 
 Now, this calculation is very simple, and may be used 
 to find any of the values, wave length, capacity, or in- 
 ductance, provided the other two are known. 
 
 It might be well to memorize or jot down this formula 
 in a convenient place, and if desired it may be remem- 
 bered in the following form which applies to all cases 
 which may arise. 
 
 /Wave length \ 2 __ ^^ Giving C in microfarads direct 
 \1, 884.960,000 / Giving L in microhenrys direct 
 
 When the wave length is 200 this formula gives, 
 L x C .011257, so that any inductance and capacity 
 which will give a product of .011257 when expressed in 
 microfarads and microhenrys respectively, will satisfy the 
 equation and give a wave length of 200 meters. Now, 
 since the condenser is worked out to correspond to the 
 transformer used in each case, the required inductance 
 can be found from the following for any case, the wave 
 length remaining at 200 meters. 
 
 L == . 01 1257 /Giving L in microhenrys. \ 
 C \.C being in microfarads. J 
 
 The author has worked out these simplified values 
 very carefully and they have all been checked and re- 
 checked. It is believed that this set of formulas places 
 the calculation of wave lengths within the reach of all 
 the readers. 
 
 When the construction of inductance is taken up, the 
 matter of calculating the inductance so that the helixes 
 and transformers are of the required design, will be taken 
 up. 
 
78 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The reader should have a pretty good idea of the rela- 
 tions of the circuits to each other by now, so that it will 
 be evident that to use a high wave length of 1,500 meters, 
 the inductance must be nearly 50 times as great as for a 
 wave length of 200 meters with the same condenser, and 
 aside from the item of decreased efficiency, the dimen- 
 sions of the necessary inductance make it impracticable. 
 Small experimental stations should, therefore, limit the 
 wave length to the smaller value. 
 
 SPARK GAP. 
 
 Before considering the secondary or antenna circuit, 
 a few notes on the general requirements of the spark 
 gap will be given. The length of the spark gap is gov- 
 erned by the potential at the terminals, so that it must 
 be increased as the potential at which the condenser is 
 charged is increased, the other conditions being constant. 
 The other dimension, or the size of the faces of the spark 
 electrodes, must be sufficient to conduct the energy with- 
 out undue heating. These are the essential features of 
 a gap and the exact size and shape admits of numerous 
 variations. Suitable constructions for various types of 
 gaps will be taken up in detail later. 
 
 ANTENNA CIRCUIT. 
 
 The proper dimensions for the antenna circuit are 
 obtained in much the same manner as for the condenser 
 circuit, and both of the said circuits must be adjusted to 
 very nearly the same wave length for the maximum re- 
 sult. There is some difficulty in calculating the capacity 
 and inductance of an antenna with any degree of accu- 
 racy, since there are many elusive quantities which make 
 up the total. When the primary or condenser circuit is 
 
Calculations for Circuits. 79 
 
 accurately calculated and adjusted, the antenna or sec- 
 ondary circuit can probably be best adjusted to resonance 
 with the primary circuit by means of a hot wire ammeter, 
 wave meter, geissler tube, or miniature light bulb, and 
 some of these methods will be taken up in detail later. 
 
 The capacity of the antenna wires increases with the 
 height, but not directly. It is nevertheless desirable to 
 have the aerial as high up as is possible. The capacity 
 of stranded wire is only a very little greater than that of 
 a solid conductor having the same outside circumference. 
 The capacity of a number of wires in close proximity is 
 considerably less than the sum of the individual capaci- 
 ties. Solid metallic structures in space have only a very 
 little greater capacity than ordinary wires, and a few 
 small wires uniformly spaced have practically as great a 
 capacity as a solid sheet or tube occupying a similar 
 space. The use of sheets, netting, tubing, and the like is 
 therefore not economical or desirable. The approximate 
 inductance and capacity of aerial wires can be worked out 
 by a complicated process, but since even this method 
 admits of considerable error, these formulas are omitted. 
 
 Perhaps the most simple and satisfactory method of 
 apportioning the antenna conductors for a given set is as 
 follows: Take three- fourths of the wave length in 
 meters to find the wave length to be embodied in the an- 
 tenna conductors. That is, make the natural wave length 
 of the antenna approximately three-fourths of the total 
 wave length. To do this, it is necessary to make the 
 effective length of the aerial approximately .6 of, the total 
 wave length in meters, in feet. This is calculated by a 
 process which is simple and of no direct interest, and 
 to illustrate, 
 
80 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 For a wave length of 200 meters, the effective length 
 of the aerial should be .6 of 200 in feet, or 120 feet. (See 
 Aerials.) This is only a rough approximation, however. 
 For large wave lengths, this method is not recommended. 
 When this method is used, a margin of approximately 
 one-fourth of the total wave length is left to the adjust- 
 ment of the secondary portion of the oscillation trans- 
 former. In constructing the aerial itself, it is well to 
 allow one No. 12 conductor or its equivalent in the an- 
 tenna for every 100 watts of energy to be used, and to 
 provide a minimum of two conductors even if only 30 
 watts are to be used. Thus, a ^2 K. W. set should have 
 five antenna conductors at least, and so on. In fact the 
 limit is soon reached so that it is impracticable to use 
 more than three-fourths or one K. W. with a wave length 
 of 200 meters or less. For one K. W. and larger sets, a 
 high wave length should be planned for. This will mean 
 a considerable increase in the total expense, as everything 
 is best enlarged accordingly. (See Chapter 19 for legal 
 requirements.) A }4 or ^ K. W. outfit is ideal for 
 experimental purposes. 
 
 We have now considered the main factors of the trans- 
 mitting set and station, and the details are ready for at- 
 tention. In choosing a site for a station, a quiet place 
 is to be preferred and this matter is particularly true of 
 the operating room. The latter should be provided with 
 good ventilation, sound, tight walls, and should have a 
 total floor space of about 125 square feet if possible, 
 though less may be used. A corner of a workshop, fab- 
 oratory, or similar ready made place is suitable. 
 
 Note : It should be remarked that the estimated range 
 of one mile for every ten watts can not be expected over 
 long distances with short aerials and wave lengths on 
 atsoouitt oC tfce abaorbtkm of short waves. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 TRANSFORMERS. SPARK COILS. 
 
 Transformers for wireless purposes are relatively in- 
 expensive and quite efficient. They are rated according 
 to the power, as J4 K. W., l / 2 K. W. and so on. They 
 can only be used when an alternating current supply is 
 available. For experimental purposes a transformer giv- 
 ing a secondary potential of 15,000 or 20,000 volts and 
 of J4 or 1/2 K. W. is recommended, preferably the for- 
 mer. The reader is advised that it will probably cost 
 as much to construct a suitable transformer as to buy it 
 in the open market and that some skill is required in 
 addition to the data here given if an efficient transformer 
 is to be constructed. 
 
 In its simplest form, a transformer is nothing more 
 than two independent coils of wire wound around a com- 
 mon iron core. An alternating current impressed upon 
 one of the coils (the primary) causes a current to be 
 generated in the other coil by mutual induction, although 
 the two coils are insulated from each other and the core. 
 The second coil is called the secondary and is generally 
 wound for wireless purposes so that it has a large num- 
 ber of turns. The voltage of the primary and the voltage 
 of the secondary have a ratio corresponding to the rela- 
 tive number of turns and a corresponding amperage. 
 Thus, if the primary has 100 turns and is supplied with 
 a voltage of 100 and current of 10 amperes, (IK. W.), 
 and the secondary has 50,000 turns of wire, the secondary 
 voltage will be 50,000, but the amperage will only be one- 
 
82 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 fiftieth of an ampere.* Now, there are many quantities 
 to consider in designing a transformer, and a desired 
 design can be nicely calculated. However, in order to 
 cover the most ground in the least space, the matter in 
 this chapter will be limited to the direct construction of 
 designs which have already been worked out as suitable. 
 
 The core is generally arranged in the form of a rect- 
 angle and is made up of thin laminations of soft sheet 
 iron, each lamination being coated on one side with var- 
 nish for insulation. This is to prevent eddy current loss 
 and is essential. The arrangement of the coils admits of 
 many variations, but for simplicity of construction it is 
 preferable to place the primary winding on one leg of 
 the core and the secondary on an opposite leg. The flux 
 leakage is somewhat greater than when the primary and 
 secondary are evenly divided on the two cores, but the 
 construction and particularly the insulation is facilitated 
 by this method. The foremost requirement of wireless 
 transformers is good insulation, and this item should 
 receive particular attention in the construction. 
 
 The following data will be found useful in construct- 
 ing suitable transformers (closed core type), with out- 
 puts which compare favorably with the inputs. The con- 
 struction must be carefully carried out or the dimensions 
 and sizes will not hold good. This data is for transfor- 
 mers operating on 60 cycles at a voltage of 100 to 120, 
 which is the current most in use. The cores are arranged 
 in the form of a rectangle and the primary is placed on 
 one leg, while the secondary is placed on the other. These 
 legs are denoted by the letter B in the table. The letter 
 
 * This is taken without considering the core and cop- 
 per losses. Good wireless transformers are about 90 per 
 cent efficient. 
 
Transformers. Spark Coils. 
 
 83 
 
 TABLE OF TRANSFORMER DATA.* 
 
 Wattsj 100 
 
 250 
 
 500 
 
 750 
 
 1000 
 
 1500 
 
 2000 
 
 A 
 
 9 
 
 9y 2 
 
 9 l /2 
 
 9 l / 2 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 B 
 
 6^ 
 
 7 
 
 7 7y 2 10 
 
 10 
 
 IS 
 
 C 
 
 \y 2 
 
 \y$ 
 
 1^ 124 2 2^ 
 
 2 l /2 
 
 D 
 
 16 
 
 12 
 
 14 13 6 
 
 5 
 854 
 
 _4 
 
 E 
 
 5 
 
 5/^ 
 
 5^ 5j4 6 l /2 
 
 F 
 
 3/16 
 
 T/ 
 
 l /4 54 54 54 
 
 54 
 
 G 
 
 Empire Cloth 
 
 
 H 
 
 16 
 D.C.C. 
 
 16 
 D.C.C. 
 
 14 
 D.C.C. 
 
 14 
 D.C.C. 
 
 12 
 D.C.C. 
 
 10 
 
 D.C.C. 
 
 8 
 D.C.C. 
 
 J 
 
 Z l / 2 
 
 4 
 
 S l / 2 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 10 
 
 14 
 
 K 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 18 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 L 
 
 34 Enamel 
 
 32 Enamel | 30 En'l 
 
 M 
 
 2 l / 2 
 
 2/2 
 
 2y 2 
 
 2H 
 
 5 
 
 5 1 9 
 
 N 
 
 1 A 
 
 y* 
 
 % 
 
 % 
 
 54 54 
 
 54 
 
 O 
 
 *A 
 
 1 A 
 
 l /4 
 
 l /4 
 
 54 54 
 
 54 
 
 P 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 16 
 
 Q 
 
 V* 
 
 54 
 
 1 A 
 
 54 
 
 54 54 
 
 54 
 
 R 
 
 Empire Cloth. 
 
 Key to Table. 
 
 A Length of Core (outside measurement). 
 
 B Width of Core (outside measurement). 
 
 C Thickness of Core. 
 
 D Number of primary layers. 
 
 E Width of secondary sections (each side). 
 
 F Thickness of insulation between core and primary. 
 
 G Kind of insulation between core and primary. 
 
 H Size (B and S) primary wire. 
 
 J Weight of primary wire. 
 
 K Approximate number of pounds secondary wire. 
 
 L Size (B and S) secondary wire. 
 
 M Length of windings. 
 
 N Thickness of separators for secondary sections. 
 
 O Thickness of sections in secondary. 
 
 P Number of sections in secondary. 
 
 Q Thickness of insulation between core and secondary. 
 
 R Kind of insulation between core and secondary. 
 
 Popular Electricity. 
 
84 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 C denotes one side of the core. The core proper is square, 
 so that when the thickness is given as 2 inches, it means 
 that the core is 2x2 inches. The separators (N) are of 
 the proper size when fibre is used. 
 
 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS. 
 
 The core. Fig. 22 shows the arrangement of a square 
 core and details. The strips are best cut out by means 
 of square shears which may be found at any hardware 
 
 RE. 
 
 or tinshop. When this type of core is used, it will be 
 necessary to use an auxiliary primary inductance or 
 reactance coil in order to compensate for the capacity 
 and maintain a high power factor. This type of trans- 
 former lacks sufficient inductance after the windings are 
 
Transformers. Spark Coils. 
 
 85 
 
 in place, so the arrangement of fig. 23 should be adopted 
 if possible.* This form of core gives rise to considerable 
 magnetic leakage, causing an increase in the primary in- 
 ductance, and makes the use of auxiliary inductance un- 
 necessary. When the primary has insufficient inductance 
 
 FIG.S3. 
 
 the spark forms an undesirable arc at the gap, so that 
 this is an important item. In some types of wireless 
 transformers, this extra portion or tongue is made so 
 that the air gap is adjustable, giving a close control of 
 the current. This extra portion does not materially alter 
 the dimensions given in the table, but extra iron must be 
 allowed and calculated if this arrangement is adopted. 
 Transformer iron may be had from supply houses cut 
 to size, or a good grade of stovepipe iron may be used. 
 
 * Extra iron must be allowed as the table is for plain 
 cores. 
 
86 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The legs should be wound with a few layers of empire 
 cloth. The core can be squared up by tapping it with 
 a hammer or mallet. The secondary leg should be fur- 
 ther insulated by additional turns of empire cloth, the 
 number of which should be ample to take care of the 
 estimated secondary voltage and a 50 per cent overload. 
 No. 6 is a convenient size for the empire cloth and has 
 an average puncture voltage of 7,800. A good way to 
 find the desired number of turns is to use as many times 
 the number of turns used for the primary leg as the num- 
 ber of secondary turns is times the number of primary 
 turns, that is, the insulation is best proportioned accord- 
 ing to the relative turns of the two windings. 
 
 The Primary. Wind the primary evenly on the pri- 
 mary leg, leaving some 6 or 10 inches at the ends of the 
 wire for leads. Taps may be taken out towards the end, 
 if different inputs are desired, in which case the number 
 of primary turns should be slightly increased over the 
 number given in the table. The winding is best done by 
 hand on account of the heavy wire and should never ap- 
 proach too near to the part of the core which forms a 
 joint, or beyond the empire cloth, it being understood that 
 the latter is kept within the limits of the leg proper. The 
 completed winding can be covered with a few turns of 
 empire cloth or tape. 
 
 The Secondary. The sections are wound on a section 
 former in a lathe or makeshift lathe. The arrangement 
 of a section winder is shown in fig. 24, and should be 
 made in proportion to the size of the coil to be wound. 
 This former should be made from iron, steel, or brass 
 and not of wood, and is preferably made by a machinist 
 so that the plates are true. The saw cuts (slots) are to 
 allow threads to be passed around the completed section 
 before it is removed. This round form is more con- 
 
Transformers. Spark Coils. 
 
 87 
 
 venient than a square former, although the latter may be 
 used. The resulting air space is no disadvantage since it 
 acts as a cooling duct. The winding should be done slow- 
 ly and evenly, avoiding kinks and breaks. A broken wire 
 should be soldered. 
 
 With a little practice this winding will not be diffi- 
 cult, and can be rapidly carried out. The section should 
 
 Slots 
 
 ^. FIB. 5-4 
 
 P.. 
 
 be tightly wound and when completed, the threads should 
 be passed around it and through the slots to keep it in 
 shape. Leave several inches at the beginning and end 
 of the winding for connections. After it is bound, the 
 section should be removed with care and placed into a 
 pot or pan containing melted paraffine or a mixture of 
 paraffine and beeswax. The later should not be too hot 
 since its insulating value is less if it is at too high a 
 temperature. Let the section soak in the wax for some 
 time until air bubbles cease to rise, then lift it out by 
 means of a string or spoon. Place the section on a porce- 
 lain plate and squeeze the excess wax out by pressing 
 
88 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 on the section from the top with another cold porcelain 
 plate.* The other sections can be wound while the first 
 few are being insulated, to save time. These sections 
 can be taped with a strip cut from empire cloth if de- 
 sired. The fibre separators can also be soaked in the wax 
 mixture. 
 
 Assembling. The sections should be connected in 
 series so that they form a consecutive winding with the 
 connections made alternately at the middle and at the out- 
 side. The joints should be soldered. Be sure that the 
 sections are properly connected so that the direction of 
 the winding is consecutive as otherwise one or more sec- 
 tions will buck up against the rest. The sections should 
 then be arranged on the core with the separators between 
 them, and melted wax may be used to fill up the inter- 
 vening space so that they will be rigidly in place on the 
 core. It is good practice to divide the insulation between 
 the sections into two parts so that the inner connection 
 can be placed between two separators. The sections are 
 best joined after they are arranged on the core. A num- 
 ber of separators should be placed at each end of the 
 completed winding and if possible a thick head should 
 be provided as a flange for each end of the coil. 
 
 The primary and secondary legs are now joined by 
 the core pieces and squared up. The tongue of the 
 tongue type is left alone for the present. In the tongue 
 type, the primary core is placed at the tongue end. This 
 tongue should be nicely bound by itself. The core is then 
 clamped together and nicely squared up by means of 
 strap or angle iron and bolts. 
 
 The transformer can now be mounted in any suitable 
 manner and the terminals brought out to suitable binding 
 
 * Glass may also be used 
 
Transformers. Spark Coils. 89 
 
 posts. The tongue is left in an adjustable position close 
 to the core but insulated therefrom, so that its relative 
 distance can be adjusted according to the amount of con- 
 denser used across the secondary terminals. Tests should 
 be made with a telephone receiver and battery for short 
 circuits, for breaks and if any are found they must be 
 located and repaired. It is well to cover the secondary 
 with a number of layers of empire cloth. The other de- 
 tails are left to the reader. 
 
 REACTANCE COIL. 
 
 A suitable reactance coil for use with the transfor- 
 mer when a plain core type is employed, may be con- 
 structed by making a hollow coil of wire and sliding an 
 ; ron core in or out of it according to the desired adjust- 
 ment. The core should be of sheet iron and of dimen- 
 sions corresponding to the size of the primary leg of 
 the transformer core. That is, if the primary leg is 
 10 inches long, and 2x2 inches, the core for the reactance 
 should be this same size or a little larger. Now make a 
 wooden or fibre frame about one-eighth or three-six- 
 teenths of an inch thick with inside dimensions so that 
 the iron core can slide freely in and out of it, and wind 
 about two or three layers of wire on it. The wire should 
 be a few sizes larger than the primary wire, if possible. 
 Thus, if the primary wire is No. 12, No. 10 is suitable 
 for the reactance coil. This reactance is connected in 
 series with the primary winding and the adjustment is 
 made by putting more or less of the iron core inside of 
 the winding. 
 
 It is believed '"hat the foregoing will be sufficient work- 
 ing directions to enable the reader to construct efficient 
 transformers and reactances, provided that the work is 
 
90 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 carefully carried out. Many minor details have been 
 omitted, and unless the reader has some experience, he 
 will very likely find several little points which must be 
 independently solved. The main requisite is again stated 
 to be, INSULATION. 
 
 Inasmuch as open core transformers are less efficient 
 than closed core types and little if any easier or cheaper 
 to construct, designs for this type are omitted. 
 
 SPARK COILS. 
 
 A spark coil is similar to a transformer except that 
 it has an open core and operates by means of an inter- 
 rupted current. These coils are preferably purchased, 
 since they may be had almost as cheap as the materials 
 for construction. However, for those who may wish to 
 construct coils and who have some idea of the details, 
 the following data for wireless coils is given. Wireless 
 coils require a different design than ordinary spark coils. 
 The sections may be wound as has already been de- 
 scribed for transformer sections. The core in this kind 
 of coil is made up of a bundle of straight soft iron wires, 
 which may be had cut to size from supply houses. The 
 other requirements, such as insulation, etc., are similar to 
 those for transformers, and with the aid of the diagram 
 of the relations of the circuits shown in fig. 25, it is not 
 thought that there will be any difficulty in carrying out 
 the construction. The vibrator is best purchased from a 
 supply house, since it is as cheap or cheaper than making 
 one. The construction of the condenser is similar to the 
 construction used in receiving condensers, and the reader 
 is referred to this heading for further instructions. 
 
Transformers. Spark Coils. 91 
 
 TABLE 
 
 FOR 
 
 WIRELESS 
 
 SPARK 
 
 COILS. 
 
 (Size.) 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 C. 
 
 D. 
 
 E. 
 
 F. 
 
 G. 
 
 1 A in. 
 
 5/2 
 
 /2 
 
 CT 
 
 1-16 
 
 in. 20 
 
 225 
 
 Em. 
 
 Y-2. in. 
 
 5/2 
 
 /2 
 
 CT 
 
 1-16 
 
 in. 20 
 
 225 
 
 Em. 
 
 1 in. 
 
 5^4 
 
 /2 
 
 Em 
 
 2 
 
 18 
 
 170 
 
 Em. 
 
 2 in. 
 
 7 
 
 N 
 
 Em 
 
 2 
 
 16 
 
 184 
 
 Em. 
 
 3 in. 
 
 8 
 
 ?4 
 
 Em 
 
 2 
 
 16 
 
 208 
 
 Em. 
 
 4 in. 
 
 8^4 
 
 i 
 
 Em 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 232 
 
 Em. 
 
 5 in. 
 
 9/2 
 
 i 
 
 Em 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 256 
 
 Em. 
 
 6 in. 
 
 10 
 
 1/4 
 
 Em 
 
 3 
 
 14 
 
 214 
 
 Ml 
 
 8 in. 
 
 14 
 
 1/2 
 
 Em 
 
 3 
 
 14 
 
 320 
 
 Ml 
 
 10 in. 
 
 24 
 
 3 
 
 Em 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 400 
 
 Ml 
 
 (Size.) 
 
 H. 
 
 I. 
 
 j. 
 
 K. 
 
 L. 
 
 M. 
 
 N. 
 
 M in. 
 
 4 
 
 38 
 
 3 oz. 
 
 1 
 
 \y% 
 
 4J4 
 
 250 
 
 / in. 
 
 4 
 
 38 
 
 4 oz. 
 
 1 
 
 1/8 
 
 4J4 
 
 300 
 
 1 in. 
 
 6 
 
 38 
 
 H lb. 
 
 2 
 
 124 
 
 4/2 
 
 800 
 
 2 in. 
 
 6 
 
 36* 
 
 1 lb. 
 
 2 
 
 2J4 
 
 5J4 
 
 1400 
 
 3 in. 
 
 8 
 
 36* 
 
 \y 2 ib. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 2000 
 
 4 in. 
 
 8 
 
 36* 
 
 2 lb. 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 2500 
 
 5 in. 
 
 8 
 
 36* 
 
 3 lb. 
 
 3 
 
 4J4 
 
 6 
 
 3800 
 
 6 in. 
 
 H in. 
 
 36* 
 
 5 lb. 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6J^ 
 
 6000 
 
 8 in. 
 
 >6in. 
 
 36* 
 
 8 lb. 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 8500 
 
 10 in. 
 
 j6in. 
 
 28* 
 
 12 lb. 
 
 16 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 10,500 
 
 IN THIS TABLE, 
 
 A Length of Core In inches. 
 
 B Diameter of Core in inches. 
 
 C Insulation on Core (C. T. Carboard tube, E. M. Empire 
 Cloth.) 
 
 D Thickness of insulation on core. 
 
 (In layers, except V\ inch and % inch sizes.) 
 
 E Size (B&S) Primary Wire (D. C. C.) 
 
 F Number Turns Primary Wire. 
 
 G Kind of insulating tube. 
 
 (Em Empire Cloth) (Mi Micanite.) 
 
 H Thickness Insulating Tube. (Layers for Em. and inches 
 for Mi.) 
 
 I Size (B&S) Secondary Wire. (* means Enameled.) 
 
 J No. Pounds Secondary Wire. 
 
 K No. Sections in Secondary. 
 
 L Approximate Diameter, Secondary. (In inches.) 
 
 M Distance between coil heads. (In inches.) 
 
 N Total No. Sq. In. of Foil in Condenser. 
 
 Note: These coils use a medium speed vibrator. To use table, 
 find length of spark wanted (Size) and read across, as % inch 
 5% % C. T. etc., % inch 4 38 3 oz. etc. Adapted from Pop. 
 Electricity. 
 
92 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 A transformer is to be preferred and should be used 
 whenever possible. The spark coil will operate satis- 
 factorily on one or two six volt storage cells. A spark 
 
 coil may also be used with an electrolytic interrupter on 
 1 10 volt A. C. or D. C. current. (See Chapter 7. ) 
 
CHAPTER VIL 
 
 AUXILIARY APPARATUS. KEYS, ELECTRO- 
 LYTIC INTERRUPTER, KICKBACK PRE- 
 VENTION, AERIAL SWITCHES. 
 
 ELECTROLYTIC INTERRUPTER. 
 
 By using an electrolytic interrupter, a spark coil can 
 be operated on 110 V. A. C. or D. C. The author finds 
 
 Outtt Ur 
 
 e 
 
 FIG. SB. 
 
 PE. 
 
 after numerous trials that the interrupter shown in fig. 26 
 is the most serviceable for experimental purposes. This 
 interrupter is very inexpensive and such common things 
 as mason or other jars may be utilized. The electrodes 
 can be either brass or lead, preferably the latter. The 
 electrolyte is made up by adding a little sulphuric acid 
 to water, or else by adding some sal ammoniac to water. 
 Other salts may also be used, but common table salt is 
 not suitable. The proper amount is found by experi- 
 
94 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 ment. It is advisable to use the cooling jar as shown, 
 as the interrupter heats rapidly when in use. The only 
 difficulty in construction will probably be the hole in the 
 glass or porcelain, or clay (glazed) jar. This may be 
 readily bored with a new sharp twist drill, using turpen- 
 tine as a lubricant. The glazed clay is the easiest to 
 bore. The hole should not be too large, or too much 
 current will pass. The following sizes for the holes are 
 suitable. 
 
 1-32 inch for coils giving up to % inch spark. 
 
 1-16 inch for coils giving up to 2 inch sparks. 
 
 3-32 inch for coils giving up to 3 inch sparks. 
 
 1-8 inch, largest size advised. This size allows from 
 5 to 8 amperes to pass. 
 
 *K 
 
 FIG.S7. 
 
 In using the interrupter, the vibrator contacts of the 
 coil must be screwed down tight as the vibrator is not 
 needed. The interrupter is connected in series with the 
 coil. (See fig. 27.) The interruptions will be faster with 
 the smaller size hole other conditions being the same, and 
 they depend upon the fact that a gaseous insulating film 
 is generated at the point of contact by the current which 
 temporarily breaks the current. The interruptions or 
 makes and breaks occur at a high rate of speed. The 
 
Auxiliary Apparatus. 
 
 95 
 
 interruptions can be regulated to some extent by means of 
 a variable inductance in series with it and the coil. This 
 may be constructed like the reactance coil described in 
 Chapter 6. 
 
 KICKBACK PREVENTION. 
 
 In using transformers or coils and interrupters con- 
 nected to lighting circuits, the high tension currents often 
 kick back into the line and cause considerable damage. 
 The common effect of kickbacks are punctured meters, 
 arcs in electric light fixtures, short circuits and blown 
 
 To MeT 
 
 'Fuses 
 
 Tj-osf-nr. 
 
 FIG.EQ. 
 
 fuses. In fact, whenever more than 200 watts are drawn 
 from the line to operate a coil or transformer, steps 
 should be taken to prevent kickbacks. An efficient triple 
 preventer is shown in fig. 28. The protection is three- 
 fold, ground dissipators being provided in the form of 
 condensers, high resistances, and minute gaps. These are 
 all connected across the terminals of the line supplying 
 current to the primary of the coil or transformer. The 
 gaps should be very carefully made so that they do not 
 touch each other by a minute distance. The condenser 
 should have a large capacity and may be of the following 
 dimensions or their equivalent. 
 
96 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Each condenser has ten plates of 8x10 glass,* between 
 which are sheets of tinfoil 6x8 inches alternately con- 
 nected to form a capacity. This is constructed like any 
 other condenser. 
 
 The high resistance is attained by using graphite rods, 
 each having about 1,000 ohms resistance, and should be 
 of large diameter to dissipate the heat which is accumu- 
 lated after a time. These rods are also connected directly 
 across the line. The ground may be the regular ground 
 of the station or else the lighting ground may be conve- 
 niently used. This arrangement will take care of kick- 
 backs and will save the remainder of the circuits from 
 damage. The fuses shown are 6 amp. plug fuses, and 
 should be promptly renewed if they blow. This arrange- 
 ment may mean the difference between a serious fire and 
 constant freedom from injury or trouble and should be 
 adopted. The condenser cares for ordinary small charges, 
 the gap for excessive charges, and the rods are an addi- 
 tional protection for the meter. The latter can be dis- 
 pensed with if desired. 
 
 KEYS. 
 
 The key used for breaking the current into dots and 
 dashes must handle considerable currents in most cases 
 and ordinary telegraphy keys are only suited when a few 
 watts are used, as with small spark coils. The reader 
 can easily construct a heavy key along the lines of a 
 telegraph key, using large pieces of zinc or two silver 
 dimes for contacts. An attachment for an ordinary tele- 
 graph key which will handle large currents is shown in 
 fig. 29. The regular contacts are not used with this ar- 
 
 Heavy paraffined paper can be used. 
 
Auxiliary Apparatus. 
 
 97 
 
 rangement. A similar arrangement can easily be con- 
 structed. The arrangement is so simple that further 
 comment seems unnecessary. The contacts can be of zinc 
 
 Bf)t Bui* 
 
 $tri> 
 
 FIG. 
 
 or silver and should be of large surface. The distance 
 between the contacts can be adjusted as shown. The aver- 
 age telegraph key will have to be mounted on a separate 
 base to use this arrangement. A similar set of contacts 
 can be magnetically operated as shown in fig. 30, in which 
 
 pivt 
 
 FIE 3D 
 
 . f.E. 
 
 case an ordinary telegraph or strap key can be used to 
 close the circuit. This arrangement is advisable when 
 currents in excess o f 10 amperes must be handled. Springy 
 metal can be substituted for the mercury. 
 
98 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Another arrangement for handling large currents is 
 shown in fig. 31. Other arrangements for the same pur- 
 pose are to connect a large condenser in shunt around 
 the key contacts to absorb the spark, and to use oil about 
 the contacts to prevent arcs from forming. The magnets 
 shown in the figure may be either single or double pole 
 and of any suitable dimensions. The essential feature is 
 that the poles should be extended to the locality of the 
 contacts, so that they can act to blow out arcs which form 
 before the latter become of unwieldly proportions. Note 
 
 -jPole fYtCCS 
 
 Fic.ai. 
 
 the connections. Strap iron is suitable for the pole ex- 
 tensions. 
 
 AERIAL SWITCHES. 
 
 There are many forms of aerial switches, the object 
 of which is to change from the sending to the receiving 
 instruments. For small stations, an ordinary double or 
 triple pole double throw switch can be used and connected 
 as shown in fig. 32. For large stations, either a very 
 large double or triple pole double throw switch can be 
 used. The aerial switch is conveniently located, prefer- 
 
Auxiliary Apparatus. 
 
 99 
 
 ably at the point where the aerial leads enter the oper- 
 ating room. A switch which allows of rapid change from 
 sending to receiving instruments and vice versa is a de- 
 sideratum, one type of such a key being shown in fig. 33. 
 The details of construction are left to the reader, the 
 essentials being that the contacts and switch pieces should 
 be well insulated from each other, it being desirable to 
 use hard rubber throughout. On account of the leverage 
 it is only necessary to move the handle a short distance 
 
 Stn<Tn^ 
 Ua1Viiits 
 
 P.E. 
 
 from the sending to the receiving position. The blades 
 correspond to the radii of a circle in this type. 
 
 AUTOMATIC AERIAL SWITCH. 
 
 This form is very much desired and used by experi- 
 menters. It automatically disconnects the receiving set 
 the instant that the key is used to send and as soon as the 
 message is sent, the receiving set is again ready to receive. 
 This particular embodiment is adapted to a closed circuit 
 transmitter. The figure (34) is self explanatory, and 
 the reader will have little difficulty in making and attach- 
 ing this arrangement to an ordinary key. Credit for the 
 design is due to Mr. G. S. Vernam.* German silver or 
 
 *C. W. Bui. 
 
100 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 brass may be used for the springs and platinum is desir- 
 
 Contacts 
 
 HE, 33 
 
 able for the contacts. The spring strips are insulated by 
 
Auxiliary Apparatus. : 
 
 ioi 
 
 hard rubber or fibre bushings and rubber tubing, the whole 
 being clamped together by two brass machine screws. A 
 short brass strip is used to attach the device firmly to the 
 back end of the key lever. The springs must be adjusted 
 so that the first two and the second two make contact 
 
 FIE. 3 4. 
 
 Apparatus 
 
 when the key is up, and the second makes contact with 
 the fourth when the key is down. This will be clear by 
 referring to the diagram. Connections may be soldered 
 to the lugs on the springs. 
 
 AUTOMATIC SWITCH FOR HEAVY CURRENTS. 
 
 The foregoing switch is only suited to small stations. 
 The one shown in fig. 35 is adapted for heavy currents 
 and is also suitable for an inductively coupled transmitter. 
 The key is not materially different from the foregoing 
 and can be readily understood and constructed from the 
 diagram. The object of these keys is to protect the re- 
 
402 
 
 Wireless Stations. 
 
 ceiving detector from injury while sending and they oper- 
 ate through the sending inductance. This increases the 
 wave length of the aerial for receiving to some extent, 
 but is not harmful. This particular form is suited for 
 both close and inductively coupled transmitters or re- 
 ceivers. As in the other arrangement, the hard rubber 
 sheet is arranged on the key, being placed between the 
 button and the key lever in this case. Credit for this 
 arrangement is due to Mr. N. M. Tate.* It is also sat- 
 
 O n o 
 
 FIG, 35 
 
 is factory to mount the contacts on the back of the key 
 on the adjustment screw. 
 
 IN GENERAL. 
 
 The wiring in a wireless station should be carried out 
 in accordance with the code requirements. A copy of 
 the requirements may be had gratis by addressing the 
 National Board of Fire Underwriters at either New 
 York, Chicago or Boston. 
 
 * Mod. Electrics. 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 TRANSMITTING CONDENSERS. 
 
 A condenser is a device which stores energy and in 
 its simplest form it consists of two coatings of tin foil 
 separated by an insulating substance, such as air, paper, 
 glass, or oil, which is called a dielectric. The two coat- 
 ings are insulated from each other as far as metallic con- 
 nections are concerned and if they are charged by means 
 of an induction coil or transformer they will discharge 
 with a brilliant crackling spark when connected through a 
 suitable gap. Now this discharge occurs so rapidly that 
 it appears to be a single discharge, but it is in fact made 
 up of a number of rapidly oscillating discharges, first in 
 one direction and then in another. During this process 
 the polarity of the charge on the two coatings is rapidly 
 reversed so that a given coating is first charged in one 
 polarity and then in another at a high rate. The vibra- 
 tions from the discharge are called oscillations and grad- 
 ually die out with more or less rapidity according to the 
 degree of damping. The reason why a spark gap causes 
 damping will be discussed when the matter of spark gaps 
 is taken up. The time taken by an ordinary discharge is 
 generally a small part of a second, but during this small 
 space of time there may be as many as 100,000 to 
 1,000,000 oscillations. 
 
 Now the nature and amount of this charge depends 
 on the dielectric rather than the coatings employed. It 
 has been definitely established that the charge of a con- 
 
104 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 denser resides on the respective surfaces of the dielectric 
 and not on the coatings or tin foil. When a condenser is 
 charged and the coatings removed, tests will show that 
 they are not electrified to any appreciable extent, but if 
 they are returned to position to form a complete con- 
 denser with the same dielectric, they will form a highly 
 charged condenser again. The dielectric of a condenser 
 actually undergoes a strain and as in the case of mechan- 
 ical strains, this results in heat after a time. 
 
 The two coatings of a condenser are always charged 
 oppositely, that is when one coat is charged positively, 
 the other is charged negatively. These charges in oscil- 
 lating back and forth travel at a speed of 300,000,000 
 meters per second or the speed of light. When a con- 
 denser is charged by a transformer, there are four stages 
 as follows : 
 
 1. First quarter cycle, condenser coatings are charged 
 to the potential of the impressed E. M. F. 
 
 2. E. M. F. decrease during the second quarter cycle 
 so the charges on the coatings rush back to the trans- 
 former. (A discharge occurs in the spark gap at this 
 point, resulting in oscillations as has just been described.) 
 
 3. Third quarter cycle. Same as the first quarter 
 cycle except that the direction and polarity of the charge 
 is reversed. 
 
 4. Fourth quarter cycle ; same as second quarter, A 
 second discharge occurs in the gap. 
 
 There are two discharges at the least for each cycle, 
 or if the frequency of the transformer is 60 cycles there 
 will be at least 120 discharges per second.* The higher 
 
 * A large number of discharges is obtained by inter- 
 rupting the natural discharges with a rotary gap. See 
 Chapter 10. 
 
Transmitting Condensers. 105 
 
 the frequency of the impressed E. M. F. is, the higher will 
 be the value of the circuit including the capacity, because 
 of the increased rate of change of flux. An increase of 
 the capacity within limits also aids in increasing the cur- 
 rent. In wireless work, a capacity or condenser behaves 
 in the following definite manner : 
 
 1. The apparent conductivity is directly proportional 
 to the capacity and the frequency of the E. M. F. 
 
 2. The apparent resistance or capacity reactance is 
 inversely proportional to the capacity and the frequency 
 of the E. M. F. 
 
 We have already seen how the capacity required for a 
 given transformer may be found. All that remains then 
 is to find the dimensions for a condenser which will give 
 the required capacity. 
 
 CALCULATION OF CAPACITY. 
 
 Now, in order to standardize experimental apparatus, 
 the author considers that the parallel plate type of con- 
 denser is the best to adopt because its capacity or a desired 
 capacity can be readily calculated. The formula is, 
 
 C = k A 
 
 c. g. s. electrostatic units. 
 
 4/ d 
 
 in which, C represents the capacity, k, the dielectric con- 
 stant, air or other gas at atmospheric pressure being prac- 
 tically 1. Other values of k for different dielectrics will 
 be found in the Table of Dielectrics. A represents the 
 area of one of the plates overlapped by the other plate, 
 and d is the distance apart of the plates in centimeters. 
 This formula is accurate only when the distance between 
 the two plates is relatively small in comparison with the 
 length and breadth of the plates. 
 
106 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 This may be expressed. 
 
 C=_KA___ or C4 n D x 9 x 105 = KA 
 
 4 n Dx9xlQ6 
 to express the capacity in microfarads. 
 
 To find the desired area, this may be arranged, 
 A = 36. TrPCxIQ 5 
 K 
 
 DIELECTRIC TABLE. 
 (K) Constants for, 
 
 Air, empty space, or gases at atmospheric pres- 
 sure 1. 
 
 Glass 6. to 10 
 
 Light flint glass 6.5 
 
 Dense flint glass 6.5 to 10 
 
 Hard crown glass 7. 
 
 Mica 6.6 to 7.5 
 
 Hard rubber 2.7 
 
 Kerosene oil 2. 
 
 Castor oil 4.78 
 
 Shellac 2.7 to 3.5 
 
 Ebonite 2.5 to 3. 
 
 Manilla paper 1.5 
 
 Paraffin 1.75 to 2.3 
 
 Resin 1.77 to 2.5 
 
 Porcelain 4.38 
 
 Water 80. 
 
 Note, an average result is best to use in the formula. 
 Glass should be taken as 7j^ or 8 when ordinary glass or 
 old photographic plates are to be used. The emulsion 
 should be cleaned off before using the latter. 
 
Transmitting Condensers. 107 
 
 Now the quantity 36 pi x 100,000 is the same in every 
 case, so the formula may be simplified to 
 
 A = DC x 11309760, and when glass is used for the 
 K 
 
 dielectric, which has a constant of 8 ; this may be further 
 simplified to 
 
 A = DC x 1413720 because 1 1309760 = 1413720. 
 
 8 
 
 So the calculation of the capacity and area for a given 
 or desired condenser is really not difficult. The figures 
 are in the metric system and to change to inches after the 
 area has been found in centimeters change in the follow- 
 ing ratio : 
 
 1 inch = 2.54 centimeters. 1 centimeter = .3937 in. 
 1 square inch = 6.45 sq. cm. 1 sq. cm. = .1550 sq. in. 
 
 In order to illustrate the use of this formula, suppose 
 it is desired to find the necessary area for the tinfoil to 
 make up a condenser of .002 microfarad, using glass .1 
 centimeter thick. Ordinary glass plates are .05 inch thick 
 or approximately .125 centimeter thick. Using the sim- 
 plified formula, we get 
 
 A = .1 x .002 x 1413720 = 282.74 sq. cm. 
 
 Now this surface can be apportioned in almost any 
 desired manner. For instance, three plates of glass of 
 this size 12 by 14 centimeters and covered with tin foil on 
 each side, 9 by 10j^ centimeters would be approximately 
 right. 
 
 To take another example, desired capacity .02 micro- 
 farad, using manilla paper .02 cm. thick, what area of 
 foil for A is required. 
 
108 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Use the simplified general formula, 
 A = DC x 11309760, substituting 
 
 K 
 
 A = .02 x .02 x 11309760 = 4523.9 = 3015.9 sq. cm. 
 1.5 1.5 
 
 This can also be proportioned as desired, about 30 
 sheets of the dielectric being used. 
 
 Almost any desired capacity can be worked out to a 
 close degree of accuracy in this manner. These quanti- 
 ties have been carefully worked out. It will be noted 
 from the formula that there are several factors which de- 
 termine the capacity of a condenser, A, D, and K, so that 
 if two are known, the third may be found. 
 
 Now in designing a condenser for transmission pur- 
 poses, the thickness of the dielectric must be sufficient to 
 withstand the impressed voltage and an overload without 
 puncturing. For this reason one centimeter to every 40,- 
 000 volts should be allowed. Thus if the voltage is 10,000 
 the dielectric should be made .25 centimeters thick and so 
 on. However, if glass can not be had in this size or a 
 large enough size, two or more capacities of the same di- 
 mensions can be connected together, in series. This meth- 
 od makes the use of ordinary thickness of glass possible 
 with high voltages, but since the capacity is thereby cut 
 down, in approximately the same ratio, the capacity for 
 each unit must be correspondingly larger. Thus if a sin- 
 gle unit is used which has a capacity of .2 microfarad, and 
 if two condensers must be used in series to secure this 
 same capacity without breaking down under the impressed 
 voltage, each must have a capacity of .4 microfarad. So 
 that to increase the voltage which a condenser made up of 
 a given size of plates may stand, by connecting units in 
 
Transmitting Condensers. 109 
 
 series, to twice the voltage which a single unit can stand, 
 each unit must have twice the capacity of a single unit if 
 two are connected in series to give the capacity of the sin- 
 gle unit. While we are on this subject, it is well to note 
 that when condenser units are connected in parallel, the 
 total capacity is the sum of the capacities of the condenser 
 units, but the puncturing voltage which the parallel set 
 can stand is limited to that of its weakest unit. For this 
 reason the units used should be of identical dimensions 
 whenever possible. 
 
 STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS. 
 
 The condenser is a very important part of the wireless 
 station and unless properly constructed, the transmission 
 efficiency will be materially affected. The main require- 
 ments are, 
 
 1. The foil used should be a good conductor and of 
 sufficient size to carry the charges without undue heating. 
 Copper is preferably used and may be had in thin sheets 
 for this purpose. Tin foil should be heavy if used at all. 
 The kind used by florists is generally suitable. The high 
 frequency currents require a large surface and if this is 
 not provided, the conductor is likely to burn up. 
 
 2. Radiation surface is necessary to dissipate the heat 
 which is generated in the dielectric. When used in air, 
 the condenser plates are generally spaced a short distance 
 apart for this purpose, and when immersed in oil, the 
 liquid acts as a cooling agent. 
 
 3. Contacts should be soldered to the tin or copper 
 sheets forming the coatings to make the best contact pos- 
 sible. The resistance of poor joints to high frequency 
 currents is much greater than to low frequency currents. 
 Stranded conductors make good leads to condensers. A 
 
110 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 common method of construction is to clamp projecting 
 portions of the coatings tightly together to form a single 
 conductor at the terminals. 
 
 4. Brush discharges, surface leakage, and other losses 
 should be minimized. This is accomplished by using a 
 good grade of dielectric, allowing a safe margin around 
 the coatings, making the coatings uniform and even, mak- 
 ing the coatings fit the dielectric tightly, and placing the 
 complete condenser in an insulator such as boiled linseed 
 oil. 
 
 (5) Contacts should be as large as possible, to avoid 
 undue resistance. 
 
 The items under (4) are perhaps the most important 
 and require careful attention in designing and construct- 
 ing a condenser. Plate condensers offer the most satis- 
 factory solution to the several problems and in addition 
 have the advantage already mentioned of being readily 
 calculated for a given purpose. Plate condensers sep- 
 arated in air are not as desirable as those imbedded in an 
 insulator because they tend to blister and aid brush dis- 
 charges under overloads. For these reasons, the standard 
 type to be adopted, is the plate condenser made into con- 
 venient or desired units and imbedded in an insulator. 
 
 DETAILS. 
 
 The glass used may be had cut to size at any hardware 
 or paint supply house and for voltages over 15,000 the 
 use of double strength glass is advisable. Data regard- 
 ing the sizes, thickness and so on may be had from the 
 dealer and is useful in calculating capacity, estimating 
 material, and similar purposes. Old photographic plates 
 make very good condenser dielectric material when the 
 emulsion is removed and may be had very cheap. The 
 
Transmitting Condensers. Ill 
 
 author once purchased two hundred 5x7 glass plates at 
 25c per hundred, and while the larger sizes are valued 
 higher because of their use in picture frames, they may 
 be had for a nominal sum. In fact, many photographers 
 will gladly donate old glass plates if properly approached 
 and told that they are for wireless experimental purposes. 
 The emulsion can be removed by soaking the plates over- 
 night in a strong solution of lye in water. Glass contain- 
 ing much lead is not suited for condensers, and all of the 
 plates used should be of the same thickness throughout. 
 
 Just before using, it is advisable to again clean the 
 plates with a rag dipped into alcohol, although warm 
 water can be used if the plates are allowed to thoroughly 
 dry afterwards. The glass should be thoroughly clean 
 and dry before using. 
 
 MATERIAL FOR COATINGS. 
 
 Thin copper sheet or heavy tin foil should be used for 
 the coatings and should be cut to size. If tin foil is used, 
 it should be about No. 35 gauge if possible, and in any 
 case it must be smoothed, by means of a print roller such 
 as photographers use. In making condensers which are 
 so large that a single width of tin foil will not suffice, two 
 or three strips overlapping each other can be used. The 
 size of the coatings should be such that a margin of one 
 inch is left on all sides relative to the edge of the glass 
 plate for every ten thousand volts to be used in the charg- 
 ing, though less may be used after a limit of two or three 
 inches is reached, or when the plates are immersed in oil. 
 
 ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 The arrangement of the plates and coatings is shown 
 in fig. 36. The lugs for the coatings are preferably in 
 one piece with the coatings, but they may be separate 
 
112 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 pieces if they make good contact electrically with the 
 coatings and are mechanically strong. The latter method 
 is less expensive as there is practically no waste of ma- 
 terial. 
 
 In soldering tinfoil, the foil to which a strip is to be 
 soldered must be laid upon a piece of copper or aluminum 
 sheet of some thickness, in order to conduct the heat 
 
 away, as the foil will melt or burn up, otherwise. When 
 the condenser is to be used on high voltage, two or three 
 thicknesses of the glass can be used between each sheet of 
 foil to secure a greater disruptive strength, but the capa- 
 city is of course correspondingly less and the total thick- 
 ness of the plates between the two coatings must be used 
 to calculate the capacity. 
 
 The alternate lugs of the two coatings can be brought 
 
Transmitting Condensers. 113 
 
 out on opposite sides of the plates or else suitably spaced 
 on the same side. (See the figure.) It is a good plan 
 to make the required condenser in several units, particu- 
 larly if the capacity is large. Thus if twelve 8x10 plates 
 are to be used, two units each having six plates are prefer- 
 able. This arrangement makes repairs from damages or 
 punctures easier, since only one of the units is liable to 
 be punctured at a time, while with a single unit, the whole 
 condenser would be temporarily disabled. It is good 
 practice to provide an extra unit or two if this method is 
 adopted, in order to meet emergencies. 
 
 In building the condenser, lay a sheet of glass on a 
 flat table, then place a sheet of foil with its lug on top 
 of it, so that it lies flat and is evenly spaced from the edge 
 of the plate. Now lay a second glass plate on top of this, 
 and place a second sheet of foil on it, spaced as before, but 
 arranged so that its lug comes either at the opposite side 
 of the plate or suitably spaced from the first lug, as shown 
 in the figure. Proceed as before, placing alternate sheets 
 of glass and foil until all of the plates have been assem- 
 bled. An extra plate should then be used to cover the top 
 sheet of foil. When this is done, the condenser will be 
 a uniform unit, with two sets of insulated plates alternate- 
 ly arranged. The unit can then be bound together by large 
 rubber bands, rubber tape or string, or any suitable form 
 of clamp may be used provided too much pressure is not 
 applied. If the plates are pressed together too tightly 
 the glass will crack, ruining the condenser. The two 
 respective sets of lugs should now be firmly clamped be- 
 tween brass or copper sheet, or soldered together and to 
 a large lead. Test the unit for short circuits with a bat- 
 tery and telephone receiver, (the faint response does not 
 indicate a short circuit, but is caused by the capacity of 
 the plates). A few of the lugs can be left disconnected 
 
114 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 as shown at (c) fig. 36, and separate leads attached to 
 them so that the capacity of the condenser can be varied 
 a little. This method is useful particularly with spark coils 
 since the exact capacity needed is difficult to predetermine. 
 
 The finished units should be placed in a suitable box or 
 jar, (hard rubber or glass storage battery jars are excel- 
 lent containers for this purpose), a hard rubber cover 
 provided, connections brought to binding posts, and so on 
 as desired. The jar or container should be liquid proof 
 and should be filled with a good quality of transformer 
 oil, boiled linseed oil, castor oil, vaseline, paraffme oil, or 
 other non-explosive insulating oil. The condenser should 
 be mounted or arranged in the jar so that it does not rattle 
 and if the condenser is to be moved very much a thick in- 
 sulator like vaseline should be used, so that the oil will 
 not be continually running over or leaking. A good grade 
 of lubricating oil can be used, the non-carbonizing oils 
 used in automobiles being suitable and quite cheap. Oils 
 which ignite easily or which carbonize or deteriorate 
 quickly, as well as those which are poor insulators should 
 not be used, since the function of the oil is to prevent 
 leakage and brush discharges as well as to dissipate the 
 heat caused by the hysteresis of the glass dielectric. 
 
 A condenser is really a very simple piece of apparatus, 
 but too much care cannot be taken in constructing it if 
 efficiency is desired. For experimental purposes, old 
 bottles, placed in a dishpan containing salt water, and 
 filled two-thirds full with a solution of common salt and 
 water can be impressed into service as a condenser, con- 
 nections being made to the dishpan and to wires entering 
 into the bottles respectively. A large capacity is possible 
 by this makeshift arrangement, but the capacity can of 
 course not be accurately determined. Two rubber cov- 
 ered wires twisted together but insulated at the ends will 
 
Transmitting Condensers. 115 
 
 form a condenser when connected about the secondary 
 terminals of a small coil. There are many similar ar- 
 rangements which will suggest themselves to the reader. 
 There are other suitable forms for condensers, but since 
 the type described is equal or superior to them and serves 
 for all experimental purposes, these will not be described. 
 By using copper, zinc, or even tin sheets (iron coated 
 with tin), of some thickness between glass plates, a vari- 
 able condenser may be made. The capacity can be varied 
 by moving the plates forming one set of coatings in or out 
 of the vicinity of the glass plates and the other set of 
 coatings, thus increasing or diminishing the capacity. The 
 construction of such an arrangement is very simple and 
 the details need no further comment. The diagram of 
 this arrangement is shown in fig. 36 (d). It should be 
 noted that this arrangement is just like an ordinary glass 
 plate condenser except that rigid movable plates are sub- 
 stituted for the tinfoil in one of the sets of coatings. In 
 fig. 36, (e) shows the manner of connecting condensers in 
 parallel to increase the capacity, (f) shows the connec- 
 tions for series to decrease the capacity, and (g) shows 
 a combination of the two, which decreases the capacity. 
 Taking a single unit for comparison, the units being of 
 the same size (e) will give double the capacity, (f) one- 
 half the capacity, and (g) an equal capacity, but using 
 four units. The series and series multiple connections are 
 used when the voltage impressed on a single unit is more 
 than it can stand without puncturing, (h) fig. 36 shows 
 the method used to connect both a fixed and a variable 
 condenser having the same form and size of dielectric in 
 circuit. This method allows the exact capacity needed 
 for a given transformer to be used. With this arrange- 
 ment, the variable condenser need not have a very large 
 capacity by itself since it is needed only to make up a 
 small difference in most cases. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 CALCULATION OF INDUCTANCE. CONSTRUC- 
 TION OF HELIX AND OSCILLATION 
 TRANSFORMER. 
 
 Like the calculation of wave length and capacity, the 
 calculation of inductance is quite simple provided the fol- 
 lowing formulas are used. The answer is of course only 
 approximately correct, but this is quite accurate and may 
 be used directly in supplying the proper inductance in the 
 transmitting circuit. The calculation for self inductance 
 takes into account the magnetic circuit of the coil and the 
 number of turns of wire in the coil. Any change in the 
 shape or size of a coil will alter the inductance and spe- 
 cial shapes require special formulas. The following rela- 
 tion holds good, however, for cylindrical coils of one 
 layer, as helixes or choke coils, and takes into account 
 variable factors. 
 
 (1) (SxDxT) 2 = inductance in centimeters. 
 
 M+ 1/3D 
 
 In this formula, 
 
 D is the diameter of the coil in inches. 
 T is the total number of turns of wire. 
 M is the length of the coil in inches. 
 
Inductance for Transmitters. 117 
 
 The result is expressed in centimeters, which may be 
 changed into microhenrys by dividing the result by 1,000. 
 
 To illustrate the use of this formula, find the induct- 
 ance of a coil nine inches in diameter, 10 inches long and 
 having 10 turns of wire. 
 
 ( 5 x 9 x 10 ) 2 = 450 2 =202,500 
 
 10+1/3 of 9 ~~13~ "13" 
 or 15,580 cm. approximately, or 15.580 microhenrys. 
 
 Another formula which may be used to find the in- 
 ductance of a helix in C. G. S. units is, 
 
 (2) Inductance (L) = 1 (3.1416 dn), 2 where 
 
 1, is the length of the helix, d its diameter, and n the 
 number of turns per unit length. Thus with this form- 
 ula, a helix 5 cm. in diameter, 50 cm. long and having 2 
 turns to each cm., has an inductance of 
 
 50 (3.1416 . 5.2) 2 = 50,000 C. G. S. 
 
 1 henry is equal to 1,000,000,000 C. G. S. electromag- 
 netic units. 
 
 To calculate the inductance of flat or doughnut helixes 
 or coils (those having several layers wound over each 
 other), the formula to use is, 
 
 (3) 
 
 (5XDXT) 2 
 
 1/3D + 3/2M + 5/4N = inductance in cms., 
 in which 
 
 D is the average diameter of the coil in inches. 
 
 M is the length of the coil in inches. 
 
 N is the depth of the coil in inches. 
 
 T is the total number of turns of the coil. 
 
 To illustrate : Given a flat type of helix of the fol- 
 lowing dimensions, calculate the inductance, 6 turns of 
 copper strip 1 in. apart, depth of winding 6 in. Width of 
 
118 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 strip is 1 in. and average diameter 12 inches. (Inside 6 
 in., outside 18 in.) 
 
 ( 5 x 12 x 6 ) 2 = (360) 2 = 129,600 or 9970 cm. 
 4+l^ + 7> ~13~~ 13 
 
 or 9.970 microhenrys. 
 
 MUTUAL INDUCTANCE. 
 
 In oscillation transformers, mutual induction must be 
 considered. When the transformer is a long single layer 
 coil having a lumped secondary wound about it, the form- 
 ula is, 
 
 (4) M = 4 X 3.1416 nNA C. G. S. units. 
 
 M is the mutual inductance, n the number of turns per 
 cm. on the primary coil, N the total number of turns on 
 the secondary coil, and A represents the area of cross 
 section included within the primary coil. The length is 
 to be measured in centimeters. 
 
 1 henry is equal to 1,000,000,000 C. G. S. electromag- 
 netic units. 
 
 1 microhenry is one millionth of a henry. 
 
 STANDARD HELIX. 
 
 For small stations the helix is perhaps better suited 
 than the oscillation transformer and since it is easier to 
 calculate and construct, it will be described first. The ar- 
 rangement and details of the helix are shown in fig. 37. 
 The heads may be cut out of hardwood on a bandsaw or 
 else turned out in a lathe, and should be eight inches in 
 diameter and preferably 4 of an inch thick. These heads 
 are separated at a distance of 7 inches by four evenly 
 spaced pieces, each 24 of an inch thick by 1 inch wide by 
 
Inductance for Transmitters. 
 
 119 
 
 inches long. These pieces should be smoothly fin- 
 ished. While the wire will stay on these pieces without 
 artificial support, it is advisable to cut notches in these 
 pieces to receive the wire. If possible, the outer surface 
 of the pieces should be veneered with strips of hard 
 rubber or fibre as extra insulation so that the wire does 
 not make direct contact with the wood. The separating 
 strips are arranged as shown so that they form legs J4 
 
 P.E. 
 
 of an inch high at the bottom. The construction is quite 
 simple, and if possible insulators should be substituted for 
 the wood legs, in which case, the upright pieces will be 
 made 4 of an inch shorter. The frame may be fastened 
 together by screws and glue and should set true. The 
 wire used is No 4 B&S brass, aluminum or copper, and 
 should be purchased already coiled to approximately 9 
 inches in diameter or a little less. When wound, the 
 
120 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 wire will have a diameter of 10 inches and will stay tight 
 if of smaller diameter to begin with. The wire is wound 
 on the notches, so that the turns are spaced J4 of an inch 
 apart in a uniform and even winding. Seven complete 
 turns are required so that about \9 l /2 feet of wire are 
 necessary. This wire can be had at supply houses or 
 hardware stores. The wire turns will start and end just 
 a little less than one inch from each head, and the ends 
 can be fastened down by large screw binding posts. The 
 turns should be kept 4 of an inch apart and 10 inches 
 in diameter for the purpose of standardization. This 
 arrangement will be most suited for the low wave length 
 and will give fairly sharp tuning. If the turns are made 
 larger in diameter, the tuning will be less definite, and if 
 more turns are used the wave length is of course in- 
 creased. However, if the inductance is made too large 
 for the aerial, the period and the radiation are cut down. 
 Small aerials must naturally have relatively small helixes 
 to maintain the necessary balance. Flexible contacts or 
 helix clips should be provided, as shown. Almost any 
 desired size of inductance may be constructed along these 
 same lines, and this standard is highly recommended for 
 stations up to 1 K. W. using the low standard wave 
 length. 
 
 This helix has a maximum inductance of approxi- 
 mately 14.28 microhenrys. One complete turn has an in- 
 ductance of .291 microhenry. To find the inductance for 
 any number of turns, multiply <291 by the square of the 
 number of turns. Thus for three turns, multiply .291 
 by 9, for Zy 2 turns, by 12 J4, and so on. 
 
 In practice, from one to three turns will be needed 
 in the condenser circuit, according to the capacity of 
 the condenser used, and while all of the seven turns 
 may never be needed, the aerial circuit will generally 
 
Inductance for Transmitters. 121 
 
 include at least four or five turns, depending upon its 
 dimensions. 
 
 Copper or brass ribbon or coiled strip is also suitable 
 for helix construction. 
 
 STANDARD OSCILLATION TRANSFORMER. 
 
 The type to be adopted is the flat pancake form. The 
 mutual inductance is readily adjustable with this type, 
 and every part of the inductances, can be readily reached. 
 This transformer allows of very sharp and accurate tun- 
 ing and is recommended for all stations using over 100 
 watts of energy. It will also be useful to smaller sta- 
 tions. Brass ribbon J^ inch wide is used in constructing 
 both the primary and secondary and should be about 1-16 
 of an inch thick. This may be had at hardware stores. 
 About 40 or 42 feet will be needed. Thinner ribbon may 
 be used double or triple to make up the desired thickness. 
 
 Obtain four strips of rubber or fibre ^x>^ by 14^ 
 inches long. These should be straight and smooth. Hard- 
 wood may be substituted. These should be joined as 
 shown in fig. 38, with half joints at the center to form 
 two sets of crossed pieces. Before gluing the joints the 
 pieces should be taken apart, marked and cut as shown. 
 The slots are best cut with a hacksaw or band saw ; each 
 slot being 1-16 of an inch wide and 3-8 of an inch deep. 
 The slots are placed exactly ^2 in. apart and begin J4 of 
 an inch from the end. Mark numbers 1 to 4 on the ends 
 of the strips as shown in the figure so that when the 
 two pieces are put together again the outside ends will 
 be in order. 
 
 The slots are laid off beginning from the outside so 
 that each slot is one-eighth of an inch closer to the center 
 than the one before, the slots thus forming a spiral when 
 the pieces are placed together. Proceed the same for both 
 
122 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 sets of cross pieces, except that slots for five turns are 
 provided for the set which is to support the primary 
 while the other set is slotted for nine turns, thus coming 
 nearer the center. After the slotting is done, fasten the 
 pieces at the joints and bore a hole three-eighths of an 
 inch in diameter through each set exactly at the center. 
 
 Now fasten the two cross pieces down in a convenient 
 place by means of one or two screws at the center hole 
 and wind the ribbon in the slots. The ribbon should 
 be either pressed or driven into the slots with a mallet. 
 It is a good plan to begin at the inside to do this, taking 
 care to make the curve of the spiral as uniform as poss- 
 
 Cr.ss 
 
 ible. Both forms should be wound in this manner, the 
 ends of the ribbon being cut and smoothed off. The 
 projecting ends should be sent slightly away from the 
 adjacent turn of the ribbon. The ribbon should fit snugly 
 in the slots so that it will stay in place indefinitely. The 
 curve of the ribbon should not be too sharp at the sup- 
 port points, but should form a gradual symmetrical spiral. 
 The completed coils may be mounted in a number of 
 ways, suitable supports being shown at (c) and (d) of 
 the figure. In the latter case, the primary is movable 
 axially as well as longitudinally with respect to the sec- 
 ondary, this radial effect being useful in tuning very 
 
Inductance for Transmitters. 123 
 
 sharply. The details of mounting may be varied to suit 
 the individual case, a threaded metallic rod, three-eighths 
 of an inch through which the cross arms may pass and 
 be fastened at an adjustable distance being suitable. The 
 clip shown in the figure is made from an old 10 or 15 
 ampere switch contact. An electrose or hard rubber han- 
 dle is screwed on its base end. Four of these should be 
 used, two each for the two coils. Similar pieces may be 
 easily made for the clips if an old switch is not obtainable, 
 almost any piece which will make good contact with the 
 ribbon, being suitable. 
 
 The inductance of the primary may be calculated for 
 each turn, beginning with the center by using formula 
 (3), taking first one turn, then the first two, then the 
 first three, as though they were independent coils. Or 
 if the inductance of each turn beginning with the outside 
 is desired, a similar method may be employed. The in- 
 ductance for the several turns is not constant on account 
 of the difference in diameter between each turn. The 
 values for the turns, beginning with the outside turn, are 
 approximately. 
 
 First turn, .868 microhenry. 
 
 Two turns, 3.96 microhenrys. 
 
 Three turns, 5.7 microhenrys. 
 
 Four turns, 10.245 microhenrys. 
 
 Five turns (maximum inductance), 13.5 microhenrys. 
 
 When the coils are mounted to form a radial trans- 
 former, the secondary should not be turned out of a 
 parallel plane unless very sharp tuning is required, as 
 when it is necessary to work through considerable inter- 
 ference. The tuning is sharper, within limits, the greater 
 the distance between the two coils, but for ordinary pur- 
 poses they should not be too far apart because the in- 
 
124 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 tensity of the transmitted signal is considerably less with 
 a very loose coupling. 
 
 The secondary inductance may be similarly calculated, 
 although this is not necessary, since after the primary or 
 condenser circuit is tuned to a desired wave length, the 
 antenna circuit can be brought into resonance with it by 
 connecting a number of turns in the aerial circuit which 
 experiment shows to be right. 
 
 A LOADING COIL. 
 
 A loading coil for the purpose of securing a high 
 wave length for experimental purposes may be construct- 
 ed like a helix and inserted in series with the aerial cir- 
 cuit, as has already been explained. This loading coil 
 need not have quite as large wire as the sending helix, 
 although this size is a desirable standard, in order to 
 avoid undue resistance. No. 8 is a common size for this 
 purpose. The loading must not be carried out too far 
 with a given aerial, for after the ohmic resistance exceeds 
 the square root of four times the inductance in henries, 
 divided by the capacity in microfarads, the oscillations 
 cannot take place. Any resistance impedes the oscilla- 
 tions considerably. If the long wave lengths are desired, 
 a large aerial capacity must therefore be provided to 
 begin with, if efficiency is desired. A small aerial, how- 
 ever, may be loaded for experiments. 
 
 Almost any circular coil of wire can be made to serve 
 as a helix or loading coil as a makeshift arrangement, 
 but the reader is strongly advised to adopt standardized 
 instruments to make definite wave lengths, capacities, in- 
 ductances, and adjustments possible. Sharp, accurate, 
 scientific tuning and work can be attained in practically 
 no other way. The best is not much harder to make than 
 the other kinds and is certainly well worth the time 
 taken, as no other kind is as easy and instructive to use. 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SPARK GAPS. 
 PURPOSE OF THE GAP. 
 
 A spark gap is inserted in the condenser circuit to 
 allow the condenser to be discharged through it until 
 the oscillations die out, and also to prevent the conden- 
 ser from discharging until it is fully and properly charged. 
 A spark gap, then, should be a good insulator while the 
 condenser is charging and a good conductor while it is 
 discharging. Now the resistance of the spark gap is one 
 of the main factors which determine the damping of the 
 oscillations, and unless properly constructed, considerable 
 energy is wasted as heat in this part of the condenser 
 circuit. The use of the proper amount of capacity in the 
 condenser aids materially in keeping the length of the 
 gap within efficient limits. Too long a gap causes an 
 irregular stringy spark while too short a gap for the given 
 condenser causes a wasteful arc to form in the gap. The 
 gap should, therefore, be of adjustable length, able to 
 conduct the energy without undue heating, and to make 
 and break as an insulator and conductor with rapidity. 
 A poorly constructed or poorly adjusted gap can cut down 
 the efficiency of transmission materially. Three types 
 of gaps are to be described, a common gap for small 
 stations, a series gap for somewhat larger stations, and 
 a rotary gap. The quenched spark system will be dis- 
 cussed in a later chapter. 
 
126 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 A simple gap is shown in fig. 39. The electrodes 
 may be mounted in almost any suitable manner, care be- 
 ing taken to keep the two parts well insulated from each 
 other and from other bodies. Either a vertical or hori- 
 zontal mounting can be used and if desired, only one of 
 the electrodes need be adjustable. The construction is 
 quite simple and further comment seems unnecessary. 
 The insulation used is preferably hard rubber throughout, 
 though other materials may be substituted. The parts 
 are preferably made of brass and the electrodes from 
 
 FIG. 33. 
 
 zinc or an alloy of zinc with 2 per cent aluminum. These 
 electrodes should be made removable, as they pit after 
 a time, and should be perfectly true. It is well to pur- 
 chase these parts or have them made by a machinist, 
 if no lathe is available. The electrodes should have plenty 
 of surface, a diameter of J4 mc h f r every hundred watts 
 being suitable. If this type of gap is used with large 
 power, metallic radiating flanges should be provided to 
 take care of the heat. The handle should be well insu- 
 
Spark Gaps. 
 
 127 
 
 lated so that the adjustment can be made while the coil 
 or transformer is in operation. This form of gap can 
 easily be muffled by placing a large glass jar over it, thus 
 excluding the noise, or can be cooled by allowing a small 
 fan to blow on to it, if desired. 
 
 A series gap is shown in fig. 40, which gives a smooth 
 spark with many desirable features. It can readily be 
 constructed in a desired size by referring to the figure. 
 Too much care cannot be taken to insulate the electrodes 
 well, and to provide large, true surfaces on the gap elec- 
 trodes. While only a single dead electrode is shown in 
 the figure, two or more dead electrodes may be used if 
 
 FIG.-4D. 
 
 RE. 
 
 the sending coil or transformer is large. The electrode 
 faces are made preferably of copper sheet, with perfora- 
 tions as shown to prevent uneven wear and made detach- 
 able as shown so that they can be cleaned or renewed. 
 This type of gap has a large cooling surface and is to 
 be commended for experimental use. The relative dis- 
 tances of the electrodes should be adjustable, but each 
 part of the gap should be of uniform length. The total 
 length of all the gaps should be about the same as would 
 be used in a single gap. 
 
 The rotary spark gap is perhaps the most desirable 
 of all the open discharge gaps and should be adopted 
 
128 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 whenever possible. Its advantages are many, among 
 which may be mentioned its high spark frequency, (the 
 discharge spark is broken up into a series of uniform 
 sparks, which increase the effective transmission range), 
 the well cooled electrodes, the uniform sparks, and others. 
 There are many types and constructions for rotary gaps 
 
 Holes 
 
 and while some of these are quite complicated, the reader 
 will have little difficulty in constructing an efficient, in- 
 expensive gap. A suitable construction is shown in fig. 
 41,* and while numerous variations may be used, this form 
 
 *This is not a hard and fast design, however, as many 
 others are suitable. 
 
Spark Gaps. 129 
 
 will prove satisfactory in most cases. The revolving 
 electrode as well as the stationary electrodes should be 
 thoroughly insulated from each other and foreign bodies. 
 The revolving electrode should be insulated from the 
 drive shaft or motor. This is best accomplished by using 
 a three-eighths inch shaft and bearing for the revolving 
 electrode and making connection with the motor shaft by 
 an insulated coupling, such as is used in electric light 
 fixtures. These couplings may be had for a few cents. 
 Another simple method is to use quite a long belt between 
 the motor and a pulley on the rotary electrode shaft. The 
 motor used may be an ordinary small battery motor or a 
 small synchronous motor, preferably the latter. Fan mo- 
 tors are desirable for this purpose and the power need 
 not be large, since the rotary electrode offers very little 
 if any greater resistance to the power than a small fan. 
 The stationary electrodes need no further comment and 
 may be constructed with perforated surfaces to make 
 them wear out evenly, as has been described for the 
 series gap. This perforated feature may also be embodied 
 in the rotary electrode. The rotary electrode is preferably 
 made out of thick sheet aluminum, one-fourth of an inch 
 being a suitable thickness. The size of the rotary elec- 
 trode can be from four to ten or more inches in diameter, 
 depending on the power to be used. An eight inch ro- 
 tary electrode is a convenient size and may be used for 
 stations up to ^ K. W. or more. To make this electrode, 
 proceed as follows : 
 
 CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Find the center of a square sheet a trifle larger than 
 the desired diameter and with it as a radius draw three 
 circles. The outside circle will be for the finished dia- 
 
130 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 meter of the electrode, or eight inches in this case. The 
 next circle will be a distance nearer the center, depending 
 on the size of the electrode In this case a circle with a 
 three inch radius will be used. The inner circle will be 
 the size of the shaft used, or three-eighths of an inch in 
 this case. Now the circle on the three inch radius is 
 divided into eight parts by means of dividers, and these 
 points are prick punched. Eight holes, each \ l / 2 inch 
 in diameter, are to be drilled at these points, either before 
 or after the plate is turned down to the outside diameter. 
 This size of hole leaves sufficient surface to care for 
 power up to three-fourths of a kilowatt. The aluminum 
 plate should be placed in a lathe and the shaft hole drilled 
 out. The outside diameter should also be turned out. 
 Aluminum should be worked slowly. Use plenty of ker- 
 osene oil. In drilling the holes, care should be taken to 
 drill them true. It is advisable to trim the outer dia- 
 meter after the plate has been placed on a mandril. The 
 simple bearings and mountings need no further comment. 
 The stationary electrodes should have a face diameter of 
 five-eighths of an inch each, and should be mounted so 
 that they are at the center of the electrode holes when 
 at that position. The electrode should be mounted so 
 that its face runs without wobbling. If a lathe is not 
 available, a machinist can be found to do the work for 
 you. The rotating electrode should be mounted in firm 
 bearings to avoid undesired vibration. 
 
 Note. The drawing is not to scale. The extra bear- 
 ing can be dispensed with and the rotary electrode con- 
 nected direct to the motor shaft, using an insulated coup- 
 ling as a connector. In the rotary gap the sparking dis- 
 tance is best when it is relatively short. If this is not 
 maintained as a short space, it will be necessary to use 
 less capacity in the transmitting condenser. This last 
 
Spark Gaps. 131 
 
 is not desirable, since the capacity in small stations is 
 seldom any too large. Rotary gaps have a further ad- 
 vantage in that they care for heavy discharges without 
 heating. Synchronous gaps are those rotated by means 
 of a synchronous motor or those attached directly to 
 the generator shaft so that sparks occur in accordance 
 with the alternations of the supply current. Perfectly 
 pure tones are produced in this manner. This is not al- 
 ways possible when the gap is not driven synchronously. 
 With small aerials, the rotary gap allows larger quantities 
 of energy to charge the antenna circuit. 
 
 The rotating electrode should be revolved at a high 
 rate of speed, that resulting from a direct connection 
 to a synchronous motor being suitable. The gap need 
 only be rotated when in use, and may be stopped, while 
 receiving, if desired. 
 
 A makeshift rotary gap can be made by driving evenly 
 spaced brass headed tacks or screws into a wood disk 
 mounted on a shaft and used as the gap just described. 
 Just before the tacks are driven down, a twisted wire 
 should be run between them for a continuous connection. 
 This gap is not recommended for other than very small 
 outfits, and then only as an experiment. The reader can 
 doubtless make a more substantial modification along the 
 same lines. 
 
 GAPS, IN GENERAL. 
 
 The surface of the electrodes should always be kept 
 clean and bright. Emery cloth is useful for this purpose, 
 but after the faces have become worn and pitted, new 
 electrodes should be used. Many makeshift gaps are 
 easily arranged for emergency or experimental purposes. 
 Thus ordinary nails, dry battery zincs, brass pipes, and 
 
132 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 other similar metallic pieces can be mounted and used. 
 Common porcelain insulators may be used for insulating 
 standards. However, the reader is advised to make a 
 substantial efficient gap, whenever possible. 
 
 It is interesting from the experimental standpoint to 
 enclose a spark gap, preferably one of the series type, in 
 an air tight container provided with an ordinary bicycle 
 valve. Compressed air from a tire pump or carbon dioxid 
 from a Presto tube can then be used to increase the num- 
 ber of molecules present between the electrodes, and 
 under certain conditions surprisingly good results may 
 be obtained. 
 
 The reason why a high spark rate is desirable is that 
 it can be distinguished and read better than the ordinary 
 discharge, and that the individual discharges have an 
 additive effect in the receiver, building up a charge which 
 results in a good signal. An ordinary discharge does not 
 have this building effect upon the receiver, because the 
 initial impulse is the actuating force. The subsequent 
 impulses resulting from the charge, die out rapidly with- 
 out materially affecting the receiving signal All the com- 
 mercial stations have adopted a high spark rate in one 
 form or another, the rotary gap being quite generally 
 used. The few which have not adopted high spark rates 
 are the old style commercial stations, some of which are 
 not even as good as the up-to-date experimental stations. 
 
CHAPTER XL 
 
 RADIATION INDICATORS. HOT WIRE AM- 
 METER. SHUNT RESONATOR. WAVE 
 METER. 
 
 A radiation indicator is a device which indicates when 
 the aerial is radiating the maximum amount of energy. 
 It is essential to accurate effective wireless work, and is 
 used to indicate when the circuits are in resonance. There 
 are two types -to be described here as standards. The 
 first, the hot wire ammeter, is recommended. The shunt 
 resonator is perhaps a little easier to construct, but is 
 less reliable to use. In addition to the methods described, 
 there is an instrument called a wave meter, which, while 
 readily constructed, (it is a simple condenser and induct- 
 ance of known dimensions), is unsuited to experimental 
 use, because it is practically useless unless accurately 
 calibrated. While this can be approximated by calcula- 
 tions, this method is tedious and unreliable. However, 
 if a calibrated wave meter can be had for comparison, the 
 reader is advised to construct a wave meter and calibrate 
 it by comparison with the known standard, which is very 
 simple. It may be remarked that almost any form of 
 variable condenser can be used for the capacity and that 
 a few turns of bell wire wound on a form about nine 
 inches in diameter will do for the inductance. A tele- 
 phone receiver and a detector serve to indicate well 
 
134 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 enough for experimental purposes.* In practice this in- 
 strument is placed so that the inductance is in a parallel 
 plane to the sending helix or oscillation transformer. (See 
 fig. 42.) It should not be placed too near, however, a dis- 
 tance of a few feet being desirable. Now> to find the 
 primary wave length with this device, the arrangement is 
 as shown at (a) with the aerial and ground out of the 
 circuit. The capacity of the wave meter is varied until 
 the telephone receiver indicates a maximum point. The 
 wave length of the circuit measured is then very nearly 
 the same as that indicated by the calibrated wave meter. 
 The operation is essentially a comparison of a known 
 wave length with an unknown one. The readings should 
 
 W M.t.r 
 
 be taken with different turns of the helix in the primary 
 circuit until the wave length for the different amounts 
 of inductance is ascertained. The wave length for the 
 aerial circuit is obtained in the same way, the condenser 
 being disconnected as shown at (b). The wave length 
 using different amounts of inductance in the antenna cir- 
 
 *A calibrated shunt resistance, (as described on p. 
 180) may be used about the telephone receiver of the 
 wave meter, and will materially aid accurate work. 
 
Radiation Indicators. 
 
 135 
 
 cuit is then determined. In practice the two circuits arc 
 connected, so that both the aerial and condenser circuits 
 are at the same wave length. Thus if the condenser cir- 
 cuit gives a wave length of 200 meters with one turn of 
 the helix and the aerial circuit gives a wave length of 
 200 meters by itself when 4 l / 2 turns are in circuit, the 
 connections should be made in this ratio. If the primary 
 wave length is increased or decreased, the secondary or 
 antenna wave length must be changed accordingly. 
 
 The hot wire ammeter is used in a somewhat different 
 
 Hot WiW Meter 
 
 FIC.43. T 
 
 G 
 
 RE. 
 
 manner. The indicator of the meter is operated by the 
 expansion and contraction of a fine wire according to 
 the strength of the oscillatory current which passes 
 through it, a maximum current causing a maximum de- 
 flection of the pointer. This meter is connected either in 
 the aerial or ground conductor and is connected directly 
 in circuit. After the adjustments have been made, it is 
 preferably short circuited or removed as its resistance 
 impedes the oscillations to some extent. The connections 
 are shown in fig. 43. Now, since with a standard experi- 
 
136 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 mental outfit, the primary or condenser circuit is to oper- 
 ate at a wave length of 200 meters, and the proper rela- 
 tions are found by calculation, the hot wire meter will 
 be used to bring the secondary or antenna circuit into 
 resonance with the primary circuit, and also to indicate 
 the proper adjustment for the spark gap. To operate 
 then, connect the hot wire meter in the aerial or ground 
 lead, and close the primary current. The condenser and 
 inductance of the primary circuit are left so that they 
 fprm a circuit having a wave length of 200 meters ac- 
 cording to the calculations, and the aerial helix clip is 
 placed at some arbitrary point on the helix. The deflec- 
 tion of the meter should be noted. Different amounts 
 of the helix are then connected in the aerial circuit until 
 a maximum deflection is obtained, indicating that the 
 circuits are in resonance or nearly so. For a wave length 
 of two hundred meters, the contact points should always 
 remain at this point and the capacity in the condenser 
 circuit should not be changed. If the primary conden- 
 ser is made larger or smaller, the whole tuning operation 
 will have to be repeated again. Now leaving the rest 
 of the circuits fixed, adjust the length of the spark gap 
 until the meter indicates a maximum deflection. With 
 this done, the station is reasonably sure to be well tuned, 
 and if there are no other troubles, such as leaks, short 
 circuits, or brush discharges, the station is sure to radiate 
 efficiently at the given wave length. Increased or de- 
 creased wave lengths may be obtained by changing the 
 amount of the primary inductance, re-calculating the 
 primary wave length with the new amount of inductance, 
 and repeating the tuning operation with the wire meter 
 until the secondary circuit is again in resonance. The 
 spark gap need not be changed unless the capacity is 
 varied, which is not recommended after the proper rela- 
 
Radiation Indicators. 13? 
 
 tions of the circuit are once found. Experiment will 
 doubtless show that there is one wave length or range of 
 wave lengths which will produce a greater deflection of 
 the meter than the others at resonance and if this does 
 not greatly exceed 200 meters it may be used, though the 
 adjustment which gives a wave length of 200 meters or 
 very nearly 200 meters, with a maximum deflection at 
 that point, is to be preferred. When a loading coil is 
 used for long wave lengths a similar plan is used, the 
 loading coil being regarded as an extension to the sec- 
 ondary inductance. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF A HOT WIRE AMMETER. 
 
 A hot wire meter need not be a complicated piece of 
 apparatus, since essentially it comprises a mechanical 
 movement which will indicate the contraction and expan- 
 sion of a fine wire through which the oscillatory cur- 
 rent passes. The sensitive part, then, is the bearing and 
 arrangement of the movement. The balance wheel of 
 an old alarm clock is suitable for this purpose. 
 
 In taking the balance wheel and hair spring out of 
 the old clock, leave enough of the framework to hold it 
 together. This is all that is wanted from the clock and 
 the remainder of the frame should be cut away with 
 some heavy tin shears. It is well to clean the bearing 
 out and oil the latter. 
 
 Mount the balance wheel with its bearings in a wooden 
 frame, 8 inches long, 5 inches high and 2J/2 inches deep 
 as shown in the figures, 44 to 46. The frame should be 
 neatly and strongly made. The balance wheel should 
 be mounted at the center of the bottom piece 
 
 Put the balance wheel spring into tension by rotating 
 the wheel a few turns. 
 
 Obtain a short piece of silk thread (size A or O is 
 
138 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 suitable), and after fastening it to the balance wheel, 
 wind it five times around the axle of the wheel. The 
 winding should be arranged so that the pull of the spring 
 under tension is checked by holding the thread. That is, 
 the thread should be wound in a direction which will 
 maintain the tension of the wound up spring. 
 
 The hot wire itself is made from a small piece of 
 No. 36 B&S bare platinum, resistance, or copper wire, 
 
 Dial Space 
 
 FIE. 45 
 
 Del-oils. 
 
 FIG.4B 
 
 FIG.44- 
 
 RE. 
 
 preferred in the order named. Nichrome or climax re- 
 sistance wire serves very well for experimental purposes 
 and copper wire will do. Stretch this wire between the 
 two binding posts P and PI, so that it is in a plane above 
 the point where the silk thread is wound on the axle. 
 This will be clear from the illustrations. Either P or P' 
 should be made adjustable so that the tension of the wire 
 can be adjusted. This adjustment is necessary to counter- 
 
Radiation Indicators. 139 
 
 act the natural expansion or contraction of the wire un- 
 der varying weather conditions. 
 
 The pointer can be made either from a thin piece of 
 aluminum sheet or a small piece of wood. This pointer 
 should be made very light and is made Z l / 2 inches long. 
 The cross section of the pointer should not exceed one- 
 sixteenth of an inch by one thirty-second of an inch, as 
 it is essential to have a very light pointer. If this pointer 
 is painted black the readings will be facilitated. 
 
 To fasten the pointer, pull the thread so that the 
 spring is under tension and fasten one end of the pointer 
 to one of the spokes of the balance wheel by means of 
 a piece of No. 36 wire or of the silk thread left frcm 
 the other parts.. A drop of hot wax or glue will serve to 
 make the joint rigid. When fastened, the pointer should 
 be in line with the center of the wheel. 
 
 The dial can be made on a piece of stiff paper and 
 should be placed close to the back of the pointer so that 
 it does not interfere with its movement. The divisions 
 on the scale may be any desired number and are used 
 only for comparative readings. Commercial instruments 
 are generally calibrated direct in amperes or parts of an 
 ampere, but for experimental purposes, comparative read- 
 ings are all that are necessary. The dial should be of 
 a size which will co-operate with the pointer and should 
 be placed so that its center point is directly above the 
 center of the balance wheel. 
 
 In putting the parts together, place the scale in posi- 
 tion first, and tie the silk thread to the No. 36 wire 
 at its middle point so that the pointer is moved to the 
 point of the scale. A gtass cover and a suitable back 
 can then be provided, making a neat instrument. This 
 meter will give comparatively large readings for small 
 stations, and if large power is used the fine wire should 
 
140 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 be shunted with a coil of No. 26 or 28 copper wire. This 
 coil can be wound on a pencil and the amount of wire 
 needed must be found by experiment. If this shunt is not 
 provided, large coils or transformers will burn the fine 
 wire out. A good plan is to start with only one or two 
 turns in shunt and if the meter is not operated, add more 
 turns until the proper amount is found. Part of the cur- 
 rent goes through the shunt so that the fine wire is not 
 overloaded. 
 
 When an oscillatory current passes from P to PI the 
 fine wire is heated and in expanding it leaves a slack in 
 the silk thread which is taken up by the tension of the 
 spring. 
 
 This causes the axle to wind up so that the balance 
 wheel and pointer move. On account of the small dia- 
 meter of the axle and the large leverage of the pointer, 
 a very small movement of the thread makes a large move- 
 ment of the pointer. When the wire is cooled, it contracts 
 again and draws the pointer back to zero. It will always 
 return to zero when the wire cools again, and if it does 
 not on account of weather conditions, the wire may be 
 adjusted by either P or PI (made adjustable) so that 
 it does. 
 
 The dimensions given need not necessarily be adhered 
 to as long as the general principle is recognized and used. 
 By using the balance wheel and hair spring of a watch 
 with its delicate bearings, a much smaller and sensitive 
 instrument can be made. In this case, a finer wire should 
 be used, No. 40 being suitable for an ordinary watch 
 spring. The remainder of the instrument should be cor- 
 respondingly small, particular care being taken with the 
 pointer. 
 
 The. success of this instrument depends largely on 
 the care taken in its construction, and though very simple, 
 
Radiation Indicators. 141 
 
 it should be regarded as a delicate instrument. The cas- 
 ing may be made round or any other shape and can be 
 of metal if the parts are well insulated from each other 
 and the metal. 
 
 The hot wire ammeter is very desirable because it 
 indicates the maximum radiation better than any other 
 simple apparatus. While the wave meter does this to a 
 certain extent, its use is limited to the actual measure- 
 ment of wave lengths and is not very useful in determin- 
 ing the maximum radiation. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF A SHUNT RESONATOR. 
 
 This arrangement acts as a radiation indicator and 
 serves the same purpose as the hot wire meter except 
 that it is less delicate and sensitive in its indications. It 
 has the advantage of not interfering with the oscillations 
 and can be left in circuit continually. The arrangement 
 is shown in fig. 47. The coil is constructed like a helix, 
 about a dozen turns of No. 8 wire wound on a form three 
 inches in diameter and spaced one-fourth inch apart, with 
 a movable contact, being suitable. The lamp used is a 
 small four or six volt carbon filament bulb, and may be 
 had at any supply house. Whenever the transmitter is 
 in operation the lamp lights up. 
 
 The coil is connected as shown in shunt around six or 
 more feet of the ground wire, the proper amount to be 
 determined by experiment. Only a part of the high fre- 
 quency current is passed through the coil by this arrange- 
 ment so that the resistance of the ground wire is not in- 
 creased. It is really decreased to some extent. The 
 effect is probably due to the resonant relation of the coil 
 and the section of the ground wire. 
 
 To find the maximum radiation at a desired wave 
 length, place the slider of the indicator coil so that all 
 
142 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 the turns are in circuit and adjust the antenna circuit 
 until the lamp lights up the brightest. Now decrease the 
 number of turns on the indicator coil, thus decreasing 
 the brilliancy of the lamp, and adjust the transmitting 
 circuits again. Continue this process until the lamp lights 
 up brilliantly with the least possible number of turns of 
 the indicator coil connected in circuit. The transmitting 
 station will then have a maximum radiation for a given 
 wave length. A similar arrangement can doubtless be 
 
 FIE-47 
 
 used by substituting a hot wire meter for the lamp, in 
 which case, the radiation can be read directly. This is 
 likely to be hard on the meter, however. Credit for this 
 shunt indicator with a lamp is due to Mr. A. S. Hickley. 
 We have now considered the transmitter and its sev- 
 eral details in some degree of thoroughness, paying par- 
 ticular attention to the resonant relations of the circuits 
 and the design of standardized instruments. It is well 
 to again remind, that all of the circuits should be well 
 connected, contact points clean and of even surface, spark 
 
Radiation Indicators. 143 
 
 gaps clean and properly adjusted, and everything ar- 
 ranged in as workmanlike and businesslike a manner as 
 is possible. Too much emphasis can hardly be placed on 
 the necessity for sharply tuned resonant apparatus pre- 
 ferably operated at a low wave length. 
 
 A word as to cost. The cost of a station depends 
 largely on the individual. Some experimenters are able 
 to construct and operate efficient sets which cost only a 
 few dollars while other less experienced or less fortunate 
 workers may spend many times as much without better 
 or even as good results The author believes that a good 
 250 watt station to operate at a wave length of 200 
 meters can be constructed at an average cost of about 
 $25 for the transmitter, though the actual figures may 
 be considerable more or less in each case, according to 
 the circumstances involved. This figure does not con- 
 sider the item of labor, transportation charges and many 
 other variable factors, and indicates little more than the 
 cost of the materials used. While larger stations (larger 
 power) do not necessarily follow in the same ratio, the 
 expense may be taken roughly as an additional $20 for 
 every 150 additional watts. This amount is not to be 
 taken as fixed or even accurate, as there are so many 
 variable factors concerned. As an example, the hot wire 
 meter described in this chapter will be made by many 
 readers at a total expense of less than 25c, while others 
 will doubtless spend up to a few dollars in its construc- 
 tion. In general, then, it is well to make the several parts 
 as substantial and neat as possible without an excessive 
 expenditure. After all, the "Works are more important 
 than the looks," though good appearance is also desirable. 
 Receiving stations can be made at a cost of perhaps 75c 
 or up to as much as you wish. Designs for receiving ap- 
 paratus will be found in later chapters. 
 
144 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The need of thorough insulation throughout is per- 
 haps most important of all and all insulation should be 
 quite thick in order to avoid the dielectric effect. In wire- 
 less transmission, a great deal of energy may pass through 
 an insulator to a foreign body on account of the capa- 
 city which is formed. Thick insulation cuts down the 
 capacity and consequently avoids this effect. With reso- 
 nant, well adjusted circuits and a well insulated aerial, 
 very good results may be expected. In fact with these 
 precautions observed better results may often be had 
 from a small outfit than from a much larger outfit in 
 which the several points are not well carried out. 
 
 ACCURATE MEASUREMENTS FREQUENCY. 
 
 Although many who read this volume are not directly 
 concerned with accurate measurements in radio work it 
 seems well to mention that one can determine a wealth of 
 facts by using the wavemeter, the hot wire ammeter, or 
 both. Knowing the wave length for instance one can 
 immediately determine the frequency of the oscillations 
 in the aerial. Thus frequency equals 1,000 million di- 
 vided by wave-length in feet. A wave length of 10.000 
 feet (nearly two miles) for example means that the fre- 
 quency is only 100,000 and it is evident that lower wave- 
 lengths mean, under like conditions, higher frequencies. 
 Other quantities such for instance as the decrement can 
 also be obtained with accuracy and facility. 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 
 CONTINUOUS WAVES. WIRELESS TELEPHONE. 
 
 QUENCHED SPARK. HIGH FREQUENCY 
 
 ALTERNATORS. 
 
 The more advanced methods of wireless communica- 
 tion utilize continuous waves, produced either by an arc, 
 quenched spark, or direct high frequency generator. In- 
 asmuch as these methods are quite likely to be developed 
 into the ultimate perfected wireless system, some con- 
 sideration of the theory together with experimental opera- 
 tion is worthy of attention. 
 
 A simple system that may be used for telegraphy or 
 telephony is shown in fig. 48. This arrangement will 
 only operate on direct current of 1 10 or 220 volts, prefer- 
 ably the latter. The power supply should be capable of 
 furnishing a uniform current of 10 amperes. The arc 
 light may be an ordinary arc, but the lower electrode is 
 preferably made of brass or copper and water cooled. 
 This water cooled electrode may easily be made from a 
 plumber's T connection, using a brass plug for the elec- 
 trode end. Rubber tubing can be used to connect the 
 T to a water supply. The arrows indicate the flow. 
 The aerial, ground and oscillation transformer may be the 
 same as for the spark system already described. The 
 condenser should be variable, as the exact amount of 
 capacity must be found by experiment. A hot wire meter 
 in the aerial can be used to indicate the correct adjust- 
 ment of the circuits. The impedance coil is made by 
 
146 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 forming an iron core \ l /2 in. square and 5x8 in. outside 
 dimensions, as for a transformer, winding about four 
 pounds of No. 12 D. C. C. wire on the long legs. The 
 
 purpose of the impedance coil is to prevent the oscillations 
 from surging back into the generator. The choke coil 
 is made similar to the impedance coil, except that only 
 
Continuous Waves Advanced Systems. 147 
 
 two pounds of wire are used and wound on one leg. If 
 desired, a secondary can be wound on the other leg. (See 
 chapter on transformers.) A resistance for the arc should 
 also be provided. This may be made by placing two elec- 
 trodes an adjustable distance apart in a solution of salt 
 and water. A transmitter or a key can be shunted around 
 the choke coil, according to the use to be made of the 
 set, or the key or transmitter may be used to vary other 
 parts of either the primary or aerial circuit. A current 
 through the secondary winding of the choke coil may also 
 be used when it is modified by a transmitter 
 
 It is understood, of course, that the transmitter in 
 fig. 48 is used instead of a key when the circuit is used 
 as a wireless telephone, or vice versa. That is, a key 
 may be substituted for a transmitter to form an experi- 
 mental arc telegraph. If the key or transmitter is used 
 in the aerial, a duplicate in the main arc circuit is not 
 needed. For telephone experiments the transmitter is best 
 shunted around the choke coil as shown in the lower in- 
 sert of fig. 48. Only the choke coil and transmitter (Tr.) 
 are shown in this insert, as the circuit is the same in other 
 respects. In this case only one winding is used. If the 
 two windings are used as shown, the transmitter is con- 
 nected to the secondary winding through a battery. In 
 this method the variations caused by the transmitter are 
 superposed on the line current by induction and in turn 
 cause variations in the arc circuit. In the shunt method 
 the transmitter carries part of the current directly, while 
 in the inductive method it is only indirectly connected to 
 the main circuit. Ordinary transmitters can be used. 
 It is advisable to use two or three connected in parallel 
 and grouped as a single unit. Larger currents can be 
 cared for in this manner. The author has passed from 1 
 to 4 amperes through an ordinary transmitter with good 
 
148 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 results. The transmitter was heated by this treatment, 
 however, and in some later trials, it was burned out. 
 Indeed, the art is materially hindered at present, for want 
 of a satisfactory transmitter. 
 
 It should be noted that the oscillatory circuit is formed 
 by the condenser, oscillation transformer and arc. The 
 circuit through the resistance, impedance coil, arc and 
 choke coil is used to excite the arc. 
 
 In operation, the condenser is alternately charged and 
 discharged at a very high rate, because the voltage be- 
 tween the arc terminals decreases with an increase of tht 
 current. The condenser takes current from the arc, caus- 
 ing an increase of the voltage between the terminals, and 
 as a result more current flows into the condenser. Even 
 after the condenser is charged to the same potential as 
 that between the arc electrodes, the current in the con- 
 denser continues because of the inductance in series with 
 it. The potential difference at the condenser thus becomes 
 more than at the arc terminals, so that the condenser now 
 begins to discharge through the arc. This immediately 
 causes the voltage of the arc to drop, so that the discharge 
 continues. Finally the condenser potential falls below 
 that of the arc electrodes and the process reverses again. 
 The condenser continues to charge and discharge in this 
 manner and the resulting oscillatory current is utilized 
 in the transmission. The arc is varied by the transmitter 
 or key and in the former case, causes the arc to reproduce 
 the sounds spoken into the transmitter. The resulting 
 oscillations are similarly varied so that the receiver gets a 
 more or less exact reproduction of the transmitted sound 
 waves which are sent as electromagnetic waves. 
 
 The frequency produced in an arc system is very 
 high, being from 100,000 to 1,000,000 per second, and 
 can not be heard by the receiver except when modified as 
 
Continuous Waves Advanced Systems. 149 
 
 by a transmitter. Very close tuning is necessary to get 
 results from this circuit, and the experimenter is quite 
 safe in using any reasonable wave length with this ar- 
 rangement, since for telegraphic purposes with a key used 
 to make or break the aerial circuit, ordinary receiving 
 stations are not interfered with. The Poulsen system 
 operates along these lines. 
 
 A singing arc is made by connecting variable capaci- 
 ties in the shunt circuit of the arc. The pitch varies ac- 
 cording to the capacity in this case, the highest pitch being 
 obtained by the use of a very little capacity. If a tele- 
 phone transmitter is also used the arrangement forms a 
 talking arc. This is really a wireless telephone without 
 helix, aerial and ground. It is also possible to omit the 
 condenser for this purpose. Words spoken into the 
 transmitter are reproduced by the variations in the arc. 
 The sound will be louder as the length of the arc is in- 
 creased. (Do not look at the arc too much, as it is very 
 bad for the eyes.) 
 
 An arc system allows very sharp tuning to be car- 
 ried out, and as a result it does not interfere with other 
 stations, as much as ordinary spark sets do. The per- 
 sistent train of oscillations produced by this method is a 
 decided advance in the wireless art. The received signal 
 is an accumulated impulse resulting from a series of the 
 oscillations, as has been explained for the rotary gap. 
 The arrangement described will only operate over short 
 distances, however, as large power and specially designed 
 arcs and apparatus are necessary for long distance work. 
 
 THE LEPEL ARC SYSTEM. 
 
 This arrangement is a combination of the arc and the 
 quenched spark systems, and operates on either direct or 
 
150 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 alternating current of 500 or 1,000 volts. This voltage 
 may be obtained from an ordinary alternating current 
 supply by means of a step up transformer. A five hun- 
 dred watt step up transformer with a ratio of 1 to 5 will 
 serve nicely on 110 volts A. C. for experimental purposes. 
 The arrangement is very simple and is shown in fig. 50.* 
 The condenser used can be made of paraffined paper on 
 account of the low voltage used, but glass is recommended. 
 The remainder of the apparatus with the exception of the 
 arc or gap itself is familiar and needs no further com- 
 
 " 
 
 T Lint o4 Kty. 
 
 FIC.5D 
 
 Water 
 
 Con witK Wtr 
 FIE. 51. 
 
 RE. 
 
 ment. A suitable construction for the gap for experi- 
 mental purposes is illustrated in figure 51. Ordinary tin 
 cans can be utilized, but the electrode faces should be of 
 copper turned smooth and having a groove as shown. 
 This groove serves to prevent the arc from reaching the 
 outside of the gap. These copper disks should be from 
 3 to 5 inches in diameter, and can be arranged, after the 
 cans are filled nearly full of water. The two electrodes 
 
 * No chopper is needed at the receiver when A. C. is 
 used with the transmitter. 
 
Continuous Waves Advanced Systems. 151 
 
 are separated by a circular disk of paper, not more than 
 .01 in. thick. A good bond paper will do. The disk 
 
 Groove 
 
 SECT60N. 
 
 Gro*v% Air Space 
 
 FIG.5S. 
 
 RE:. 
 
 should have a small hole at its center to afford a starting 
 point for the arc. The construction is very simple and 
 needs no further comment. 
 
152 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 In operation the arc starts at the center and gradu- 
 ally burns the paper away. As this burning occurs in 
 an atmosphere lacking in oxygen, the paper does not 
 burn all up until after a number of hours. It is essential 
 to the arc, that the distance between the electrodes should 
 be uniform and not over .01 inch, so that the arc occurs in 
 an atmosphere lacking in oxygen. The products of com- 
 bustion of the paper also aid the arc's efficiency. 
 
 The paper disc can be renewed after it is used up. 
 This gap gives practically continuous oscillations and the 
 circuits can be tuned by using a hot wire meter. The 
 use of the shunt resonator described in Chapter 11 is 
 advised with this arrangement as the spark or arc is prac- 
 tically inaudible.* This form of gap can be utilized for 
 telephone purposes in much the same manner as described 
 for the arc. Great care should be taken in handling the 
 circuits as a shock from the line or secondary might 
 easily prove fatal. Two or more of these gaps may be 
 connected in series, this method being suitable for higher 
 voltages. ; 
 
 A somewhat similar arrangement used on higher volt- 
 ages and which does not need paper renewals is illus- 
 trated in fig. 52. 
 
 TELEFUNKEN (ARCO) QUENCHED GAP. 
 
 This is really a number of Lepel gaps connected in 
 series. This arrangement can be substituted for the or- 
 dinary gap of a spark system. The discs are turned ao 
 shown from 3-16 or J4 mc h sheet brass to an ou.sid 
 diameter of 6J/2 or 7 inches and grooved 1 or \ l / 2 inches 
 in, so that the groove is about 3-8 of an inch wide at the 
 face. Each plate is grooved on one side in this manner. 
 
 * When A. C. is used the discharge can be heard. 
 
Continuous Waves Advanced Systems. 153 
 
 The mica rings used may be had at supply houses and 
 should not extend further in than 1-8 inch beyond the 
 outside diameter of the groove, so that the inside cir- 
 cumference of the mica comes within J4 mcn of the in- 
 side circumference of the groove. The groove is to pre- 
 vent the spark from jumping to the mica as the latter 
 becomes a conductor when heated by a high frequency 
 discharge. The mica rings should not be more than .01 
 inch thick. The discs are assembled in pairs so that 
 the grooved faces are next to each other, and washers 
 are placed between the pairs so that the pairs are sep- 
 arated by a distance equal to the thickness of one of the 
 plates. Thus if J4 mcn plates are used, the washers used 
 should be J4 mcn thick. The assembled gap may be 
 suitably mounted by using insulated supports, a sufficient 
 number of pairs being used so that the combined length 
 of the gaps is somewhat less than the length of a single 
 gap, ordinarily used. When large power is used with 
 this gap, it is well to have a small fan blow upon it to 
 dissipate the heat which is generated. 
 
 THEORY AND ADVANTAGES OF THE 
 QUENCHED SPARK. 
 
 The gaps described are not difficult to construct and 
 operate and are recommended to the readers. The dis- 
 charge is practically noiseless, almost 60 per cent more 
 efficient than a common gap, and produces practically 
 undamped waves. A high pitch note, which increases the 
 effective transmission range, is also produced. 
 
 The operation of the quenched gap depends upon 
 the fact that the spark quenches itself out after it has 
 made a few oscillations, allowing the secondary oscilla- 
 tions to continue freely. The primary circuit is thus 
 
154 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 opened so that it does not interfere with the secondary 
 or aerial oscillations. As a result the unwelcome beats 
 common to open spark systems are avoided Returning 
 to the parallel case of a gong, the quenched spark may 
 be compared to a padded hammer, which after striking 
 the gong (comparable to the antenna circuit in this case), 
 a forceful blow, allows it to continue by itself with a 
 clear, powerful vibration. The short spark gap when well 
 cooled prevents the primary from oscillating by itself after 
 the secondary circuit has been excited. That is, the spark 
 is active only long enough to allow the secondary oscilla- 
 tions to reach a maximum, and the secondary oscillations 
 are a maximum after the primary oscillations are reduced 
 to a minimum. The number of primary oscillatipns neces- 
 sary for this ideal operation is governed by the degree of 
 coupling between the primary and secondary. It is de- 
 sirable to use a close degree of coupling with the quenched 
 spark for this reason. The energy ordinarily lost as heat 
 in an ordinary spark gap is thus conserved and the wear 
 on the primary apparatus is reduced. One of the chief 
 causes of heat in the condensers and wear of the gap with 
 an ordinary open gap is the useless continuance of the 
 energy after the useful oscillations have been generated. 
 The quenched gap. then, prevents undesirable oscillations 
 from being set up in the primary by the reaction of the 
 secondary, and makes the resulting radiations have a sin- 
 gle wave length, for receiving purposes. 
 
 In constructing the quenched gap, it is essential that 
 the electrodes be pressed with some force against each 
 other. In the Lepel form of gap described the weight of 
 the upper electrode suffices, but in the form of Arco gap 
 described, a clamp should be provided. A quenched gap 
 in connection with a resonant outfit as described in pre- 
 vious chapters is an ideal set for the experimenter. These 
 
Continuous Waves Advanced Systems. 155 
 
 arrangements are also known as shock excited systems, 
 and are rapidly coming into increased favor 
 
 Note. If mica is not obtainable in the necessary size, 
 rubber sheet of uniform thickness, .01 inch may be used, 
 though the mica is to be preferred. Stove repair compa- 
 nies carry mica in stock as do commutator concerns. The 
 latter use a mica mixture which is much cheaper than 
 mica and which is suitable Smaller dimensions may be 
 used for the electrodes for small stations, and for very 
 small stations one or two sets of plates will suffice. By 
 using soft rubber sheet instead of mica the length of the 
 gaps can be varied by varying the pressure on the plates. 
 Sheets of soft rubber can be had at dental supply houses. 
 The quenched gap is of course used like a regular spark 
 gap in an experimental set. Quenched gaps are made in 
 both stationary and rotary forms, the latter having ad- 
 vantages similar to those of an ordinary rotary gap as 
 well as those of the quenched gap. 
 
 The Goldschmidt high frequency generator is coming into 
 some use for long distance work. Its operation depends upon 
 the fact that an armature mechanically rotated in a rotating 
 magnetic field gives an initial frequency say 10,000 which can 
 be further stepped up by carrying the current back through the 
 field to produce a more rapidly rotating magnetic field; this 
 new frequency current is again led back to still further increase 
 the frequency, and so on until the desired frequency say 
 40,000 is attained. The circuits must of course be nicely bal- 
 anced electrically in order to obtain the necessary resonance, 
 condensers being used for this purpose. To avoid eddy current 
 losses, the armature is constructed of iron foil only .002 inch 
 thick, each sheet being insulated from the next one. Substan- 
 tially undamped waves are emitted by the use of this machine 
 and since the frequency is above audibility, the method of beats 
 is employed to get the intelligence at the receiving station. 
 
 Still another method for producing sustained oscillations has 
 been devised by Galletti. Direct current is used as the primary 
 source and a plurality of oscillatory circuits are automatically 
 excited in succession, a common condenser being coupled to 
 these circuits. An experimental alternator has also been con- 
 structed by the Telefunken Company in which the primary 
 frequency is multiplied by means of a polarised transformer. 
 
CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 THE RECEIVING STATION. 
 
 Having considered the transmitter and its details, the 
 receiving station will now receive attention. The aerial 
 and ground have already been discussed and since they 
 are the same in most cases for both transmitter and re- 
 ceiver, they need no further attention. 
 
 We have seen that the transmitter emits waves of 
 definite lengths and having definite characteristics, accord- 
 
 ing to the adjustment of the transmitter and that these 
 waves spread out in all directions at the speed of light. 
 Now at the receiver, all that is necessary is some appara- 
 tus which will detect the waves which strike the receiving 
 aerial and translate them into an intelligible signal. 
 
 For this reason, the apparatus in its simplest form 
 consists merely of a detector and a telephone receiver 
 connected in the antenna circuit. This is shown in fig. 
 
The Receiving Station. 157 
 
 53. It will be understood that other sensitive recorders 
 such as an Einthoven galvanometer can be used instead 
 of the telephone receiver. The detector, however, is 
 essential, because even the most sensitive telephone re- 
 ceiver or galvanometer cannot record signals without it. 
 
 In early experiments, a relay was used for the record- 
 ing instrument. In its most sensitive form, however, a 
 relay will only operate with about .001 of a volt at its 
 terminals. Further, its action is slow, so that it has been 
 discontinued for signalling purposes. Its use is limited 
 to the field of telemechanics, the art of controlling motors, 
 boats, etc., by wireless through a local relay. Its co- 
 operating detector, the coherer, has also become obsolete 
 except for the purpose mentioned. 
 
 The telephone receiver is the instrument in universal 
 use for wirelecs receivers and is the form to be adopted 
 as a standard for wireless purposes. The receivers for 
 wireless purposes are made different than for ordinary 
 purposes. 
 
 TELEPHONE RECEIVERS FOR WIRELESS 
 RECEIVING. 
 
 Receivers for wireless purposes should be very sen- 
 sitive. It has been found by experiments that the degree 
 of sensitiveness depends largely on the frequency at which 
 the received signals are sent. Thus, messages from a 
 900 cycle transmitter will produce an audible sound in 
 the receiver when only 0.6 millionths of a volt is used, 
 while impulses received from a 60 cycle set will only pro- 
 duce an audible sound when 620 millionths of a volt are 
 used. These figures are according to Dr. Austin, and 
 while they are taken for a particular set of receivers, with 
 the use of a laboratory arrangement, the general relation 
 
158 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 holds good. It is for this reason that the transmitters 
 operating at 500 to 1,000 cycles are more effective than 
 those operating at low frequencies. The sensitiveness of a 
 given receiver, then, depends on the frequency employed 
 to operate it and also on the natural period of vibration 
 of the diaphram. It is for this reason that thin diaphrams 
 are employed in wireless receivers. The detailed require- 
 ments for receivers will receive attention later. 
 
 WHY A DETECTOR IS ESSENTIAL. 
 
 The detector (see fig. 53), is not of itself the most 
 sensitive instrument at the receiving station, but in essen- 
 tial because the telephone receiver, while more sensitive, 
 will not of itself respond to high frequency oscillations 
 such as are received at a wireless station. The reason 
 should be apparent, for the change first in one direction 
 and then in the other, of the oscillations is so rapid that 
 the successive changes neutralize each other and produce 
 no effect in the receiver. To operate on these oscillations 
 a telephone diaphram would have to move with frequency 
 corresponding to approximately one-millionth of a second, 
 which of course it cannot do. Again, we have seen that 
 high frequency oscillations are greatly impeded by large 
 inductance, so that the self inductance of the receiver 
 would of itself prevent any except minute currents from 
 operating it. The detector, then, translates the received 
 oscillations into a current which will operate the receiver. 
 
 The oscillations coming in on the aerial A, fig. 53, are 
 transformed by the detector into currents which operate 
 the receiver. The nature of this transformation, the 
 construction and operation of detectors, and similar mat- 
 ters will receive attention later. 
 
The Receiving Station. 159 
 
 THE RECEIVED SIGNAL. 
 
 The received signal, then, is made up of wave trains 
 which set up an oscillatory current in the receiving sta- 
 tion which corresponds to that sent by the transmitter. 
 When it is remembered that the transmitted energy is 
 sent out in all directions it is remarkable that one point 
 such as a receiving station receives as much energy as 
 it does. According to Mr. Pickard, measurements of the 
 maximum energy received from a high power transmit- 
 ting station 90 miles away, showed this energy to be .03 
 ergs per dot. The "erg" is equivalent to one ten-millionth 
 of a watt. Inasmuch as a sensitive telephone receiver 
 will operate with an audible sound on as little as one- 
 millionth of an erg this leaves a considerable margin 
 for the case at hand In any case, the received energy 
 is many hundred times the actual energy necessary to 
 produce an audible sound in the receiver, but since the 
 receiver will not of itself operate efficiently on the high 
 frequency oscillations, the detector employed limits the 
 efficiency of the receiving station to a large extent. 
 
 Like other transformers, the detector represents a 
 source of loss and although the modern detector is quite 
 sensitive, (see table p. 160), a detector which would 
 be at least as sensitive as a sensitive telephone receiver 
 by itself would be of a great advance in the wireless art. 
 
 Now the simple circuit shown in fig. 53, comprises an 
 untuned receiving set and is of little use without an 
 auxiliary tuning apparatus if messages are to be received 
 from modern transmitters. 
 
 Tuning. In order to receive signals from a trans- 
 mitter, the receiver must be adjusted so that its circuits 
 are in tune or resonance with those of the transmitter. 
 Thus, if the receiver is to receive from a station sending 
 
160 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 TABLE OF DETECTORSSENSITIVENESS. 
 
 Type of Detector. Energy required to operate. 
 
 in ergs, per dot. 
 
 Electrolytic 003640 .000400 * 
 
 .007 
 
 Silicon 000430 .000450 * 
 
 Magnetic hysteresis detector 01 
 
 Hot-wire barretter 0.08 
 
 Carborundum 009000 .014000 * 
 
 * According to Pickard. 
 According to Fessenden. 
 
 out a 300 meter wave it must be adjusted so that its wave 
 length is very nearly 300 meters. However, if the trans- 
 mitter is poorly tuned or very close to the receiver, it 
 is a common occurrence to receive the message without 
 careful tuning, or even without any tuning. (See chap- 
 ter on resonance). The apparatus for tuning a receiver, 
 consists, as at the transmitter, of adjustable circuits con- 
 taining variable capacity and inductance. The whole sub- 
 ject is somewhat complex and will receive individual at- 
 tention later. 
 
 The same receiving set may be used for either wire- 
 less telegraphy or telephony, since the conditions are iden- 
 tical in many respects. Indeed, both telephone and tele- 
 graph messages can be heard at the same time in some 
 localities. Tnis last is a special case of interference. 
 
 The requisites for the receiver then are : 
 
 1. Sensitive detector. 
 
 2. Sensitive telephone receiver or recorder. 
 
 3. Accurate auxiliary adjustable circuits for tuning. 
 
 4. A good aerial and ground, as for the transmitter. 
 The several items will receive attention presently, in 
 
 some detail. 
 
CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 DETECTORS SOLID RECTIFIERS. 
 
 Quite a number of different types of detectors have 
 been discovered and developed and there are many forms 
 for these. For the purpose of standardization, however, 
 the types known as crystal or solid rectifiers are best 
 adopted because of their sensitiveness, low cost, easy 
 adjustment, portability and durability. Other forms which 
 may be used are coherers, loose contacts, (almost any 
 loose contact, as between a piece of carbon and a needle,, 
 being suitable), magnetic detectors, barretters or thermal 
 detectors, electrolytic detectors, gaseous detectors, and 
 vacuum detectors. Indeed, one might easily devote an 
 entire book to a consideration of all types of detectors and 
 their several details. Such a duplication seems unneces- 
 sary, however, since solid rectifiers can be used to as good 
 advantage as the other types for all experimental pur- 
 poses, whether for long or short distance receiving. 
 
 Solid rectifiers consist essentially of certain metallic 
 compounds, such as oxides and sulphides, which have the 
 property of rectif ring the high frequency oscillations. 
 That is, these metallic compounds when connected in a 
 circuit, conduct the current better in one direction than 
 in the other. This unilateral effect is quite marked, so 
 that the detector acts as a valve, allowing the current 
 to pass in one direction but practically preventing the 
 oscillation from completion by preventing the current 
 from passing in the reverse direction. In addition to this 
 
162 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 property it is necessary to have this rectifying effect car- 
 ried on regularly so that the oscillations are rectified into 
 a pulsating one way or direct current. The latter then 
 serves to operate the telephone or other recorder. The 
 metallic compounds used have this property also, so that 
 a circuit which includes a solid rectifier is a good detector 
 for the wireless receiving circuit. It is interesting to 
 note that while a part of this phenomena was noticed as 
 early as 1874, these metallic compounds were not under- 
 stood and used as detectors until about 1906. A partial 
 list of the elements and compounds which may be used 
 for this purpose are : 
 
 Mineral Name. 
 
 Carborundum 
 
 Fused Silicon 
 
 Iron Pyrites 
 
 Copper Pyrites 
 
 Chalcopyrites 
 
 Hessite 
 
 Zincite 
 
 Octahedrite 
 
 Stibnite 
 
 Galena 
 
 Molybdenite 
 
 Zirconium 
 
 Niccolite 
 
 Domeykite 
 
 Sphalerite 
 
 Pyrrholite 
 
 Corundum 
 
 Hematite 
 
 Cassiterite 
 
 Siderite 
 
 Malachite 
 
 Cerusite 
 
 Chemical Name. 
 
 Silicon Carbide 
 
 Silicon 
 
 Iron Sulphides 
 
 Copper Sulphide 
 
 Copper Iron Sulphide 
 
 Telluride of Silver and Gold 
 
 Zinc Oxide 
 
 Oxide of Titanum 
 
 Antimony Sulphide 
 
 Lead Sulphide 
 
 Molybdenum Sulphide 
 
 Zirconium 
 
 Nickel Arsenide 
 
 Copper Arsenide 
 
 Sulphide of Zinc 
 
 Iron Sulphide 
 
 Oxide of Aluminum and Iron 
 
 Iron Oxide 
 
 Oxide of Tin 
 
 Iron Carbonate 
 
 Copper Carbonate 
 
 Lead Carbonate 
 
 With the exception of Carborundum these may all be 
 used without a battery with good results. When two 
 
Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 163 
 
 different crystals are used together to form a pcricon 
 detector, the use of a battery is optional. 
 
 In use, a small piece of the compound which will 
 be hereafter called a crystal for convenience, is mounted 
 between two metallic contacts. The exact nature of these 
 contacts depends upon the particular crystal employed, 
 and in nearly every case, it is desirable to make the con- 
 tacts adjustable, so that the most sensitive part of the 
 crystal can be used with the contacts at the most sensi- 
 tive pressure. In practically every case it is desirable to 
 make one of the terminals or contacts with a large area 
 so that it makes very good contact with the crystal. This 
 is to prevent the other contact from forming an opposing 
 and undesirable second rectifier, which would greatly 
 reduce the effect of the former. The crystal then, is 
 mounted between a large and a small contact, to form 
 an ordinary detector. Silicon, while a non-metallic ele- 
 ment, is perhaps one of the most widely used solid recti- 
 fiers. The iron pyrites or pyron detector, the galena or 
 lead sulphide detector, and the molybdenite detector, in 
 the order named, are the other single crystal rectifiers 
 in most general use and favor. Each has certain advan- 
 tages and disadvantages and the various factors which 
 determine the utility of a detector are so variable that 
 direct comparison without exact comparative tests is not 
 possible. In order to secure the necessary large contact 
 for these detectors, the crystal is imbedded in a cup 
 with a fusible alloy such as Woods, metal, (see construc- 
 tional details), while the small point consist of a rounded 
 adjustable point of brass, gold, platinum, or else a wire 
 of these metals. When two or more of these crystals, 
 one of which is preferably zincite, are used, this small 
 metallic point is replaced by a fragment from another 
 crystal. A small piece of chalco-pyrite is generally used 
 
164 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 for this purpose. This pericon detector is perhaps one 
 of the best at present known as far as sensitiveness, 
 portability, and durability are concerned. Small metal 
 points are most suitable for polished crystals such as iron 
 pyrites and galena. These two detectors are particularly 
 free from injury from mechanical shocks or foreign elec- 
 trical impulses. 
 
 For experimental purposes it is well to provide what 
 is known as a universal detector stand so that any or all 
 of the materials as well as new ones as yet undiscovered 
 may be tried. There are plenty of un found materials 
 which may be much better than those now in use and a 
 search for some of these would furnish enough excite- 
 ment for the average experimenter for some little time. 
 It is well to remark, however, that a mere duplication 
 of detectors no better than those already in use will not 
 be of much importance or use. What is wanted is some- 
 thing better, more sensitive, having less resistance, and 
 which is more reliable and permanent. 
 
 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS. 
 
 There are a great variety of constructions for solid 
 rectifying detectors, almost every experimenter making a 
 different kind or different form. Provided that the fol- 
 lowing general requirements are adhered to, the matter 
 of size, adjustment (mechanical movement used), and 
 form is of little consequence. The reader has unlimited 
 latitude and opportunity to exercise his ingenuity. A 
 few accepted forms which are similar to those in general 
 use and favor will also be given. 
 
 MATERIALS. 
 
 The crystals in general use can be had from supply 
 houses. Whenever possible tested crystals should be 
 
Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 
 
 165 
 
 purchased, as this saves considerable time and trouble. 
 For instance, it may happen that only a dozen or so suit- 
 able points will be obtained after trying out a pound of 
 material, broken up into points. The silicon used should 
 be fused silicon, the carborundum preferably green car- 
 borundum, and all of the others in the best grade obtain- 
 able. Cheap grades generally contain considerable for- 
 eign matter which is of course not desirable. Owing 
 to the fact that the most commonly used crystals are 
 mentioned in the claims of patents held practically by 
 one holding company, many dealers in minerals and crys- 
 tals are afraid to sell them for fear of infringement 
 
 PE. 
 
 suits. (See chapter 19 on the experimenter's rights). 
 The various cups, brass, screws, and other materials 
 can also be had from supply houses. 
 
 Crystal mounting. Fig. 54 shows some suitable mount- 
 ings for the crystals to form the large contact necessary. 
 Two spring pieces fastened to a block of wood as at 
 (a) will do. Perhaps the best mounting is that shown 
 in the figure at (b), where the crystal is held in a cup 
 containing a fusible alloy. This may be made by melt- 
 ing four parts of bismuth, one part of cadmium, two 
 parts of lead, and one part of tin together ; or three parts 
 of a good grade of solder instead of the lead and tin, 
 
166 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 may be used. The melting point of this alloy is approxi- 
 mately 138 degrees F, and this mixture is used so that 
 the resulting heat will not injure the crystal as ordinary 
 solder would. The cup should be well cleaned before 
 pouring the alloy in, and around the crystal. The metal 
 is preferably poured into the cup and thtn the crystal 
 is placed into the metal, and held in place until the alloy 
 cools. A substitute for this method is to pack the crystal 
 in the cup with tinfoil wads. This allows the crystal 
 to be removed so that the sensitive part can be found. 
 The cap from a round dry battery carbon can be used 
 for a cup if it is well cleaned and polished. The tinfoil 
 can be packed in so tight that the crystal will not fall 
 out, and if the exposed part is found not to be sensitive, 
 the crystal can be removed, turned over, and tried again, 
 until a sensitive part is found. Many similar arrange- 
 ments will suggest themselves to the reader. Almost any 
 form of spring, clamp, or other contact which will make 
 a large contact and hold the crystal in place is suitable. 
 Use the crystal as follows. 
 
 The crystal used should be a small fragment as it 
 will then work as well or better than a large piece. It 
 should not be ground and should be left in its natural 
 shape. Most of the materials are best used as small 
 chunks. Molybdenite is best used as a thin sheet. The 
 molybdenite may be easily copper plated so that connected 
 wires can be directly soldered to it. When a pericon set 
 is used, the zincite should have a larger surface than 
 the other crystal. The latter may be a fragment of bornite 
 or chalcopyrite, preferably with a definite point for con- 
 tact. , 
 
 In making a universal detector, it should be remem- 
 bered that three types of contacts will be needed to in- 
 clude suitable contacts for all materials. Crystals like 
 
Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 
 
 167 
 
 silicon work best with a blunt point and light contact, 
 molybdenite with a blunt point and comparatively heavy 
 contact, those like galena and iron pyrites require a fine 
 light point, and those like carborundum require two large 
 contacts with a comparatively large pressure. An ar- 
 
 FIG. 55. 
 
 FIG.5B. 
 
 FIE. 57. 
 
 rangement which will provide for these variable condi- 
 tions is, therefore, desirable. Some suitable mechanical 
 arrangements are shown in figs. 55 62. In the clamp 
 type, the crystal can be removed and another one replaced, 
 
168 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 while in the multi-crystal type the several crystals are 
 mounted so that any one may be used at a time. Where 
 compactness is no object it is perhaps a better plan to 
 have a plurality of separate detector stands for each crys- 
 tal. A duplicate detector is also desirable, so that when 
 one crystal becames poorly adjusted, another sensitive de- 
 tector can be immediately switched into circuit. 
 
 Referring to the figures, which were collected from 
 various sources, figs 55, 56 and 57 show suitable con- 
 structions for a simple universal detector and require no 
 further comment.* In fig. 57, A represents an insulated 
 
 FIC.5S. 
 
 thumbscrew, B a brass spring strip, C a metal standard 
 of round or square brass, D. F. G. contacts which may 
 be used for a variety of materials, H a base, I a brass 
 strap, and J a notched cup. 
 
 Fig. 58 shows another universal detector. The shaft 
 A slides into a ball B, which is in turn held by the str.DS 
 Al with a pressure adjustable by F. The spring S keeps 
 A in position. C is a simple screw chuck holding another 
 
 *Pop. Electricity. Modern Electrics. U. S. Pat. Speci- 
 fication. 
 
Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 
 
 169 
 
 chuck D in which a point is in turn held. Difficult shaped 
 points may be used in this manner. The crystal is held 
 adjustably in a clamp A2. The arrangement is quite 
 simple and allows almost any desired adjustment and 
 use. 
 
 The multi-cup arrangement of fig. 59 is taken from 
 patent No. 1, 027,238, U. S., and is quite simple. The 
 post C can be turned so that the contact G. makes con- 
 
 FIE. 53. 
 
 FIG. ED. 
 
 FIC.G. 
 
 tact with any one of the cups arranged as a circle on the 
 base. The contact G can be reversed so that the detector 
 can be used as an electrolytic detector with one of the 
 cups K. The spring I provides a mild, variable pressure, 
 and the rough adjustment is made by the screw F clamp- 
 ing E to C after the proper length has been found. Fig. 
 60 shows a simple arrangement suitable for galena, iron 
 pyrites and silicon, and needs no further comment. 
 
170 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Fig. 61 shows a delicate adjustment suitable for the 
 small movable point of a universal detector. Fig. 62 
 shows a novel scheme for adjusting the pressure of the 
 small point on the crystal. The piece B is mounted on a 
 pivot so that it balances nicely. The pressure on ths 
 small contact can then be varied by screwing the nut 
 A in or out, thus securing more or less weight on the 
 fine point. 
 
 These forms are only reproduced as suggestions as 
 the reader can easily make a detector according to his 
 own design. Pericon crystals may be similarly mounted, 
 the extra crystal replacing the fine point. 
 
 CARE AND ADJUSTMENT. 
 
 Detectors should be regarded as sensitive and deli- 
 cate instruments. They should be kept out of the sunlight, 
 away from dust and dirt, acid fumes, and similar places. 
 
 The crystals become less sensitive after a time, but 
 can often be renewed by cleaning with gasoline or carbon 
 bisulphide, using an old tooth brush and taking great 
 care to avoid a fire or even a burning light, because both 
 materials and particularly the bisulphide are very explo- 
 sive. Heat alone if applied rationally will often restore 
 an old crystal to sensitiveness again. 
 
 The actual adjustment is a matter which must be 
 determined by experiment. A buzzer test is very valu- 
 able for this purpose and should be a part of every wire- 
 less receiving set. This is simply a common buzzer, such 
 as may be had for about 25 cents, connected to a key 
 and battery and to a short aerial wire as shown in fig 
 63. The wire need only be a few feet of number 18 bell 
 wire. The connections can be arranged on the aerial 
 switch so that when the switch is set for receiving, 
 
Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 
 
 171 
 
 the transmitting key will operate the buzzer instead of 
 the transformer. The noise of the buzzer should be 
 deadened by covering it with old clothes or else by plac- 
 ing the buzzer outside of the building, since it is not de- 
 sirable to hear the buzzing sound. This buzzer sets up 
 weak wireless waves and the detector is in adjustment 
 when the said waves are received and heard the loudest. 
 Adjustment of the detector may also be carried out while 
 
 e 
 
 02 
 
 |l 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 D 
 
 ijLJ Short Wire. 
 B.lttr* 
 
 f"* 
 
 
 -ik 
 
 PE. 
 
 \ 
 
 * 
 
 hey 
 
 FIG.G3. 
 
 receiving from another station, provided that the copy- 
 ing of the message is of secondary importance while the 
 adjustment is being carried out. The turning on and off 
 of an electric light socket can also be used as a buzzer 
 test, the resulting arc supplying the necessary waves. 
 While we are on this subject it may be noted that a 
 lamp on a lighting circuit near the transmitting station 
 can be made to light up when the station is sending. 
 Turn the lamp on and then unscrew the bulb until it 
 just goes out. The transmitter will then cause it to light, 
 when the key is pressed. This experiment illustrates 
 the coherer principle to a certain extent and will only 
 work when the light is in close proximity to the trans- 
 mitter. 
 
CHAPTER XF. 
 
 TELEPHONE RECEIVERS. DETECTORS FOR 
 
 CONTINUOUS WAVES. EINTHOVEN 
 
 GALVANOMETER. 
 
 In order to receive from a continuous wave transmit- 
 ter such as a telegraph transmitter operated by an arc 
 generator or quenched arc generator, which is not audibly 
 altered at the transmitter, it is necessary to modify the 
 received impulses audibly at the receiver. The human ear 
 can only hear or recognize vibrations whi^h do not ex- 
 ceed 35,000 or 40,000 per second, so that the waves sent 
 out from an arc generator vibrating at many times this 
 rate are inaudible. The only form of indicator which 
 will efficiently record such inaudible waves without modi- 
 fying them at the receiver by a vibrator or chopper is the 
 Einthoven galvanometer, as far as the author is aware. 
 While this is a delicate instrument, a brief account of 
 it will be given so that it may be constructed by skilled 
 workers. 
 
 EINTHOVEN GALVANOMETER. 
 
 This instrument consists essentially of a fine wire 
 stretched between the pole pieces of a powerful electro- 
 magnet. This wire may be of platinum, silver, aluminum, 
 or copper, and should be very fine. No. 40 or 50 such as 
 is used for telephone receivers can be used. The con- 
 struction and arrangement is shown in fig. 64. In the 
 
Sensitive Indicators for Receiver. 
 
 173 
 
 most sensitive forms, a thin quartz or glass fibre which 
 has been platinized is used and if this can be had from 
 a supply house, the reader is advised to purchase it. The 
 fine wire is mounted on T shaped set screws C and F, 
 so that the tension can be delicately adjusted. As shown, 
 this is accomplished by having C attached to a rod having 
 a cam K on its upper end and held in place by a spring 
 L. When the lever Kl presses down on the rod, a very 
 
 FIG.E4-. 
 
 fine adjustment is secured. Kl is operated by a micro- 
 meter screw J, as shown. A more simple arrangement 
 would also do, but the adjustment would then be less 
 accurate, and more difficult to carry out. 
 
 The smaller part of the figure shows the position of 
 the wire and magnets and one method for observing the 
 displacement of the wire. The eye piece AE is inserted 
 
174 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 in a hole in one of the magnet poles.* Light is pro- 
 jected by the tube C and lens F. When the current flows 
 in the direction of the arrows, the wire stretched between 
 CC has a deflection indicated by the arrow a. This dis- 
 placement can be magnified by projection upon a screen, 
 in which case the eye piece is removed and a strong 
 light applied at C. This recorder is very sensitive and 
 can be used for long distance work as well as for ex- 
 perimental measurements. The amount of deflection in- 
 dicates the strength of the received signal. In practice, 
 a photographic record is taken by means of a moving film, 
 so that a permanent record of the message as a defined 
 line according to the dots and dashes, is the result. The 
 experimenter may dispense with the photographic record, 
 however. The skilled reader should not find it difficult 
 to make a duplicate from this brief description. The 
 magnet used should consume about 250 to 500 watts, and 
 it is not unlikely that ready wound magnet coils can be 
 pressed into service for experimental purposes. The suc- 
 cess of the instrument depends on the fact that the fine 
 wire has a rapid period. The instrument will not be of 
 any use, however, unless delicately constructed. 
 
 In order to receive unaltered continuous waves with 
 an ordinary wireless telephone head receiver, the received 
 impulses must be modified, interrupted or chopped. This 
 can be done by the arrangement of fig. 65, in which the 
 relay shown is a 20 ohm or 75 ohm telegraph relay, hav- 
 ing its magnet connected to an alternating current line 
 through a lamp. The secondary platinum terminals are 
 used to alternately connect and disconnect a large fixed 
 condenser in the receiving circuit as shown, thus balancing 
 and unbalancing the circuit at an audible frequency so 
 
 * Old microscope parts can be used. 
 
Sensitive Indicators for Receiver. 
 
 175 
 
 that the received signals are rendered audible. Thh ar- 
 rangement also effectually cuts out a great deal of other 
 interference. When ordinary stations are to be heard the 
 relay is merely disconnected from the line. The re- 
 mainder of the circuit is familiar or will soon be and 
 needs no further comment. The relay acts as an inter- 
 rupter and may be used to throw either capacity or in- 
 ductance or both in and out of the circuit. The insert 
 shows a simple method for the same purpose. In this 
 case a single condenser is used in shunt about the tele- 
 
 phone receivers. The remainder of the circuit is not 
 shown as it is the same as before. 
 
 Either the Einthoven galvanometer or this chopper 
 arrangement will be satisfactory to detect the continuous 
 waves. With this arrangement, experimenters may re- 
 ceive from the Poulsen stations provided that the cir- 
 cuits are properly tuned. In connection with the ap- 
 paratus described in chapter 12 for telegraphy without 
 modifying the continuous waves at an audible frequency 
 at the transmitter, this form of detector forms an ideal 
 one for the experimenter. A somewhat similar arrange- 
 ment is sometimes incorporated directly in the detector, 
 but since it is less efficient, it will not be described here. 
 
176 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The continuous wave system with a chopper at the re- 
 ceiving station is perhaps the most advanced system in 
 the art at the present writing, and without a chopper, 
 using the galvanometer, the messages can be permanently 
 recorded as fast as they are sent. Sharper tuning is 
 also possible and good transmission is possible on ac- 
 count of the accumulative effect at the receiving station. 
 
 If carefully constructed the galvanometer described 
 will respond to a sufficient extent when operated by only 
 .0001 volt. 
 
 TELEPHONE RECEIVERS. 
 
 Ordinary telephone receivers may be used as recorders 
 for experimental work over short distances, but specially 
 constructed wireless receivers are necessary when long 
 distance work is to be done. The receivers in general 
 use are of the watch case type and either one or two 
 receivers on a headband may be used. Since most people 
 are able to hear much better with one ear than the other, 
 it is an advantage to use only one receiver on the head- 
 band and to block off the other ear from foreign sounds 
 by a rubber pad. This method is less expensive than 
 when two receivers are used on a headband. However, 
 if two receivers are used they must be identical in their 
 dimensions and windings as otherwise the one having the 
 least resistance or other unequal dimension will not work 
 in accordance with the other one. Many manufacturers 
 are now making reliable light weight receivers suitable for 
 the most exacting wireless work, and while the latter are 
 perhaps a little expensive, they are essential to efficient 
 work, particularly over long distances. The reason why 
 a low resistance telephone receiver such as is used for 
 telephone work is not suited for delicate wireless work 
 
Sensitive Indicators for Receiver. 177 
 
 is that it is made to give a loud response with a com 
 paratively large amount of applied energy but will not 
 give any response with very minute currents, such as are 
 produced by a detector receiving from a distant statior. 
 An ordinary receiver can be rewound, however, with 
 No. 40 or 50 enameled wire so that its utility will be 
 much greater. When this is done a new and thinner 
 diaphram should also be supplied, since the ordinary 
 diaphram is too thick for wireless purposes. These thin 
 diaphrams may be had at supply houses and are known 
 as gold diaphrams because they are gold plated. A wire- 
 less receiver is not intended to give a loud response, but 
 rather to give an audible and working response with very 
 feeble currents. The resistance, however, is not the 
 real delicate part of the receiver, and the mere state- 
 ment that a receiver is wound to 1,500 ohms means 
 little or nothing. What is desired is a large number cf 
 ampere turns, and since this is best secured by usin? 
 fine copper wire, No. 38 or 40 is generally employed. 
 Receivers are rated according to their resistance largel/ 
 because this is a convenient measure, but as far as work- 
 ability is concerned, the number of ampere turns is the 
 essential factor which determines the actual utility. In 
 any case, a resistance of over 1,500 ohms is no advar- 
 tage, and a resistance of less than 800 ohms is net 
 desirable when the receivers are to be used with solid 
 rectifying detectors. 
 
 CARE AND ADJUSTMENT. 
 
 While a receiver seldom requires attention after it 
 has been adjusted, it should be kept clean, and free from 
 dust and moisture. When rewound receivers are used 
 it is sometimes necessary to adjust the distance of the 
 
178 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 diaphram from the poles. This can be done by using 
 a soft rubber cushion between the cap and the receiver 
 case, and screwing the cap on with more or less pressure, 
 thus adjusting the distance between the diaphram and 
 the receiver's magnet pole. After long use, the perma- 
 nent magnets should be tested and if the magnetic at- 
 traction is weak, the magnet should be strengthenei by 
 remagnetization. A common test is to judge by the dis- 
 tance between the receiver case and diaphram, which is 
 necessary just before the diaphram (previously removed 
 and laid on a table), is attracted to it. 
 
 Receivers are seldom burnt out. This may be th<* 
 case after a station has been subjected to a heavy static 
 or lightning discharge. The headband used should be 
 comfortable and should keep the receiver tight against 
 the ear. The receiver is very important and its sensi- 
 tiveness together with the hearing ability of the operator 
 is one of the largest factors which determine the receiving 
 range of a station. 
 
 A word concerning standard receivers for wireless 
 purposes. The magnets should be permanent and prefer- 
 ably of the consequent pole type, to prevent leakage about 
 the pole pieces. The diaphram should be thin and uni- 
 form, but of sufficient thickness to absorb sufficient mag- 
 netic flux. The poles, case, and diaphram should be pro- 
 portioned and made so that the maximum sensitiveness 
 and least liability to injury and change is the result. 
 Lightness and a good fit are important items as far as 
 comfort is concerned, and if the receivers are to be used 
 continually, this is a very important consideration. A 
 suitable size for the wire used in the coils is No. 40 or 
 wire .0031 thick. A standard thickness for the diaphram 
 is .004 thick exclusive of the plate or varnish coat, which 
 last is to prevent rust and corrosion. 
 
Sensitive Indicators for Receiver. 179 
 
 HOW THE RECEIVER OPERATES. 
 
 It is well known to the readers that the telephone 
 receiver depends upon simple magnetic phenomena, so 
 an account of the action will be dispensed with. How- 
 ever, it is well to understand the action in a wireless 
 receiving set. 
 
 We have seen that the detector rectifies the oscilla- 
 tory current into a pulsating direct current. Now, this 
 direct current passes through the windings of the re- 
 ceiver and causes the diaphram to be pulled according 
 to the strength and changes in the current. While the 
 current supplied to the telephone may have as much 
 as a million pulsations in one second, the ear only hears 
 a sound similar to that produced by a steady current 
 on account of the regulation exerted by the inductance 
 of the windings of the receiver. That is, each complete 
 wave train after being rectified by the detector causes 
 only one pull on the diaphram, so that the operator hears 
 one sound corresponding to each transmitted wave train. 
 However, a complete signal, even a dot, generally com- 
 prises several successive wave trains so that the received 
 signal is heard as a succession of clicks corresponding 
 to the spark rate and speed at which the message is sent. 
 The receiver gets the message almost the same moment 
 that it is sent, since the waves travel at the rate of 186,000 
 miles per second, and the frequency tone, wave length 
 and other variable factors are practically the same as 
 when the impulses leave the transmitting aerial. 
 
180 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 MEASURING THE INTENSITY OF THE 
 SIGNAL.* 
 
 For experimental work it is often desirable to com- 
 pare the relai'.ve strengths of the signals received either 
 from two stat ; ons or from the same station using differ- 
 ent instruments or circuits. A suitable simple arrange- 
 ment for this purpose is shown in figure 66, and consists 
 simply of a calibrated shunt resistance about the phones. 
 A non-inductive resistance box is suitable. The value 
 of the received current in the telephone receiver is prac- 
 tically proportional to the energy of the incoming waves 
 so that a roue'li table of values based on audibility is easily 
 
 G. 
 
 made. Thus a station which produces a sound just aud- 
 ible in the receivers when all the resistance is in circuit 
 may be taken a c a standard. If another station just pro- 
 duces an audible sound when one-half of the total resis- 
 tance is in circuit; the new value can be compared with the 
 standard. The calibration could just as well be the other 
 way around so that the standard is audibility with no 
 shunt resistance. The result is best expressed as a frac- 
 tion of or so many times audibility, as the case may be. 
 
 * This method can also be used to eliminate interfer- 
 ence from weak stations, but is carried out at the expense 
 of a decrease in the intensity of the received signal. It 
 can, however, be utilized in connection with a wave 
 meter. 
 
CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 TUNING INTERFERENCE PREVENTION. 
 
 If the reader will bear in mind the discussions given 
 for resonant circuits at the transmitting station, the re- 
 quirements for tuning at the receiving station will not 
 be difficult to understand. The two circuits are in fact 
 quite similar in some respects. The detector corresponds 
 to the spark gap and as the transmitter, this detector 
 constitutes one of the greatest factors of resistance in 
 the circuit. As in the case of the spark gap this resist- 
 ance damps the oscillations and makes sharp tuning diffi- 
 cult. The resistance of the detector, then, prevents ab- 
 solute tuning. As far as the rest of the apparatus and 
 circuits are concerned, absolute tuning can be very nearly 
 reached if desired. Now, the tuning apparatus and cir- 
 cuit to employ -for experimental purposes will vary with 
 the local conditions. In cities like New York, where 
 the interference is considerable, very sharp tuning is de- 
 sirable at both the transmitter and receiver, while in lo- 
 calities where there are only a few scattered stations, 
 simple circuits with rough tuning will suffice, so that the 
 intensity of the signal is about all that needs attention. 
 In most of the present tuning methods, fine tuning is 
 carried out at the expense of the intensity of the received 
 signal, but for practical purposes all that is needed is a 
 distinct audible signal. Close tuning has one disadvantage 
 in that a message can easily be missed if the apparatus 
 
182 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 is at the wrong adjustment. In arranging a receiving 
 set it is well to bear in mind the use to which the appa- 
 ratus is to be put and to provide for the design accor- 
 dingly. An ideal set, in the author's opinion, is one which 
 provides two standby points and a variable close tuning 
 or interference arrangement. One of the standby adjust- 
 ments is for the standard 200 meter experimental wave 
 length and the other standby adjustment is for the stand- 
 ard 300 meter commercial wave length. After the mess- 
 age has started, any interference which may arise or be 
 in progress can then be tuned out or dissipated by the 
 sharp tuning adjustments. There are several arrange- 
 ments which will give this ideal outfit and the several 
 parts will be described in some detail later. For the 
 present, a close attention to the theory and design is of 
 the first importance. 
 
 In localities where there is little or no interference, 
 elaborate receiving apparatus is not necessary or even 
 desirable. Aside from the extra expense, the compli- 
 cated receiving circuits involve greater skill and require 
 more experience to operate. Experimenters should spend 
 much more time in tuning the transmitter than in tuning 
 the receiver, in most cases, as the former is really more 
 important and instructive. The item of interference will 
 be taken up first. 
 
 INTERFERENCE. 
 
 If there was no interference in wireless work, all that 
 would be necessary at the receiving station is a simple 
 inductance with which to alter the receiving wave length 
 so that the receiver can be brought into resonance with 
 the transmitter. As it happens, however, the average 
 station must be designed to work through both natural 
 
Tuning Interference Prevention. 183 
 
 and artificial interferences. It may be explained that the 
 term "interference" includes all foreign disturbances 
 which impede or interfere with the regular reception of 
 a desired message. 
 
 NATURAL INTERFERENCE. 
 
 Mechanical vibrations, waves received from street arc 
 lights, induction from power and telephone lines, static 
 and similar disturbances are natural causes of inter- 
 ference and can be overcome in nearly every case by the 
 use of proper shunt circuits. A looped aerial is best to 
 adopt when these disturbances are particularly marked. 
 With the exception of strong static disturbances, these 
 natural disturbances can be controlled and either dissi- 
 pated or neutralized. Ordinary static disturbances result 
 from the discharge of static electricity which accumulates 
 on the aerial. This form of disturbance is particularly 
 marked during the summer months and is very annoying. 
 It can only be dissipated when not too strong and then, 
 at the expense of the loss of intensity of the received 
 signal. During electrical storms receiving becomes quite 
 dangerous and impracticable. Experimenters are advised 
 to abandon the use of the aerial during local electrical 
 storms. Although the use of short aerials of low height 
 does not ordinarily mean a liability to much danger, it 
 is well to be on the safe side. Mechanical vibrations 
 can be taken up by using cloth or rubber pads on the 
 instruments. 
 
 ARTIFICIAL INTERFERENCE. 
 
 This is the form of interference resulting from reg- 
 ular wireless communication between several stations 
 within the range of each other. The manner of over- 
 
184 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 coming this to a large extent, by the use of resonant 
 transmitters having definite wave lengths, has already 
 been pointed out in detail. If every station (this means 
 both commercial and experimental) would use just 
 enough power to transmit to the desired station, sharply 
 tuned resonant circuits, a definite wave length and "wire- 
 less sense," the difficulty of the problem, even with simple 
 instruments of the present design, would be much re- 
 duced. In its average or worst form, artificial interfer- 
 ence means working through from four to a dozen or 
 more other stations, simultaneously sending at approxi- 
 mately the same band of wave lengths and same intensity. 
 The operator who receives, however, cannot regulate the 
 coupling or adjustments of the several transmitting sta- 
 tions and must accept conditions as they exist. The sev- 
 eral items must be successfully met and the interference 
 dissipated without losing the desired message. While this 
 is not always possible, it can generally be approximated. 
 The worst item to overcome is the matter of forced waves, 
 or those which seems to come in at every wave length on 
 account of the proximity and heavy coupling of the trans- 
 mitter. When the interference prevention methods to be 
 described are employed, these forced wave disturbances 
 can be practically eliminated in nearly every case. While 
 the use of limited or restricted waves will prevent inter- 
 ference between commercial and experimental stations, 
 the experimenters must still fight it out among themselves. 
 In some respects the difficulty will be even more marked 
 since short wave lengths are less immune from inter- 
 ference than the long wave lengths. However, the ex- 
 perimenter may receive from any and every station within 
 range without difficulty, if the simple relations of a tuned 
 receiving set are understood. 
 
Tuning Interference Prevention. 185 
 
 TUNING METHODS. 
 
 It must be remembered that the ordinary station emits 
 at least two defined wave lengths. The sharper the two 
 are defined, the better as far as the receiving operator 
 is concerned.* With quenched spark or arc stations 
 sharply tuned, practically a single sharp wave length is 
 all that needs to be considered, but interference from 
 other stations operating at the same wave length often 
 complicates the matter. It may be stated right now that 
 the number of possible connections for the receiving cir- 
 cuit is practically unlimited, but that many so called hook- 
 ups are a mere duplication or fresh dressed forms for old 
 circuits and really accomplish nothing. In building and 
 arranging the apparatus for the receiving circuit, the 
 actual factors concerned and the remedies should receive 
 attention rather than a hit and miss elaboration of the 
 circuits without conforming to the requirements. Bear- 
 ing in mind that tuning the receiver means nothing more 
 or less than altering the circuits by adjusting the amount 
 of capacity and inductance used, (resistance is also a 
 factor), the following summary will aid in designing a 
 receiver. 
 
 FACTORS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR TUNING 
 THE RECEIVER. 
 
 1. Close coupling at the receiver should be used when 
 the transmitter is close coupled and vice versa. 
 
 2. With the receiver tuned to the desired transmitter, 
 a large amount of the disturbance can be eliminated by 
 reducing the coupling, until the strength of the signals 
 is just distinct. 
 
 3. A shunt resistance as described in chapter 15 may 
 be used as a substitute for or in addition to method 2. 
 
 * See diagrams in Chapter 4. 
 
186 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 4. The two wave lengths sent by a transmitter being 
 designated as short and long, tuning for either the long or 
 the short wave (Detuning) to an extreme degree is often 
 a marked advantage. Since the short wave is generally 
 the least desirable, the aerial, circuit of the receiver is 
 best thrown out of tune on the short wave side as much 
 as is possible. 
 
 5. When the desired message comes in quite loud, 
 the insertion of some resistance directly in the aerial cir- 
 cuit will often cut out disturbances, but at the expense of 
 the intensity of the signal. 
 
 6. -In tuning, remember, that an inductance in series 
 with the aerial or a capacity in shunt with a series in- 
 ductance in the aerial circuit, increases the receiving wave 
 length. A series capacity in the aerial circuit on the 
 other hand, decreases the receiving wave length. 
 
 7. A closed or looped aerial will eliminate most of 
 the natural disturbances. 
 
 8. The disturbing impulses can be made to oppose 
 and neutralize each other, while the desired signal, (at 
 a reduced intensity), is received. (Differential method). 
 (Bridge method). This is a very desirable method, and 
 if the waves are in a sufficiently long train, it is possible 
 to discriminate between them and undesired impulses. 
 If the undesired impulses are more rapidly damped than 
 the desired impulses they can be avoided, even when they 
 are of the same period as the desired waves, under favor- 
 able conditions. 
 
 We shall now discuss approved circuits embodying 
 the above principles, starting with the more simple ones. 
 As has already been stated these may be varied almost 
 at will, the essential forms being given wherever prac- 
 ticable. While a brief outline of the operation will be 
 given, a close study of the diagrams will be necessary in 
 
Tuning Interference Prevention. 
 
 187 
 
 at least part of the cases. The numbers which follow 
 do not correspond with the numbers for the foregoing 
 
 M#4l 
 
 -J 
 
 PI 
 
 N 
 
 ME2irE 
 
 ^c j rrrnfifs w ^j 
 
 ^P/f*= 
 
 L Lli 
 
 summary. 
 
 1. Fig. 67. Simple tuned circuit with wave length 
 
188 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 varied by adding more or less inductance to the antenna. 
 The particular inductance indicated is known as a single 
 slide tuner. The condenser in shunt about the detector 
 increases the intensity of the received signal. While 
 desirable, it may be dispensed with for short distance 
 receiving. The coupling is fixed in this arrangement and 
 while it is useful to bring a station to approximate reso- 
 nance with the transmitter, close tuning or prevention 
 of interference is not possible. In this and other dia- 
 grams the letter A denotes the aerial, G the ground, D 
 the detector, C a fixed condenser, and T the receivers. 
 L. represents the inductance. 
 
 2. Fig. 68. Same as before, except that a shunt 
 variable condenser VC is provided. An increase of ca- 
 pacity of VC increases the wave length. 
 
 3. Fig. 69. Double slide tuner. Coupling of the 
 circuit can be changed, but must be relatively close. De- 
 sirable where little interference is met with. 
 
 4. Fig. 70. Three slide tuner. Same as before, ex- 
 cept that the coupling of the aerial and detector circuit 
 can be varied to a larger extent. The position of the 
 two circuits can be varied. Thus with the sliders in- 
 cluding the detector circuit remaining a uniform distance 
 apart, they can both be shifted up or down the turns of 
 wire, while the ground slider remains fixed or also be- 
 comes changed. The relative positions of the aerial and 
 detector circuits can thus be changed. The desired ad- 
 justment can only be found by trial and when once found 
 should be noted before changes are made. 
 
 5. Fig. 71. Bridge. Three slide tuner with the de- 
 tector circuit shunted around the terminals of the wire. 
 Four or five slides would be better to use. When both 
 branches of the divided circuit are maintained in a sym- 
 metrical condition the received impulses are equally 
 
Tuning Interference Prevention. 189 
 
 divided so that they have no effect on the detector. The 
 arrangement is like a Wheatstone bridge, the detector 
 corresponding to the galvanometer, and was devised by 
 S. G. Brown. Now, to receive the desired signals, the 
 ground contact is shifted to the right or left until the 
 best position for the desired impulses is found. (See 
 8 of the foregoing summary.) 
 
 6. Fig. 72. Loose coupler, LC. Sharp tuning is 
 possible because the coupling can be greatly varied. This 
 is a very popular form of tuner, and while it derives its 
 name from the fact that the secondary can be pulled 
 away from the primary, the heaviest coupling is reached 
 when the middle of the active primary turns is directly 
 over the middle of the active secondary turns. When the 
 sliding secondary is inserted farther in the primary after 
 this point has been reached, the coupling again becomes 
 loose. Since this form is best adopted as a standard be- 
 cause of its utility and comparative simplicity, its relations 
 and pecularities will be more fully described. The fol- 
 lowing abridgement from an article in Popular Electricity 
 by M. O. Andrews is of interest in this connection. 
 
 "1. Increasing the inductance of the primary increases the 
 long- wave length rapidly, but the short wave length is increased 
 so slowly that it may be considered as remaining constant. The 
 opposite is, of course, true when inductance is taken from the 
 primary. 
 
 2. Increasing the inductance of the secondary increases both 
 the long and the short wave lengths equally, or nearly so, and 
 vice versa. 
 
 3. Loosening the coupling between the primary and second- 
 ary decreases the long wave length and increases the short 
 wave length. Tightening the coupling increases the long and 
 decreases the short wave lengths. In other words, its action is 
 the same as the oscillation transformer of the transmitting set. 
 As the coupling is loosened the two wave lengths approach the 
 wave length to which each circuit is individually tuned, and as 
 the coupling is closed the two wave lengths are driven farther 
 from the natural wave length of the circuits. 
 
 4. Increasing the capacity in the primary circuit increases 
 both wave lengths, and vice versa. 
 
190 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 6. The variable capacity in the secondary circuit is used 
 principally to put the secondary in resonance with the primary, 
 thereby allowing looser coupling: than would otherwise be pos- 
 sible. This allows atmospheric disturbances to be cut out to 
 some extent without decreasing the audibility of the signals. 
 
 We have already observed that it is possible to hear a station 
 radiating a double wave at two places on our tuner. In one 
 case, we are in tune with the long wave and in the other with 
 the short wave. We may also be in tune with both the long and 
 the short waves at the same time. This is a decided advantage, 
 as we will then receive energy from both waves, and the signals 
 will consequently be much louder than when tuned to only one 
 of the waves. 
 
 How may the different types of interference be avoided? 
 
 Case 1. When in tune with the long wave length of the 
 transmitting station, there are four principle types of interfer- 
 ence that we must dodge. 
 
 1. Another station may commence sending, whose long wave 
 is of the same length as the one which we are receiving, but 
 whose short wave is either longer or shorter than the short 
 wave of the station from which we are receiving. For instance, 
 suppose we are receiving from a station radiating waves of 
 1,500 and 500 meters respectively. We are tuned to 1,500 and 
 400 meters, and another station commences sending using waves 
 of 1,500 and 600 meters. By referring to the effects of coupling 
 on double waves we find that this type of interference may be 
 tuned out by simply loosening the coupling which lowers our 
 long wave length perhaps to 1,300 meters and raises our short 
 wave length to 500 meters. The desired signals will then come 
 in not on the long wave, but on the short wave, where there is 
 no interference. If the coupling is loosened too much our short 
 wave length will be raised to 600 meters, where the undesired 
 signals will again be picked up. 
 
 2. While we are still tuned to 1,500 and 400 meters, and are 
 receiving from a station radiating waves of 1,500 and 500 me- 
 ters, another station may begin sending, using a short wave of 
 400 meters and a long wave, either longer or shorter than 1,500 
 meters. It may be tuned out by adding capacity to the primary 
 circuit, which increases both wave lengths to 1,700 and 600 
 meters, then by loosening the coupling our long wave length is 
 again brought back to 1,500 meters and our short wave length 
 driven still farther from the interference at 400 meters. The 
 desired signals will again come in on the long wave, but our 
 short wave length has been raised to 800 meters, where it is 
 comparatively safe from interference, as there are very few sta- 
 tions using wave lengths of from 600 to 900 meters. 
 
 3. Tuned as before to 1,500 and 400 meters and receiving 
 from waves of 1,500 and 500 meters, we may get interference 
 from waves 1,500 and 400 meters. In this case, we are in tun6 
 with both waves of the interference and the desired signals may 
 be entirely drowned out. This may be overcome by simply 
 
Tuning Interference Prevention. 191 
 
 adding inductance in the secondary or capacity in the primary 
 circuit, either of which raises both our wave lengths to 1,600 
 and 500 meters. We will then get our station on the short 
 wave where there is no interference. 
 
 4. Under the same conditions as before, suppose a station 
 begins sending, both waves of which are of exactly the same 
 length as those of the station from which we are receiving. 
 If there is no difference in the tone or intensity of the signals, 
 we must wait our turn, as there is positively no way of getting 
 around this type of interference. However, this is, fortunately, 
 a very rare case and will not often be encountered. 
 
 Case 2. When in tune with the short wave length of the 
 transmitting station, the types of interference are similar to 
 those under Case 1, but the remedies are slightly different. One 
 example will be given here, and the reader may work out the 
 rest for himself. 
 
 1. We are tuned to 1,500 and 400 meters, and are receiving 
 from waves of 1,600 and 400 meters. Interference of 1,400 and 
 400 meters may be tuned out by adding inductance in the sec- 
 ondary circuit or capacity in the primary, either of which will 
 raise our wave lengths to 1,600 and 500 meters. The desired 
 signals will then come in on the 1,600 meter wave. 
 
 Questions now begin to come up. How can we tell to which 
 wave we are tuned? This sounds well on paper, but in practice 
 how are we to determine whether we are tuned to the long, to 
 the short, or to both waves? Nothing could possibly be more 
 simple. All we have to do is to add inductance to the primary 
 and observe the result upon the intensity of the signals. If the 
 signals are cut out altogether, we are in tune with the long 
 wave, if the signals are not affected or are only slightly de- 
 creased in audibility, we are in tune with the short wave, and if 
 they are not cut out entirely, but their audibility is considerably 
 diminished, we are in tune with both waves. 
 
 Is it not possible to strengthen weak signals by these meth- 
 ods? It certainly is. For instance, suppose we are receiving 
 from 1,500 and 500 meter waves and are tuned to 1,500 and 400 
 meters. If the signals are weak, they may be strengthened by 
 first increasing the inductance in the secondary until we are 
 tuned to 1,600 and 500 meters. The signals will then come in on 
 the 500 meter waves. Then, by taking half as much inductance 
 from the secondary as was added to it, and loosening the coup- 
 ling, we become tuned to 1,500 and 500 meters and are getting 
 energy from both waves and consequently stronger signals." 
 
 7. Fig. 73. Small stations will find it an advantage 
 to use the series inductance in the primary circuit as 
 shown when receiving from stations using long wave 
 lengths. This corresponds to the use of a loading coil 
 at the transmitter. 
 
192 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 8. Fig. 74. Differential (Fessenden) Method. Two 
 identical loose couplers connected as shown are used. 
 The variometer is a form of tuner which will be described 
 later, and a single slide tuner may be used instead. In 
 operation the switch "a" is opened and the set is tuned 
 to the desired signals. A is then closed and the vario- 
 meter or single slide tuner adjusted until the signals are 
 received the loudest. The condenser marked 5% must be 
 
 adjusted so that its capacity is nearly 5 per cent more 
 than the other one. The interfering impulses are not 
 in tune with either half of the circuit, so that they go 
 through both sides very nearly equally. As in the bridge 
 method, they become neutralized and do not affect the 
 receiver. 
 
 9. Fig. 75. Simple loop aerial connection. Elimi- 
 nates natural disturbances and short interfering waves. 
 When a looped aerial is used it is used as an ordinary 
 aerial for transmitting and a loop for receiving. 
 
CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF RECEIVING CONDENSERS. 
 FIXED AND VARIABLE. 
 
 The discussion which has already been given for send- 
 ing condensers applies, for the most part, to receiving 
 condensers. The main difference is that the insulation 
 for receiving condensers does not need to be so heavy 
 because of the lower potential and currents used. The 
 coatings of receiving condensers are, therefore, placed 
 very close together so as to secure a large capacity in a 
 small space. Air is used for variable condensers to a 
 large extent because it provides a convenient dielectric 
 which has no hysteresis losses. On account of the low 
 dielectric constant, however, other dielectric materials, 
 such as castor oil, mica, paraffine paper, and glass arc 
 used whwi large capacity is desired. The capacities nec- 
 essary for the receiving circuits, however, arc generally 
 small. The laws for parallel and series connections as 
 stated for transmitting condensers apply to receiving 
 condensers as well, and as has already been pointed out a 
 fixed and variable condenser can be used in parallel, the 
 fixed condenser to approximate the desired capacity and 
 the variable condenser to make up the difference. This is 
 perhaps the most satisfactory and economical arrange- 
 ment as large variable capacities are then unnecessary. In 
 making fixed condensers, the proper capacity must be 
 approximated, and can be calculated by the formulas al- 
 ready given for transmitting condensers. It is well to 
 
194 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 make several units which may be connected in or out of 
 the circuit to secure a variable step condenser. 
 
 The proper capacity necessary for each set must be 
 determined experimentally, though the approximate 
 amount can be found by calculation. This is essential 
 because of the variable quantities concerned, such as the 
 other apparatus employed, the size of the aerial, etc., 
 which is a different problem than when the transmitting 
 condenser is calculated for a definite size and kind of 
 transformer. The use of too little capacity can generally 
 be told by the weakness of the received signal. Capacity 
 should be added until the maximum sound is received. If 
 however, an excess of capacity is used, the signals, will 
 become muddy and indistinct. The capacity should then 
 be lessened until the ragged sound disappears and is 
 clear. 
 
 There are many suitable constructions for both fixed 
 and variable condensers, the designs here described being 
 those most generally used. 
 
 FIXED CONDENSER. 
 
 These are used as shunts around the detector or phones 
 to increase the intensity of the received signal. When 
 tuning inductances having adjustable coils are used, the 
 secondary or detector circuit condenser can be of the 
 fixed or fixed step-by-step type. A variable condenser 
 is hardly necessary except in the primary or aerial cir- 
 cuit, and since it is more expensive, particularly in the 
 large sizes, the step by step type is best to use in parallel 
 with a small balancing variable condenser as has already 
 been pointed out. Aside from intensifying the received 
 signals, a condenser, if of the adjustable type, allows 
 of fine selective tuning. 
 
Construction of Receiving Condensers. 195 
 
 A convenient condenser unit which may be connected 
 together with duplicate units or variable capacity to se- 
 cure almost any capacity is made as follows : 
 
 CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Obtain a good grade of bond paper about .004 or .005 
 (measure with a micrometer), of an inch thick and soak 
 several sheets in a pot of clean melted paraffine until the 
 air bubbles are driven out. When air bubbles no longer 
 rise, hang the sheets up to dry and cut them into pieces 
 2 inches by 3 inches. 
 
 The coatings are made from tinfoil cut to pieces 1 5-8 
 of an inch by 3 inches long, and smoothed out by a roller 
 as described for transmitting condensers. * 
 
 ASSEMBLING. 
 
 Lay a strip of tinfoil upon a strip of paraffined paper 
 so that 3-8 of an inch of one end of the foil projects 
 beyond one of the long ends of the paper. Now lay a 
 sheet of paper on top of this and again place a sheet of 
 the foil, but projecting the 3-8 of an inch on the other 
 end of the paper. Repeat, until the desired number of 
 sheets and foil have been alternately arranged, six or 
 eight sheets being a desired number. The foil should 
 be arranged evenly between the paper, so that the margin 
 on three sides is nearly equal. When done, the condenser 
 should consist of alternate layers of foil and paper with 
 every other foil projection on an opposite end of the 
 paper. Now place the assembled condenser between two 
 temporary boards and a clamp and squeeze together under 
 the influence of heat. This may be accomplished over a 
 hot air or steam register or open oven which is just hot 
 
196 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 enough to soften the paraffine of the paper sheets. Tighten 
 up the clamps and remove them after the wax cools. The 
 two sets of connecters are then soldered or clamped to a 
 conductor of stranded copper wire, and may be mounted 
 in almost any desired manner. The condenser used as a 
 detector shunt may be mounted in the base of the de- 
 tector stand. Switches should be provided for connect- 
 ing several of these units in series, parallel, or series mul- 
 tiple. About three of these units in parallel will be the 
 right amount for the chopper condenser of the continuous 
 wave^receiving set, while a single unit will suffice for most 
 of the secondary or detector circuits. Test as described 
 for the transmitting condenser. The condenser should 
 hold the battery charge for some little time and should 
 be capable of discharging through the telephone receiver 
 with an audible click several seconds after the battery 
 terminals have been disconnected from it. It is seldom 
 that this kind of condenser is burnt out or injured, so 
 that once made, it is practically permanent. The primary 
 condenser for the spark coils already described is built 
 in the same manner, except that the larger dimensions 
 given are used. A shunt condenser around a telegraph 
 key used for sending, should have a large capacity sim- 
 ilar to that used around the vibrator contacts of a coil. 
 Paraffined tissue paper such as is used to wrap eatables 
 and instruments may be had ready paraffined and is de- 
 sirable because of the uniform thickness. The condenser 
 can also be assembled by applying the foil to the paper 
 while the wax is still soft and warm, making the after- 
 warming and pressure unnecessary. 
 
 KORDA AIR CONDENSER. 
 
 This type of variable condenser is in general use 
 for wireless receiving sets, wave meters, and is partic- 
 
Construction of Receiving Condensers. 19? 
 
 ularly desirable in the primary or aerial circuit for tuning 
 purposes. Fine adjustment is possible and when properly 
 made there is little or no loss in the condenser. The 
 construction is somewhat difficult, however, but since the 
 plates may be had already cut and smoothed, the main 
 
 TVvst Washer 
 ibf 
 
 FIC.-7B. 
 
 ibt-c 
 
 difficulty is limited to the arrangement of the plates. It 
 is not necessary to use a large number of plates provided 
 the arrangement with a parallel step by step condenser 
 is adopted. Such a step by step condenser should not 
 have more than one or two sheets of foil and dielectric 
 
198 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 to each unit or step and the switch contacts used, should 
 be good and well cleaned. 
 
 The plates used should be of brass or aluminum of 
 about No. 20 B&S gauge and since the cutting is difficult 
 to do by hand, they are preferably purchased already 
 stamped from supply houses or else turned out in a 
 lathe by a machinist. It is essential that the plates be 
 perfectly flat and even. The number of plates used 
 need not be more than four or six if a fixed condenser 
 in parallel is also used, but if the condenser is to be used 
 alone, from twenty-four to twelve plates should be used. 
 This is for the larger or stationary plates, one less being 
 used for the rotary plates. Five fixed and four rotary 
 plates make a convenient size for a variable unit. 
 
 The five fixed plates should be semi-circles 5j4 inches 
 in diameter and the rotary plates of which four are need- 
 ed should be 4J^ inches in diameter, as these are standard 
 sizes. It will be understood that larger units may be 
 made in the same manner, using more plates. The sev- 
 eral details are shown in fig. 76. The five large semi- 
 circles should be placed together and three 5-32 in. holes 
 drilled near the edge as shown at (A). The four small 
 plates are placed in the same manner, except that only 
 one 5-32 inch hole is bored as shown. 
 
 Obtain brass or copper washers 5-32 inch thick, 3-8 
 of an inch in diameter and with a 5-32 inch hole at the 
 center. These may be had at a supply house or hard- 
 ware store. Also obtain some 5-32 inch brass rods. 
 
 ASSEMBLING THE ROTARY PLATES. 
 
 The plates are assembled after the holes have been 
 smoothed and burrs removed, by passing a piece of the 
 5-32 inch rod alternately through a plate and then a 
 
Construction of Receiving Condensers. 199 
 
 washer. The ends of the rod should be threaded with an 
 eight thirty-two die and the rod cut so that a short exten- 
 sion is left beyond the plates for a handle. The plates 
 are held together on the rod by two threaded washers or 
 nuts l /2 inch in diameter and 9-32 of an inch thick. The 
 nuts should be turned tightly so that the plates can not 
 move after they are placed in alignment. 
 
 ASSEMBLING THE FIXED PLATES. 
 
 A similar plan is used with the fixed plates, a rod 
 being inserted in each of the three holes, and threaded 
 8-32 at the ends as before, care being taken to keep the 
 plates in alignment. The washers between the plates are 
 placed at all three positions. A longer extension should 
 be left on these rods for fastening purposes. The appear- 
 ance of the assembled plates is shown at (B) of the figure. 
 
 Obtain two pieces of fibre 3-16 of an inch thick and 
 cut out two pieces with the shape and having holes as 
 shown at (C). The holes 1, 2, 3, correspond to the holes 
 of the large plates, and the hole 4 is bored so that when 
 the shaft of the movable plates is in place in it and the 
 fibre is assembled on the rods, the brass washers of the 
 movable plates will not touch or make contact with the 
 fixed plates. This is important, as a short circuit would 
 result otherwise. About l /2 inch will be sufficient exten- 
 sion for this hole. The lower fibre piece is held in place 
 on the rods by 8-32 nuts. It is preferably spaced a little 
 distance from the lower plate by washers. The upper 
 fibre piece is similarly placed after the plates have been 
 placed in position. 
 
200 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 ASSEMBLING AND MOUNTING. 
 
 The assembled plates must not rub or touch each 
 other and must be brought into alignment, the adjustable 
 screw bearing at the bottom shown at (D) being a suit- 
 able means. The rotary plates can be raised or lowered 
 by this arrangement. The condenser may be suitably 
 mounted in a box or case, and the connections, one from 
 a washer on the fixed plates and one from a brass strip 
 or brush bearing on the rotary shaft near the top, may 
 be brought to binding posts. The excess length of the rods 
 can then be cut off, and a handle provided for the ro- 
 tary shaft. A scale and pointer can also be arranged 
 on the cover, to suit. Electrose or composition knobs 
 such as are used for typewriter platens (obtainable at 
 supply houses) make good handles for this purpose. The 
 scale may be calibrated by comparison with a known 
 standard, using a wave meter, or may be arbitrary, using 
 equal divisions. A brass protractor such as is used by 
 draughtsmen may be had for a few cents and makes a 
 convenient scale. The pointer can be cut out of a strip 
 of brass or aluminum. Two or more of these units may 
 be mounted in a common case or box and switches pro- 
 vided for changing the connections. Moving washers 
 are preferably provided at the upper bearing to take up 
 the thrust, so that the condenser may be used in any 
 position.* When neatly carried out this type of con- 
 denser will be of business like appearance as well as 
 operation. 
 
 MAKESHIFTS. 
 
 It is often desired to have a simple makeshift variable 
 condenser for experiments. Almost any two conductors 
 
 A horizontal position for the axis is not desirable. 
 
Construction of Receiving Condensers. 201 
 
 in any shape separated by any dielectric, so that more 
 or less surface may be brought into relation to form capa- 
 city, are suitable. Such common things as tin cans may 
 be utilized, the insulation being provided by using paper 
 or even a coat of shellac or asphaltum. A can painted 
 in this manner and suspended so that its height in a jar of 
 salt water can be altered, connections being made to the 
 can and to a plate inserted in the solution, is suitable, 
 provided that every part of the exposed surface is cov- 
 ered by a thin coat of the insulating varnish. Sliding 
 plates similar to those described for a variable sending 
 condenser may also be used. Two tin cans having dia- 
 meters so that one just slides into the other after a layer 
 of paper has been shellaced on the inner or sliding one. 
 may be used. Similar arrangements will doubtless sug- 
 gest themselves to the reader and if carried out care- 
 fully may serve quite well. The series capacity used in 
 the aerial circuit should have a comparatively large capa- 
 city. This is best obtained by using a fixed and a variable 
 capacity in parallel, in which case a makeshift arrange- 
 ment carefully constructed will generally have sufficient 
 capacity to make it of considerable use. 
 
 The Korda condenser described is desirable, however, 
 and if immersed in a can of transformer or castor oil, 
 preferably the latter, its capacity will be considerably 
 increased. (See chapter on the calculation of capacity). 
 The maximum capacity of such a condenser is readily cal- 
 culated when the area is taken by using the formula. 
 
 Area of a circle = 3.1416 R 2 taking the radius R for 
 the rotary plates, and dividing by 2 to find the area of the 
 half circle. 
 
CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF TUNING INDUCTANCES. 
 
 LOOSE COUPLERS, VARIOMETERS, 
 
 TUNERS. 
 
 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 
 
 Whatever type of tuning is adopted, the inductances 
 used should be carefully constructed with accurate and 
 delicate adjustments. Every part should be nicely made 
 and great care taken with the insulation and contacts. 
 The cores and ends used are preferably made from hard 
 rubber, fibre or molded composition, but wood and paper 
 when dry and carefully shellaced may be substituted. The 
 wire used should be uniform, and may either be bare or 
 insulated. Bare wire is spaced by means of a thread or 
 a groove cut into the core, while insulated wire is sep- 
 arated naturally. Contact is best made when bare wire 
 is used. Enameled wire is neat and useful since a con- 
 tact portion is readily scraped from the wire. Cotton and 
 silk insulations are difficult to scrape for contact with 
 sliders, so that the job is neat and effective. The only 
 objection to enameled wire seems to be that the turns 
 are brought too close together, so that an undesirable 
 electrostatic capacity is formed between the adjacent 
 turns. Wood may be used for bases. All metallic parts 
 including connecting wires should be carefully insulated 
 from each other and even from wood, by using hard 
 rubber sheeting and tubes. In receiving delicate and 
 
Construction of Receiving Condensers. 203 
 
 minute oscillations from distance stations, every detail 
 counts for efficiency and too much care cannot be taken 
 if the maximum results are desired. Holes are prefer- 
 ably filled up with tar or wax, and shields provided to 
 prevent injury or leakage to or from the wires. In the 
 following designs, descriptions will be given for induct- 
 ances of standard design and merit and while there are 
 varied forms for the detailed constructions, and much 
 ingenuity can be exercised, the main dimensions and de- 
 sign should generally be adhered to, to secure efficient 
 instruments. 
 
 TUNERS, SLIDE TYPE.- 
 
 This form is commonly employed for tuning, bridge, 
 loading, and similar methods as has already been de- 
 scribed. While only one slider is described, it will be 
 understood that duplicate sliders can be provided on 
 other parts of the circumference of the core and wire 
 It is well to provide binding posts for the wire terminals 
 in every case so that a variety of utility is the result. (See 
 fig. 77.) 
 
 Core. This may be turned out from hard wood, but 
 since wood shrinks, a rubber, fibre, composition, or even 
 a shellaced paper tube is much prefered. Suitable tubes 
 may be had from supply houses. Paper or fibre tubes 
 can be made by rolling up and gluing a sheet of the thin 
 fibre into the desired size. Hollow tubes have the addi- 
 tional advantage of light weight. The diameter of the 
 tube may be any convenient size between 2 l /2 inches and 
 6 inches, the smaller diameters providing sharper ad- 
 justment. 3J/2 inches is a desirable diameter. If bare 
 wire is to be used on the fibre, rubber or composition 
 tube, it is very desirable to turn or have a machinist 
 
204 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 turn a thread on the core. About 18 threads to the inch 
 makes a suitable thread for use with No 22 wire, which 
 is a common size in favor. The threads can be cut to 
 within J/2 inch or so from each end. The length of the 
 tube used may be from 3 inches to 12 inches or more as 
 desired. 
 
 The winding. Use soft copper wire of not more than 
 No. 24 in fineness, nor less than No. 18 in coarseness, 
 No. 20 or 22 being preferred. The winding can be done 
 by hand if care is taken, but a lathe or makeshift lathe 
 
 Rod 
 
 SJidr 
 
 Hole for 3crw. 
 
 *> 
 
 RE.TQ. 
 
 is best to use. The wire should be wound tigntly and 
 evenly, avoiding kinks. When the core is threaded, this 
 is easy. If bare wire is used without threading the core, 
 the turns should be spaced by winding the wire with a 
 turn of heavy linen thread, so that each turn is spaced 
 by the thickness of the thread and the adjacent turns of 
 wire do not touch each other. Enameled wire is wound 
 without spacing. Cotton or silk insulation is not recom- 
 mended for wire for tuners of this type. The bare wire 
 is preferred. Then ends of the wire can be fastened by 
 means of a small hole drilled at the end of the core or else 
 by means of a small screw. If hard drawn copper wire, 
 
Construction of Tuning Inductances. 205 
 
 such as may be had at hardware stores, is available, it is 
 preferred as it is more durable and easier to wind. 
 
 CORE ENDS. BASE 
 
 While the core ends must be of a size corresponding to 
 the diameter of the tube used, which may vary from 2 in. 
 to 6 in, a margin should be provided to allow for clearance 
 from a base, sliders, and so on. The ends are preferably 
 square and may be easily fastened to the cores in any 
 desired manner. For solid wood cores, wood screws may 
 be used. Tubings are best fastened by turning a recess 
 in the inner end of the core end which will fit over the 
 tube snugly. Another method is to provide plug ends 
 for the tube, which are then screwed on the core ends. 
 When assembled, the tuner should set true. The use 
 of a base is optional and is hardly necessary, except for 
 appearance and possibly convenience. The binding posts 
 can be brought out on the core ends. 
 
 SLIDERS. 
 
 (See fig. 78). These may be any suitable type which 
 will make a step by step contact with the several turns 
 of wire without undue friction. The slider rods arc 
 preferably of square or rectangular shape, as round rods 
 must be used doubly to prevent undesired turning. The 
 rod is cut as long as the length of the core plus the thick- 
 ness of the core ends, which should not be over ^ inch, 
 plus a little extra for connections or a binding post. While 
 only one form of slider is shown, to avoid unnecessary 
 duplication, it will be understood that many other forms 
 may be used. The essential feature of sliders is that 
 they should make good contact with only one turn of wire 
 
206 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 at a time and without too much friction. If the slider 
 touches two turns at once (which will happen if care is 
 not taken), the turn is short circuited. This is not de- 
 sirable as the intensity of the received signals is thus 
 lessened. The spiral spring shown can be coiled from 
 No 22 spring brass, and a round piece of copper wire 
 smoothed off to a round surface is soldered on the tip. 
 The length of the spiral should be enough to make contact 
 with the wire after the slider is in place. While con- 
 nection with the slider can be made through the rod by 
 the sliding contact which results, this method is not desir- 
 able and a flexible insulated wire is best soldered directly 
 to the slider. The knob is for convenience in handling, 
 and can be made from hard rubber or purchased already 
 molded. Sliders and rods may be had in the open market. 
 The slider should slide on the rod without sticking. Load- 
 ing coils may be made without sliders, by taking taps off 
 from every ten or twenty turns and using multi-point 
 switches. The wire when wound on smooth forms should 
 be coated with two coats of shellac and allowed to dry. 
 The portion for contact is then scraped clean for a 
 distance along the length of the coil and under the slider, 
 of about y 2 inch. This may be accomplished by using a 
 knife or a small block of wood covered with emerv cloth. 
 The wire should be scraped until it shows clean and 
 bright. Two wooden strips may be temporarily fastened 
 on the core the desired distance apart to serve as a guide 
 so that the scraped portion will be of uniform width. 
 If several sliders are used, two may be taken from the 
 top or one from each side, or all, as desired. The use 
 of bare wire wound in a threaded tube core is best adopted 
 for a standard, the diameter being 3 inches and length 
 10 inches, as this will give a serviceable instrument with 
 a wide range of utility. Wires wound on smooth cores 
 
Construction of Tuning Inductances. 
 
 207 
 
 or wood cores, particularly enamelled wire, tend to loosen 
 after a time, in which case it is best to either rewind the 
 coil or make a new one. 
 
 VARIOMETER. 
 
 A variometer is a form of tuner without any sliding 
 or variable contacts and depends solely on the variable 
 coupling between its two parts which are connected to- 
 gether. It is quite easily made and is very useful in 
 
 Wire 
 
 connection with other apparatus, particularly as a loading 
 coil. It may be used alone for short wave lengths. 
 
 A suitable construction is indicated in fig. 79. The 
 cores are of hollow fibre, rubber, composition or paper 
 and may be made as has already been described. One 
 core (the stationary core) is 6 in. in diameter and 21-8 
 inches wide, while the inner and movable core is 4 7-8 
 inches in diameter and 21-8 inches wide. The larger 
 core is wound with about forty feet of No. 22 insulated 
 wire, so that a space of l /i inch is left at the center. This 
 will make about 24 turns on each side of the space. The 
 small core is wound in the same way, except that 28 turns 
 
208 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 are wound on each side of the space. Both parts of 
 each core should have the same number of turns. 
 
 J4 in- holes are now bored or punched, at opposite 
 points of the two cores, in the center of the J^ inch bare 
 band, for a rod. This rod is a piece of J4 mcn round 
 brass 7j^ inches long, and is passed through the holes as 
 shown in the figure. Now take a piece of No. 18 bare 
 wire about S l / 2 inches long and fasten it as shown, solder- 
 ing it at the center to the J4 mcn rod and bringing the 
 ends through the small core. This is to make the inner 
 coil fast to the rod so that it may be rotated. Rubber or 
 fibre washers (W) should be placed as shown, so that 
 the inner coil is free to rotate within the outer coil. The 
 two coils are connected together as shown with a short 
 length of flexible insulated wire. 
 
 Mounting. This may be carried out as desired, a box 
 6^2 inches cube being suitable. Binding posts should be 
 provided and connections made so that starting with the 
 end of one coil, the wire continues until the opposite end 
 of the other coil is reached at the other binding post. 
 A knob with a pointer and a scale may be provided as 
 described for the variable condenser of chapter 17. Use 
 like a tuning or loading coil. When at right angles the 
 two coils are neutral, while when concentric the closest 
 coupling adjustment is reached. About 75 feet of the 
 wire will be needed. The coils may be shellaced and the 
 instrument finished as desired. In mounting the instru- 
 ment, the outer coil is fastened rigidly to the case or cover 
 so that only the inner coil is rotable. 
 
 LOOSE COUPLER. 
 
 The loose coupler is in general favor at the present 
 time, as with it and condensers, a wide variety of tuning 
 and coupling is possible. The set can be tuned to either 
 
Construction of Tuning Inductances. 
 
 209 
 
 the long or short waves or both and when the maximum 
 point is found the interfering stations can often be tuned 
 out by making the coupling very small. (That is, pull- 
 ing the primary far away from the secondary or vice 
 versa.) The following design and data is for one of 
 these instruments and two will be required if the Fessen- 
 den differential method is employed. (See fig. 80.) 
 
 FlE.flD. 
 
 RE. 
 
 PRIMARY. 
 
 Core : Insulating tube 3 inches in diameter and 4 5-8 
 long. The wall should not be more than 1-8 inch thick. 
 Wind as directed for tuner, using either No. 20 or 22 
 B&S gauge bare or enameled wire, preferably the for- 
 mer, in threaded grooves. Start winding 9-16 of an inch 
 from one end and wind until within 9-16 of the other end. 
 
210 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Heads for Primary. y 2 in. thick, 4x4^ in., smoothed 
 on all sides. Find the center of each piece (two needed). 
 These pieces are now centered in a chuck in a lathe so 
 that the lathe center is J4 mcn below the marked center of 
 the pieces. One piece is made with a hole 3 inches in 
 diameter through it, while the other piece is only bored, 
 with this same size, to have a depth of 3-8 of an inch. 
 When done, one piece will have a hole 3 inches in dia- 
 meter through it while the other will have a smaller hole 
 coming within 1-8 inch of the other surface. 
 
 Base. Three-fourths of an inch thick, 6 inches wide 
 and 16 inches long. (Hardwood.) Mount the primary 
 at one end so that it sets true and is nicely spaced, using 
 screws driven from the bottom of the base into the heads, 
 the screws being countersunk. A single slider may now 
 be provided, as shown and as has been described for 
 tuners. It is understood that the primary core with the 
 winding, is mounted in the heads, using cement, so that 
 the core and wire are held in the openings in the heads 
 and so that the head with the hole all the way through 
 it faces toward the long end of the base. (See figure.) 
 SECONDARY. 
 
 Core. Hardwood cylinder turned from dry wood.* 
 Diameter, 2j/ inches. Length, 5 inches. (See fig. 80.) 
 Have a machinist mill a slot 3-16 wide by 3-8 deep as 
 shown at (a) the whole length of the core. This should 
 be smooth when done. Inasmuch as bare wire is to be 
 used, it would be well to have threads turned on the 
 cylinder before the milling is done. These should be 20 
 to the inch, and very light. Wind with No. 26 B&S hard 
 drawn copper wire. Threads may be used, spacing the 
 turns with linen thread, if the machine threads cannot 
 
 * A hollow tube may be used if a frame is provided 
 for the slot. 
 
Construction of Tuning Inductances. 211 
 
 be cut. Use considerable pressure in winding, as the con- 
 tact is to be made from below. The linen thread used 
 should be about as thick as the wire used. Start 4 mc ^ 
 from one end and wind to 3-8 inch of the other. 
 
 Head. One needed. ^4 mcn stock, cut 3^4 inches 
 square with a hole bored in center to a depth of 3-8 of 
 an inch. This hole is 2^ inches in diameter and is turned 
 as before. 
 
 Attach the head to the secondary core at the 24 m - en d 
 by small screws started from the back of the head and 
 screwed into the core. The secondary slider is made so 
 that more or less wire is included in the circuit when the 
 rod (See b) is moved in or out, and allows of adjust- 
 ment after the secondary is within the primary coil. This 
 slider is made from a piece of 5-32 inch brass rod, 7 
 inches long, to one end of which a small loop of thin 
 spring brass 5-32 inch wide, is soldered, as shown. A 
 rounded point is then soldered on the upper part of this 
 spring to make contact with a single turn of wire at a 
 time. Note the notch. This is made by a few strokes 
 with a fine three cornered file. A handle is provided at 
 the other end of the rod. The slider is mounted in 
 the milled slot and extends through the head through a 
 small hole. 
 
 MOUNTINGS. 
 
 The mountings are shown clearly in the figure. Bind- 
 ing posts should be provided and flexible insulated wires 
 should be brought to the slider rods. The inner end of 
 the secondary coil can be brought to the back by either 
 boring a hole through the cylinder or else making a groove 
 in one side of the milled slot so that the wire imbedded in 
 it cannot possibly make contact with the slider. Both 
 ends of both primary and secondary should be brought 
 out to binding posts. The two pieces of tubing which act 
 as bearings to support the secondary have an internal 
 
212 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 diameter of J4 inch and are \y 2 inches long. They are 
 forced into holes drilled in the secondary head. The 
 rods on which the secondary slides are 10^2 inches long 
 and are supported as shown, one end being fastened by 
 passing through holes in the inner head of the primary 
 and the other end being fastened to a small bridge fas- 
 tened to the base. The latter is 1x1x4 inches long. 
 Small nuts serve to hold the rods in place. The coils 
 should be mounted so that the secondary will slide freely 
 into the primary. The remainder of the instrument is 
 left to the individual worker and presents no difficulty. 
 Provided that the general dimensions are preserved, any 
 suitable mounting may be used. In using two of these 
 with a Fessenden interference preventing circuit, the con- 
 denser marked 5 per cent must be calibrated so that it 
 is always 5 per cent different in capacity than the other 
 one. This may be accomplished by arranging the scale 
 on this capacity so that when the pointer is on zero, the 
 condenser will really be in mesh to approximately 5 per 
 cent. This need only be approximated. 
 
 A receiving loose coupler can be made on the pancake 
 plan using two flat spirals of wire, one of which is ad- 
 justable with respect to the other, as for the transmitting 
 oscillation transformer. The spacing, however, is ac- 
 complished by using a thin insulated wire strip such as is 
 used for transformer coils, and the turns can be close 
 together on account of the low potentials used. Such an 
 arrangement has very little if any advantage over the 
 loose coupler described, particularly if a variometer is also 
 used, so the duplicated description will be omitted. The 
 method of using the apparatus described has already been 
 fully set forth. 
 
 The reader with limited tools can, of course, make a 
 simpler arrangement. It is possible to make tuning in- 
 struments with little or no facilities and tools. 
 
CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 CONCLUSION. THE RIGHTS OF THE EXPERI- 
 MENTER. 
 
 The completed receiver, of whatever type adopted 
 can all be mounted together if desired. In any case the 
 connections used should be of stranded insulated conduc- 
 tors, kept free from each other, well insulated from wood 
 and other matter, the switch contacts clean, and so on. 
 The descriptions have been made as clear and concise as 
 possible, though the details have been purposely left to 
 the individual in many cases where the design is optional. 
 Such items as cases, boxes or mountings are well within 
 the limits of every reader, and even in the other apparatus 
 and parts considerable ingenuity may be used. Duplica- 
 tion of apparatus has been avoided wherever possible, 
 though in some cases all forms have been described. The 
 author believes that when one piece of apparatus will do 
 the work of two, there is little use in using two. Every 
 piece of apparatus should be made with care and should 
 always be understood. Learn to know your apparatus, 
 master its peculiarities, note the good and bad adjust- 
 ments, always be on the lookout for possible phenomena, 
 and keep a record of your experiments. While the ap- 
 paratus described is intended particularly for stations it 
 can be easily made portable. Stations may be readily set 
 up on small boats, in the field, camp, and so on. There is 
 hardly a limit to the use to which a wireless set may be 
 put. 
 
214 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 The experimenter generally plans to receive over a 
 much greater distance than he expects to send. Indeed, 
 with the present network of high-powered stations, there 
 are few readers who may not do long distance work with 
 even simple apparatus. The new Arlington station, for 
 instance, should be heard by every experimenter within 
 1,000 to 3,000 miles under favorable conditions. It is 
 surprising to learn what can be done with even home 
 made apparatus. A list of wireless stations may be ob- 
 tained for 15c by addressing the Superintendent of Docu- 
 ments, Washington, D. C. 
 
 If you have not already done so, join a local wireless 
 club. Nearly every locality has one or is forming one 
 and there is little or no expense attached. If you have 
 not yet learned a code, start now. The continental code 
 is in general favor and it is well to master it first. There 
 are so many messages which can be read with a simple 
 receiving set, that the code can be mastered in a short 
 time. In practice, it is well to start with the letters first, 
 then with short words, and finally with simple sentences 
 and paragraphs. The average person finds it much easier 
 to send than to receive. Acquire a free, easy and clear 
 movement in making the dots and dashes. Speed is a 
 secondary matter, as it will come with practice. It is 
 worth while to keep a record of all messages in a small 
 note book. 
 
 THE EXPERIMENTER'S RIGHTS. 
 
 All of the leading countries have laws regulating 
 radiocommunication. The wireless law enacted on De- 
 cember 13, 1912, makes the following restrictions upon 
 experimenters : 
 
 1. The law recognizes the experimenter, gives him rights, 
 and licenses are to be given provided that, 
 
The Experimenter's Rights. 215 
 
 2. The experimenter does not use a wave length over 200 
 meters long for transmission nor a greater power in either a 
 coil or transformer than 1 K. W., if he is farther than 5 nauti- 
 cal miles away from a government station, or not more than 
 Y* K. W. if he is within 5 nautical miles of a government 
 station. 
 
 3. Experimenters having apparatus which is not powerful 
 enough to transmit farther than the boundaries of the state in 
 which the station is situated, and which cannot interfere with 
 the reception of signals from outside the state, need not take 
 out a license unless they desire to do so. This means practi- 
 cally that if you live in the heart of say Texas, you may use 
 large power without license provided, stations in other states 
 cannot hear you, but if you live near the border of another 
 state you must use very weak power or else obtain a license. 
 
 4. It is not necessary to have a license for a receiving 
 station only. 
 
 5. If the experimenter wishes to use a high wave length 
 or high power, permission will be granted by the Secretary of 
 Commerce and Labor, upon proper application, provided the 
 applicant shows cause why the additional power and wave 
 length is desired. 
 
 6. The operator is required to preserve the secrecy of all 
 messages sent or received upon the penalty of a fine and im- 
 prisonment. 
 
 7. The experimenters must use sharp and pure waves. 
 
 8. The penalty for sending a false message of any kind 
 will be a fine up to $1,000 or imprisonment up to two years or 
 both. (Distress signal, $2,5005 years.) 
 
 9. The operation of wireless instruments for either send- 
 ing or receiving except as before stated, without a license, will 
 be punishable by a fine of not more than $500 and the forfei- 
 ture of the apparatus. This does not apply to receiving appa- 
 ratus only. 
 
 These are simple, boiled down accounts of the main 
 requirements and provisions of the law as far as the 
 experimenter is concerned. Information will be fur- 
 nished by the Secretary of Commerce and Labor, without 
 expense, upon your request. 
 
 The licensing is free and even advantageous to ex- 
 perimenters. The apparatus described in this book will 
 enable the reader to comply with every feature of the law 
 without difficulty, provided that the aerial used for trans- 
 mitting purposes is not made longer than 70 feet by 
 
216 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 itself,* allowing for lead-ins to make up the remainder of 
 the effective length. The plan of using a duplex aerial 
 will be found particularly valuable in accordance with 
 the law, so that long distance messages may be received. 
 The two aerials should be placed at right angles to each 
 other if possible in order to avoid unnecessary absorp- 
 tion of the transmitted energy. There is no cause for 
 alarm over the new law. 
 
 The Department of Commerce and Labor has formed certain 
 rules and regulations which must be adhered to. Administra- 
 tion districts have been established, with offices at the custom- 
 houses. Classifications have been made for the purpose of ad- 
 ministration. Pull particulars can be obtained gratis by ad- 
 dressing the Commissioner of Navigation. The first thing to do 
 is to write for forms No. 756 and 757. Full instructions will be 
 sent at the same time. There will not be any difficulties in ob- 
 taining a license, but it is imperative that you apply for the 
 license at once. 
 
 PATENTS. 
 
 While most of the wireless apparatus is covered more 
 or less completely by patents, the experimenter need have 
 no concern. While the experimenter is legally an in- 
 fringer when he uses patented apparatus without per- 
 mission from the patentee, it is generally recognized that 
 experimenters may use patented articles for purely non- 
 commercial purposes without liability. This educational 
 idea seems to be so fixed that even manufacturers and 
 dealers in patented experimental goods not made under 
 license or permission of the patentee, are for the most 
 part perfectly safe, since the patent rights are seldom 
 pushed into this realm. The author feels a little on the 
 subject and certainly does not advise the open and wilful 
 infringement of patents, but also believes that for educa- 
 tional and experimental purposes where no commercial 
 
 This allows a height of 50 to 70 feet for leads, etc. 
 
The Experimenters Rights. 217 
 
 profits are realized from such use, the use of patented 
 articles is recognized as legitimate in effect if not in the 
 legal sense. The readers need have little concern on this 
 points as long as they do not make or sell or rent the appa- 
 ratus for commercial gain. Even then, if in moderation, 
 it is not likely that there will be any great difficulty. 
 
 While there is a large field for improvement in the 
 new art, the reader is not advised to take out or apply 
 for patents unless he is sure that the device has merit, is a 
 real improvement, and is needed, as otherwise failure in 
 one form or another will generally result. There are at 
 the present time something like 1,500 or 2,000 patents in 
 full force which cover wireless apparatus and systems. 
 While a part of these are useless and obsolete, it is not 
 unlikely that the very improvement you have in mind 
 is embodied in one or more of these, so that it is well to 
 have a search made into the records before spending 
 money for applications, models, etc. This is not intended 
 to discourage but rather to encourage in the right direc- 
 tion. The author has treated the matter of inventions 
 and patents quite fully in another volume which is soon 
 to be published. 
 
 In conclusion it seems well to remark that the present 
 tendency in the art is toward the permanent establishment 
 of large chains of powerful land stations employing direc- 
 tive aerials, the simplification of ship, train, and portable 
 stations, the use of long wave lengths for large power 
 radiation, the employment of high pitch musical tones for 
 transmission, the transmission methods which make re- 
 ception inaudible except when the principle of beats is 
 employed at the receiving station, the use of amplifiers to 
 increase the effective intensity of the received energy, 
 and a beginning toward early standardization. Among 
 the new developments some brief mention of the Edel- 
 
218 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 man Differential Wave System will doubtless be of inter- 
 est. Experiments by the author have already shown 
 that all of the common disturbances undesired signals as 
 well as atmospherics do not interfere with this system. 
 The promising experiments with pin point gaps, liquid 
 transmitters, stepped-up-frequency-alternators, and low 
 aerials also deserve to be mentioned. 
 
 The reader will do well to continue with the study, as 
 much interesting and useful material of an advanced na- 
 ture is to be had. 
 
 And so, we come to the end of the book but, it is 
 hoped, 
 
 Only the Beginning of a Study of the Wonderful New 
 
 Art. 
 
WIRELESS CODES. 
 
 WHEN-Two are s/i-lst i's 
 
 W H EN-Tfoee ore ^en /st ,s Mt-se t gfConfin ntQ t 
 
 A rv/ 
 N 
 
 Philip E EJelwan. 
 
 Note: The Navy code has been superseded by the Con- 
 tinental code, and is no longer used. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 Foreword. 5 
 
 Chapter 1. Nature and Theory of Wireless Transmission of 8 
 Intelligence. 
 
 Relation of Stations Effect of Earth Function of Aerial 
 
 Theories of Transmission Height of Aerial Directive 
 Aerials Comparison to Wave Motions Absorption 
 Effect of Distance Definition and Comparison of Long and 
 Short Waves Items which affect Transmission Night 
 and Day Transmission Composition of Earth Effect of 
 Daylight Effect of Weather Drawbacks to Advancement 
 of Art Interferences Tuned Waves Forced Oscilla- 
 tions Static Disturbances Electrical Storms Radiant 
 Energy. 
 
 Chapter 2. Aerials. 18 
 
 Definition of wave length and waves Comparison to light 
 waves Principle of aerial Forms Dimensions Merits 
 of long and short waves and wave lengths Location of 
 aerial Aerial supports Makeshift aerials Natural sup- 
 ports Poles Construction Duplex aerials Dimen- 
 sions Length of aerials Effective length Length for 
 200 meter wave length Increase of capacity to compensate 
 for short aerial Arrangement of aerial wires Number of 
 conductors Damping Definition Advantages of plural 
 conductors Spacing Umbrella aerial Modified umbrella 
 aerial Directive aerial Construction Flat top aerials 
 
 Advantages L type T type Directive and Loop 
 types Lead ins Constructional details Insulators 
 Leads ins Arrangements of aerial Spreaders Assembl- 
 ing Conductors Joints Size of wires Pulleys and 
 ropes Lead in wires Poles Bamboo Jointed wood 
 
 Truss work Iron pipes Dimensions Guy wires 
 Insulation. 
 
 Chapter 3. Grounds and Lighting Protection. 39 
 
 Importance of good ground Grounds in water Imbedded 
 grounds Special forms Chemical grounds Connections 
 to gas and water pipes Lightning ground Indirect 
 ground Makeshifts The ground wire Protection from 
 lightning Experiments with static currents An efficient 
 Lightning Protection. 
 
Page 
 Chapter 4. General Features of Transmitters. Resonance. 46 
 
 Tuned transmitters Direct and indirect coupling Nature 
 of transmitting circuits Vibrations Close coupled trans- 
 mitter Electrical dimensions The oscillatory circuit 
 
 Adjustment Primary and secondary circuits Degree of 
 coupling Function of condenser Spark gap Inductance 
 
 Relation of circuits Mutual inductance Resonance 
 Definition Adjustments Time of vibration Variation 
 of wave length Resonant relations in antenna circuit 
 Varying wave lengths Use of inductance and capacity 
 Resonance with condenser circuit Beats Inter-dependence 
 of circuits Increasing or decreasing wave length with a 
 given aerial Harmonic effect Tuning Order of adjust- 
 ments Resistance Surface conduction Heat loss 
 Effect on sharp tuning Sharp tuning Beats Double 
 wave length of transmitter "Pick me up wave" Reson- 
 ance curves Interference. 
 
 Chapter 5. Planning the Transmitter. Calculation of Wave 67 
 length, Capacity, and Circuits. 
 
 Cost of station Range of transmission Varying condi- 
 tions Range in daylight Winter Effect of storms 
 Standard transmission range Selection of apparatus 
 Spark coils and transformers Types of transformers 
 Wireless transformers Relation of inductances and capacity 
 for resonance Amount of capacity necessary Calculation 
 of condenser capacity Simple formula Example Effect 
 of frequency Effect of Voltage Effect of power Volt- 
 age used in charging condenser Simplified calculation of 
 wave length Meaning of formula and applications Ex- 
 amples Capacity and Inductance to obtain standard 200 
 meter wave length Spark gap Requirements for good 
 design Antenna circuit Capacity of antenna wires Ap- 
 portionment of antenna wires to get length for a given set 
 Design for aerial No. of conductors necessary for given 
 power Location of station Operating room. 
 
 Chapter 6. Transformers Spark Coils. 81 
 
 Standard experimental size Principle of transformer 
 Design The core Eddy and Hysteresis loss Flux leak- 
 age Data for transformers 100 watt to 2 K. W. Con- 
 structional details Core Primary Secondary Mag- 
 netic leakage cores Materials Insulation Section 
 winder Assembling Mounting Data for reactance coils 
 
 Spark coil construction Data for coils to give % inch to 
 10 inch spark for wireless purposes Cores Primary 
 Secondary Insulation. 
 
 Chapter 7. Auxiliary Apparatus. Keys. Electrolytic Interrupter. 93 
 Kickback Prevention. Aerial Switches. 
 
 Electrolytic interrupter construction Line protector 
 Kickbacks Construction of triple preventer Keys Con- 
 struction for a heavy key Attachments to handle heavy 
 
Page 
 
 currents Magnetic key Magnetic blowout key Oil 
 contacts Aerial switches Automatic aerial switch 
 Automatic switch for large stations Wiring for wireless 
 stations. 
 
 Chapter 8. Transmitting Condensers. 103 
 
 Principle of condensers Nature of charge Stages in the 
 charging - Behavior of capacity Calculation (simplified) 
 for capacity for a given condenser Examples How to 
 make a, condenser with a desired capacity Table of capaci- 
 ties required for spark coils Standard condenser Dielec- 
 tric table Design for condensers Condensers for high 
 voltages Series connections to increase puncture strength 
 
 Structural considerations Materials Details Material 
 for coatings Arrangement Soldering tin foil Assembl- 
 ing Insulating oils Simple experimental condensers 
 Variable condenser Connections. 
 
 Chapter 9. Calculation of Inductance, Construction of Helix and 116 
 Oscillation Transformer. Standard Dimensions. Loading coils. 
 Simple formula for inductances Examples Formula for 
 helix Formula for flat coils Mutual inductance Formula 
 
 Standard helix Construction Inductance of standard 
 helix Standard oscillation transformer Construction 
 Inductance in microhenrys of primary and secondary Con- 
 struction for loading coils Size for conductors. 
 
 Chapter 10. Design and Construction of Spark Gaps. 125 
 
 Purpose of the gap Design Size of electrodes Length 
 of gap Construction of gap Flanges Construction of 
 series gaps Construction of a rotary spark gap Advan- 
 tages of rapid spark rate Simple experimental rotary gap 
 Simple gaps Compressed gas gaps Care Adjustment. 
 
 Chapter 11. Radiation Indicators. Hot Wire Ammeter. Shunt 133 
 Resonator. Wave Meter. 
 
 Definition Function of indicators Uses Wave meter 
 
 Construction and use Hot wire ammeter Principal and 
 use Tuning with meter as indicator Construction of hot 
 wire ammeter Advantages Construction and operation 
 of a shunt resonator Cost of apparatus Measurements. 
 
 Chapter 12. Continuous Waves. Wireless Telephone. Quenched 145 
 Spark. High Frequency Alternators. 
 
 A simple arc system for telegraphy and telephony Design 
 and construction Operation How to make a Lepel 
 quenched arc set (sparkless system) The Telefunken 
 Quenched Gap Theory and advantages of the quenched 
 spark Goldschmidt, Galletti and Telefunken Alternators. 
 
 Chapter 13. The Receiving Station. 156 
 
 Simple receiving apparatus Function of the parts Record- 
 ing apparatus Telephone receiver for wireless receiving 
 
Page 
 
 Effect of frequency Why a detector is essential Sensi- 
 tiveness of instruments The received signal Energy re- 
 quired Energy received Table of sensitiveness for 
 detectors Tuning Requirements for the receiving station. 
 
 Chapter 14. Detectors. Solid Rectifiers. 161 
 
 Standard detectors Forms of detectors Composition of 
 solid rectifiers Action of rectifiers List of sensitive min- 
 erals and materials for detectors Use of crystal Mount- 
 ings Most popular detector Pericon detector Univer- 
 sal detector Constructional details Materials Silicon 
 
 Carborundum Galena Molybdenite Iron pyrites 
 Selection of minerals Patented detectors Crystal mount- 
 ing Solder for crystals Substitute for solder Size of 
 crystal Pericon sets Requisites for universal detector 
 Points for detectors Mechanical movements and adjust- 
 ments Clamp and multipoint types Care and adjustment 
 
 Renewing crystals Buzzer test Contact experiment. 
 
 Chapter 15. Telephone Receivers. Detectors for Continuous 172 
 Waves. Einthoven Galvanometer. Measuring the Intensity 
 of Signals. 
 
 Theory, construction and operation of an Einthoven Galvano- 
 meter Sensitiveness of the galvanometer Principle and 
 construction of choppers for receiving circuits Receivers 
 for arc system Telephone receivers Requisites Advan- 
 tages of a single receiver Why ordinary low resistance 
 telephone receivers are. not suitable Rewound receivers 
 Diaphrams for wireless purposes What the resistance really 
 means Desirable resistance Care and adjustment Test 
 for magnetism Standard receivers Advantages of conse- 
 quent pole type Size of wire Size of diaphram How 
 the receiver operates Measuring the intensity of received 
 signals. 
 
 Chapter 16. Tuning. Interference Prevention. 181 
 
 Similarity of transmitting and receiving circuits Resistance 
 of detector Why absolute tuning is not possible Effect of 
 locality Disadvantage of close tuning Requirements for 
 receiving set Ideal arrangement Importance of tuning 
 Elaborate circuits Interference What interference is 
 Natural and artificial interference Remedies for natural 
 disturbances Hook-ups What tuning means Factors in 
 tuning Adjustments Short and long waves Detuning 
 
 In-tuning Advantages of lopped aerial Differential and 
 Bridge methods Tuning circuits Simple tuned circuit 
 Variable tuned circuits Closed circuits Variable coupl- 
 ing Three slide tuner Bridge system of interference pre- 
 vention Loose coupler Theory and operation of loose 
 coupler Tuning with the loose coupler Series inductance 
 
 Increasing the wave length Decreasing the wave length 
 
 Fessenden Differential system of interference prevention 
 Circuit and operation Loop aerial connection. 
 
Page 
 
 Chapter 17. Construction of Receiving Condensers. Fixed and 193 
 Variable. 
 
 Requirements for receiving condensers Dielectric materials 
 
 Calculation for condensers Variable step arrangement 
 Parallel arrangement Determination of proper capacity for 
 receiving circuit Construction of fixed condensers Uses 
 of fixed condensers Substitute for large variable condenser 
 
 Construction of units Testing Korda air condensers 
 Construction of the variable condenser Rotary plates 
 Fixed plates Assembling Mounting Simple variable 
 condensers Capacity of variable condensers Calculation. 
 
 Chapter 18. Construction of Tuning Inductances. Loose Coup- 202 
 ler. Variometers. Tuners. 
 
 General requirements Materials Insulation Wires 
 Importance of insulation Construction of slide type tuners 
 
 Cores The windings Spacing wires Core ends 
 Base Sliders Requirements Construction Slider 
 rods Loading coils Standard tuner Construction and 
 operation of a Variometer Construction of a loose coupler 
 
 Primary Core Heads for primary Base Secondary 
 
 Slider Mountings Couplers for differential circuit 
 Condenser for differential circuit Pancake type Uses for 
 the several types. 
 
 Chapter 19. Conclusion. The Rights of the Experimenter. 213 
 
 Arrangement of apparatus Connections Field for experi- 
 ments The new wireless law What it means to the ex- 
 perimenter Its effect Letter from the Commissioner of 
 Navigation Restrictions Licenses Power Wave 
 length Inter-state transmission Receiving Stations 
 Secrecy of messages Sharp and pure waves Penalties 
 
 Fines How to comply with the law Advantages of the 
 duplex aerial and standard designs under the new law Pat- 
 ents Concerning infringement Liability to prosecution 
 Field for improvements Taking out patents Number of 
 wireless patents in force Learning the codes Studying 
 the art. 
 
 Wireless Codes, Morse, Continental, and Navy. 219 
 
1916 SUPPLEMENT. 
 
 AUTHOR'S NOTE. Previous editions of Experimental Wire- 
 less Stations have been distributed to and welcomed in all parts 
 of the world. Thousands of readers have been kind enough to 
 say that they have gained much from the book. Many, indeed, 
 have voluntarily sent photographs and descriptions of their suc- 
 cess after following the directions. The book has won on its 
 merits and has attained a wide influence. 
 
 The radio art is still in the process of evolution. Experi- 
 mental work continues to keep well ahead of commercial 
 practice. What appears wonderfully important today may be 
 of only historical interest tomorrow. Still the fundamental 
 principles remain. Behind the novel forms of commercial ap- 
 paratus continually brought out and inside of the nicely polished 
 boxes you will find the same coils, condensers and simple appa- 
 ratus described in this book. 
 
 The present supplement aims to append notes which will 
 bring the book right up to the present time. Much of the 
 material here presented has not been published before in any 
 form. Attention is called to the patent index, which demanded 
 considerable expense and labor from the author. It should, 
 however, save the readers much time and money. Copies of the 
 patents may be found in all large public libraries or can be 
 purchased for 5 cents each. They are the key to the art, and 
 often a single paper will contain all that is known about a par. 
 ticular subject. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 RAILROAD WIRELESS 
 AUTOMOBILE WIRELESS 
 AEROPLANE WIRELESS 
 WIRELESS COMPASS 
 TELEMECHANICS 
 BALANCING AERIALS 
 GROUND AERIALS 
 RADIATION RESISTANCE 
 HETERODYNE RECEIVER 
 VACUUM VALVES 
 AUDION 
 PLIOTRON 
 AMPLIFIERS 
 
 ULTRA AUDION 
 AUDION GENERATOR 
 TRANSCONTINENTAL WIRE- 
 LESS TELEPHONE 
 LONG WAVE STATIONS 
 LONG WAVE TUNERS 
 TIME SIGNALS 
 WEATHER SIGNAL CODE 
 U. S. WIRELESS PATENTS 
 (Most complete list issued 
 from the beginning to the 
 present) 
 MISCELLANEOUS NOTES 
 
 Copyright 1916 by Philip E. Edelman. All rights reserved. 
 
1916 SUPPLEMENT. 
 
 RAILROAD WIRELESS. 
 
 Railroad wireless telegraphy and telephony differs in 
 no way from radiocommunication for other purposes 
 except that the aerial consists of two or three wires 
 suspended just a little above the train car while the 
 ground is through the trucks to the rails. Couplings 
 are provided for the aerial between cars. The Delaware 
 and Lackawanna Railroad has had much success with 
 such moving stations in conjunction with a few fixed 
 land stations and communication is regularly established 
 with the moving trains both ways, even when the train is 
 passing through a tunnel. 
 
 AUTOMOBILE WIRELESS. 
 
 Successful communication may be established over 
 several miles with a small wireless station on an auto- 
 mobile, using a small aerial suspended a few feet above 
 or within the top and using the metal body of the car 
 as a counterbalance in lieu of a ground. For army use, 
 the automobile is merely used to transport and contain 
 the apparatus and a portable aerial is rapidly erected 
 when communication is to be established. 
 
 AEROPLANE WIRELESS. 
 
 Wireless communication is successfully used on 
 aeroplanes to communicate to military bases from the 
 air or enemy territory. The apparatus comprises a small 
 sending and receiving station of light weight. The 
 receivers are provided with sound protectors but receiv- 
 ing is less successful than sending because of propeller 
 
Supplement. 227 
 
 noise. The aerial is generally mounted on the planes 
 and a counterpoise or additional aerial is used instead of 
 a ground. Hanging aerials from reels, etc., are con- 
 sidered dangerous and obsolete. The total weight of the 
 equipment need not be over 50 pounds. Use of the wire- 
 less to direct gun fire and report troop movements has 
 been tried with some success. 
 
 WIRELESS COMPASS. 
 
 The Bellini and Tosi compass, of which a very few 
 made by the Marconi Co., are at present in use, utilizes an 
 almost closed triangular oscillating antenna which radiates 
 and also receives the strongest in its own plane and the 
 least at right angles thereto. Two partially closed 
 looped aerials are placed at right angles to each other 
 and each is connected to a primary of a loose coupler 
 having two primaries at right angles to each other and 
 a single secondary winding which is rotatable therein. 
 For any position of this secondary winding the received 
 energy will be proportionately due to the two primaries 
 so that by observing when the received signals are 
 strongest the sending station can be located within two 
 or three degrees. This is most useful in foggy weather. 
 For sending the same arrangement is used with a trans- 
 mitting oscillator connected to the two aerials in the 
 same manner so that signals can be sent out strongest in 
 a desired direction. International radio regulations re- 
 quire such stations to use small power and low wave- 
 lengths, this being necessary in order to avoid interfer- 
 ence with other communications. 
 
 The set uses no ground connection and is shown in 
 figure 82. The aerials A, B, respectively are connected to 
 the primaries A', B', respectively of a loose coupler 
 
228 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 7051 
 
 FIG. 
 
 HETERODYNE RECEIVER 
 
Supplement. 229 
 
 called a goniometer. The secondary S, wound on a 
 spherical core connects to an ordinary detector circuit 
 and is movable by means on handle R which carries a 
 pointer so that degrees may be read on a scale Q. In 
 practice a slightly elaborated arrangement is used. For 
 purposes of demonstration it is not difficult to rig up an 
 outfit of this kind. 
 
 With the Telefunken compass an ordinary antenna 
 on a ship may be used in conjunction with shore sta- 
 tions. Thirty-two separate aerials arranged in the form 
 of an umbrella are used at the shore station for sending, 
 a rotatable switch being provided so that each antenna 
 may be separately and successively connected to the 
 sending apparatus. Aboard the ship the direction is 
 determined by comparing signal strengths. Various 
 other arrangements have also been proposed but none 
 appear to have come into use up to the present time. 
 
 HETERODYNE RECEIVER. 
 
 This receiving method originated by R. Fessenden 
 permits the tone of the received signals to be varied at 
 will, thus aiding in overcoming interference, and also 
 slightly increases the sensitiveness of the received sig- 
 nals. It consists (Fig. 83) essentially of an ordinary 
 receiving set which is coupled with a local miniature 
 sending set such as an arc or audion high frequency 
 oscillator. If for example the incoming signals have 
 a frequency of 300,000 and the local oscillator is ad- 
 justed to a frequency of 300,516 the interaction sets up 
 beats by interference which give a musical tone of 516 
 frequency in the head receivers. This method is particu- 
 larly useful for reception from undamped wave stations 
 but may also be used with spark oscillations. 
 
230 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 TELEMECHANICS. 
 
 Wireless controlled torpedoes, boats, fog guns, etc., 
 have been successfully experimented with so that ap- 
 plications may be expected to come into use soon. Most 
 of this work has been done with the use of a coheror 
 receptor and various mechanical switch and tuning ar- 
 rangements. It is now possible, however, to use the 
 more sensitive audion and amplified circuits already 
 mentioned for this purpose. A simply made outfit for 
 demonstrating the various possible applications is de- 
 scribed in chapter 13 of the book "Experiments" by the 
 author which may be obtained for $1.50. Reference to 
 the patent index in this supplement will give the reader 
 the key to the results of previous workers on this sub- 
 ject. 
 
 BALANCING AERIALS. 
 
 The new Marconi duplex stations are to use a bal- 
 ancing aerial at the receiving station to overcome inter- 
 ference from the sending end of the station a number of 
 miles away which is in simultaneous use. This is simply 
 an aerial placed at right angles to the receiving aerial 
 and of lesser height which is coupled to the main aerial 
 through a loose coupler in such a way that the energy 
 received by the one aerial is neutralized by that received 
 by the other from the strong nearby station. The large 
 aerial receives the long distance signals as usual but the 
 balancing aerial being both lower and at right angles 
 does not receive enough energy from the distant station 
 to deter the reception of signals therefrom. A single 
 horizontal wire suffices for the balancing aerial. 
 
Supplement. 231 
 
 GROUND AERIALS. 
 
 Experiments with grounded aerials show that sig- 
 nals may be received for distances of at least 3,000 miles 
 with an ordinary receiving set by simply using a bare 
 or insulated wire spread upon or supported a few feet 
 above the ground as an aerial with a counterpoise. A 
 single wire has been found to be the best especially if a 
 Y is connected to its ends and such an antenna has also 
 been found to be directive. The counterpoise is best 
 made exactly like the aerial and arranged opposite it so 
 that the receiving set is at the middle of a symmetrically 
 placed conductor adjacent to the ground. For sending 
 purposes such an arrangement has not been found ef- 
 fective except over a short distance. 
 
 RADIATION RESISTANCE. 
 
 This term originated with J. S. Stone and means the 
 equivalent resistance which would consume the same 
 energy as that withdrawn from the sending antenna by 
 radiation. It is often used and according to R. Rueden- 
 berg is approximately equal to 
 
 1,600 (height from earth to center of capacity of antenna) 2 
 
 (wave length) 2 
 ohms, the meter being the unit of length. 
 
 VACUUM VALVES-AMPLIFIERS, DETECTORS, 
 AND OSCILLATORS. 
 
 Recently vacuum valves have come into general use 
 for detecting and amplifying signals. There are several 
 types of these bulbs, all of which depend substantially on 
 
Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 the same operating principles, the difference being in 
 the details of construction and degree of vacuum em- 
 ployed. 
 
 FLEMING VALVE. 
 
 The Fleming valve, one of the first of these, consists 
 simply of a miniature electric light bulb with a filament 
 and a metal plate near it as shown in fig. 84. In use, 
 
 FIG 66. 
 
 current may pass from the filament to the plate but not 
 reversely so that the device acts as a rectifier. It is not 
 very sensitive and relatively few are in use now. The 
 kenotron is a similar device which is evacuated so that 
 less gas is left in the bulb. The kenotron is very highly 
 evacuated and built for larger current but is not used 
 for wireless purposes at present. 
 
Supplement. 
 
 233 
 
 AUDION. 
 
 The audion (fig. 89) is like the previously described 
 device except that a grid, which is simply a piece of bent 
 wire or metal screen or plate with holes, is placed be- 
 
 tween the filament and the metal plate or wing. The 
 audion has a double filament, only one filament of which 
 is heated at a time, the other being saved for use when 
 the first burns out. This filament is usually connected 
 to a 6 volt storage battery through a small rheostat. 
 
234 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 Separated from the filament by about J^ inch is the plate 
 and between the two at the middle and insulated from 
 both is the grid. The plate is about % inch square and 
 of sheet nickel in the size used as a detector. The whole 
 is sealed in a glass bulb and evacuated so that only a 
 little gas is left. Various other forms have been made 
 with two plates and grids, in larger sizes, with cylind- 
 rical plates, etc., but the principle of operation is the 
 same in all types. The device called the pliotron is 
 similar in all respects except that the bulb is very highly 
 evacuated. Experimental bulbs have also been made 
 in which mercury vapor is introduced into the bulb after 
 it has been evacuated. 
 
 LIEBEN-REISZ AMPLIFIER. 
 
 The Reisz gas tube as described in U. S. patent 
 1,142,625 is shown in fig. 85. The circuit in which it 
 is used is given in fig. 86. T 1 and T 2 are iron core step 
 up transformers. The device is analogous to the audion 
 which is better known and will be understood from dis- 
 cussions of the latter device. 
 
 PLIOTRON. CASCADE AMPLIFIER. 
 
 This device has two plates, a grid of fine wire 
 wrapped around a support F (fig. 87) and a filament 
 held in this support. It is very highly evacuated so that 
 much higher voltages must be used with it than in the 
 case of the audion. It can be built in larger sizes than 
 the audion for use as an undamped wave generator or 
 relay and is more constant, so that whereas audions vary 
 widely in characteristics, these more highly evacuated 
 bulbs are nearly identical and many of them may be con- 
 
Supplement. 
 
 235 
 
 nected in parallel. Two such devices connected in 
 cascade for receiving radio signals with an amplifica- 
 tion as high as 1,000 times are shown in fig. 88. L 1 
 and L 2 are the primary and secondary of an air core 
 
 PL/ or fto N 
 
 CASCADE HAO/O 
 
 transformer. The first bulb detects and amplifies the 
 incoming oscillations and the second bulb again amplifies 
 the previously amplified oscillations. The battery B' 
 must afford several hundred volts and the battery B" 
 is required to charge the grid. A similar circuit may be 
 used with ordinary audion bulbs except that batteries B ' ' 
 arc not required. 
 
236 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION. 
 
 It should be remembered that there are two distinct 
 actions of this class of valves, the one holding for bulbs 
 containing appreciable gas so that ionization can occur 
 by collision and the other taking place in bulbs so highly 
 evacuated as to be almost free from gas so that a purely 
 electronic action occurs. The first class of bulbs may be 
 recognized by the blue glow which occurs just beyond 
 the sensitive and operating adjustment as in the audion. 
 The Lieben-Reisz, Audio-tron and similar tubes are also 
 of the first class. The second class embraces bulbs such 
 as the pliotron in which a pure electron discharge occurs 
 from the heated cathode or filament. The second class 
 does not rely upon residual gas as a conducting medium 
 as in devices of the first class. 
 
 The hot filament in these devices emits electrons. In 
 elementary static electricity it will be remembered that 
 like charges repel and unlike attract; negative repels 
 negative for instance. The electron may be considered 
 as the smallest possible particle of electricity, the atom 
 of electricity so to speak, and furthermore it is always 
 negative. Hence if an electron comes near a negative 
 charge or a piece of metal charged negatively by a bat- 
 tery the electron will be repelled, or on the other hand 
 the same piece of metal if charged positively will at- 
 tract the electron to it. 
 
 Now in a highly evacuated bulb containing filament, 
 grid, and plate, the resistance between the filament and 
 grid or plate when the filament is cold is very high, and 
 a pressure of 100 volts for example can send no current 
 across such a path. As soon as the filament is heated, 
 however, electrons are emitted from the hot cathode and 
 
Supplement. 237 
 
 fill the surrounding space. As soon as the space is filled, 
 however, additional electrons which are emitted by the 
 filament cathode are repelled by the electrons already 
 in the space and are absorbed again by the cathode. If 
 now the grid, which is between the plate and the fila- 
 ment is negatively charged by a battery still more elec- 
 trons will be repelled and sent back to the filament, but 
 on the other hand if this grid is positively charged the 
 electrons will be attracted to it and a larger current will 
 flow from the filament. This is the case for the pliotron. 
 
 When, however, there is gas present, as in the audion, 
 the electrons in passing from the filament to the plate 
 ionize the gas, that is split it up into elementary parts 
 carrying electric charges so that the gas becomes a 
 conductor. Now some of the charges of the ionized gas 
 are positive and these partly neutralize the electrons 
 which have been projected into the space by the filament. 
 Also if a positive charge is applied to the grid the elec- 
 trons from the filament will be attracted and pass more 
 rapidly. In so doing they produce more ions in the gas 
 and the action continues more electrons pass the grid 
 and more ionization takes place. Now every time ioniza- 
 tion occurs or increases the electrons in the space are 
 reduced so that a much larger current can flow from the 
 filament. Only a small amount of gas need be present 
 for this purpose. In fact if too much gas is present 
 there will be too much ionization and too large a current 
 will flow giving a blue glow and spoiling the relaying 
 effect. 
 
 On such a basis we can understand what happens in 
 the tube. Fig. 89 shows the ordinary audion circuit. 
 Both detection as in a crystal rectifier and amplification 
 of the received energy by trigger action occur. In use 
 
238 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 the filament is brought to incandescence and tuning ad- 
 justments are made until the desired signals are brought 
 in. The incoming signals are embodied in oscillations 
 and these are rectified between the filament and grid. 
 One-half cycle passes, the other cannot because the hot 
 filament cold grid is uni-directional. In the Fleming 
 valve this is all, but in the audion under consideration 
 amplification now occurs. The battery B 2 causes current 
 to pass from the plate to the filament but by the action 
 already explained the negatively charged grid decreases 
 it. When this current decreases the change registers 
 on the head phones and a loud response results which 
 is much stronger than would result from the rectification 
 alone. The potential on the grid caused by the incoming 
 oscillations controls the larger current passing from the 
 plate to the filament and through the phones to give the 
 signal. A small increase of the potential on the grid 
 means in practice a large change in the current passing 
 between the grid and filament, and this in turn causes a 
 corresponding change in the current passing through the 
 phones by way of the plate to filament circuit. 
 
 This device generally works best just below the point 
 which causes a blue glow to appear. The filament should 
 not be lighted when the set is not in use because this re- 
 sults in a waste of current from the high voltage battery 
 and deteriorates the filament. When the filament is 
 lighted and the device is ready to use, the high voltage 
 battery causes a continual flow of current through the 
 bulb: the incoming oscillations merely cause this current 
 to vary. 
 
 EFFECT OF MAGNET ON AUDION. 
 
 If a magnet, permanent or electromagnet, is brought 
 near an audion in operation various effects may be pro- 
 
Supplement. 239 
 
 duced. Sometimes this merely causes the blue glow to 
 appear. In other cases the bulb starts to send pulsations 
 through the phones at a rate which gives musical tones 
 which may be made to run all the way up and down the 
 scale by proper motion of the magnet. If, however, the 
 magnet is brought in the proper plane the thermionic 
 stream can be concentrated so that in very many cases 
 the bulb will work better than ever and give an increased 
 amplification. This may be quickly found by trial. 
 
 THE ULTRA-AUDION RECEIVER. 
 
 De Forests' ultra-audion is a form of heterodyne 
 circuit combined in one instrument. It is an ordinary 
 audion detector with a receiving circuit (fig. 90) in 
 which the inductance L is large (secondary of loose 
 coupler wound with many turns of No. 30 to 36 wire) 
 while the condenser C' is only about .0002 microfarad 
 in capacity. The condenser VC is also made small. The 
 electron flow in the audion used in this circuit is auto- 
 matically unbalanced because of this system of induc- 
 tance and capacity so that continuous oscillations are set 
 up. These oscillations are strengthened by the variable 
 condenser C". Any audion bulb may be connected up 
 in this manner to receive undamped wave signals, for 
 when the capacities are adjusted so that the audion sets 
 up oscillations slightly differing in frequency from those 
 received, beats result which are heard in the head re- 
 ceivers. 
 
 Often an ordinary audion in a common receiving set 
 will oscillate in such manner if only the filament is 
 burned slightly brighter than usual. One may ascertain 
 that the bulb is oscillating by touching any portion of the 
 metallic circuit between L and C' whereupon a sound 
 
240 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 will be heard in the telephone receivers if the bulb is 
 oscillating. For receiving from spark stations the bulb 
 is often best when in the non-oscillating condition as 
 when oscillating in the above manner the musical tone 
 
 40 
 
 is 
 
 'o 
 <o 
 
 I 
 
 ^n 
 
 T/=?A AUDI ON F/6* SO. 
 
 -^m^ 
 
 Microphone I- 
 
 ^ AUDI ON 
 
 of the sending spark becomes ragged so that a louder 
 but indistinct sound results. This is perhaps the most 
 sensitive arrangement for detection which is at present 
 available as it affords a combined detector and amplifier 
 as well as a local oscillator. 
 
Supplement. 241 
 
 AUDION AS UNDAMPED WAVE GENERATOR. 
 
 A suitable circuit for obtaining undamped waves 
 from an audion bulb is shown in fig. 95. A microphone 
 may be employed as shown so that for demonstration 
 purposes the arrangement shown may serve as a wire- 
 less telephone transmitter for some little distance. The 
 filament of a bulb intended for a detector will, however, 
 rapidly waste away, so it is best to obtain a bulb con- 
 structed for this purpose. Any frequency can be ob- 
 tained over a wide range by adjustments of the con- 
 denser capacity. 
 
 ARMSTRONG CIRCUIT. 
 
 The Armstrong circuit combines the principle of the 
 singing microphone with the audion so that a part of the 
 amplified current reacts on the current between the grid 
 and filament and thus causes a still further amplification. 
 This is best accomplished by means of a coupling coil 
 built like a loose coupler. If this coil is made with an 
 air core (no iron) the radio frequency oscillations will 
 be amplified. Similarly by the use of an iron core in- 
 duction coil the audio frequency current through the 
 telephone will be amplified. It is possible to amplify 
 either or both at the same time. In fig. 91 the complete 
 circuit for a long wave set using the oscillating and 
 amplifying audion is given. Either spark or undamped 
 wave sets can be heard with this arrangement. A less 
 complicated circuit which will serve about as well is 
 shown in fig. 92. Compare with the ultra-audion, fig. 90. 
 
242 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION. LONG WAVE UNDAMPED 
 WAVE RECEPTOR. RANGE 14,000 METERS. 
 
 Few of the readers have the facilities to construct 
 the bulbs, but if one has a bulb the amplifying circuit may 
 be readily made at small cost. When properly adjusted 
 a single bulb amplifier of this type is as good or better 
 than the usual two step amplifier employing two bulbs. 
 
 The values of the condenser capacities and maximum 
 battery voltages are given in the diagram of fig. 91. The 
 inductances are made by winding a single layer of silk 
 covered wire on paper tubes and for the various coils 
 suitable dimensions follow. 
 
 L 1 ; core 6" diameter by 25" long wound with No. 24 
 S. C. C. wire, with taps taken at ten, five, and then every 
 inch of length. 
 
 Loose coupler L 2 , L 3 . Primary L 2 ; 12" long by 6" 
 diameter with No. 24 S. C. C. Secondary L 3 ; 12" long 
 by 5%" diameter wound with No. 32 S. C. C. 
 
 L 4 and L 5 are each 5" in diameter and 30" long, and 
 wound full of No. 32 S. C. C. Taps are taken every 
 inch at the last 5 inches. 
 
 Loose coupler L 7 , L 6 . L 7 is 8" long by 5" diameter. 
 L 6 is 7%" long by 4^" diameter. Both cores are wound 
 full of No. 30 S. C. C. wire. 
 
 The condensers should be of the rotary plate type 
 and C 2 which is used at very small values should have a 
 streak of graphite rubbed between its binding posts to 
 serve as a high resistance shunt which dissipates high 
 voltage accumulations on the condenser from static dis- 
 turbances. 
 
Supplement. 243 
 
 ADJUSTMENT. 
 
 Short circuit L 5 and place C 3 at its maximum capa- 
 city. Have L 2 , L 3 all in and vary L* and the other con- 
 densers, also L 1 until the signals are brought in best. 
 Now place L 5 in and adjust the number of turns used as 
 well as C 3 until the loudest signal strength is obtained. 
 Mark the adjustments for future reference and make 
 any other necessary changes by means of L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , C 3 , 
 and C 1 . When the bulb is replaced with a new one, the 
 adjustments may have to be repeated as new valves will 
 be required. If siren effects bother, ground one terminal 
 of battery B. 
 
 Fig. 92 will now be readily understood. The loose 
 coupler L 2 , L 3 is made with variable coupling, L 2 is 5" 
 in diameter by 4%" long. L 3 is 4%" m diameter by 
 5" long. Both cores are wound full of No. 28 S. C. C. 
 B 2 should be adjustable up to 40 volts. The range will 
 depend on the loose coupler used between the aerial and 
 detecting circuit and is more suited to wave lengths under 
 6,000 meters. 
 
 CASCADE CIRCUITS. 
 
 Audions may also be used in cascade to amplify 
 either the audio or radio frequency currents. Pliotrons 
 can also be used in a similar manner. There is a limit 
 to the number of steps that can be used, however, as the 
 amplified current soon causes distortion, so in practice 
 not more than three bulbs in cascade have been found 
 to be practicable. In the cascade circuits it will be noted 
 that the first step is the familiar circuit while the ampli- 
 fied current of this step (at audio frequency in the audion 
 arrangement) operates the grid filament circuit of the 
 
244 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 next step through an iron core inductive coupling; then 
 this is repeated in the next step in the same manner. 
 The final current may be large enough to operate a loud 
 speaking telephone or even a relay or milliameter. 
 Often signals with any of the audion circuits have been 
 so loud that they could be directly recorded on a wax 
 cylinder phonograph by simply holding the telephone 
 receiver against the recording diaphram. 
 
 CASCADE CIRCUIT CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Fig. 93 shows how to connect two ordinary audion 
 bulbs in cascade to amplify the audio frequency. Com- 
 pare with fig. 88 and note that these two figures could 
 be combined to still further increase the magnification. 
 The transformer consists of a core i" in diameter and 10" 
 long made up of a bundle of soft iron wires wound with 
 tape. The primary winding consists of one pound of 
 No. 36 S. S. C. wire. Over this the secondary of one 
 and one-half pounds No. 36 S. C. C. wire is wound. 
 Amplification up to about 100 may be expected. 
 
 DISADVANTAGES OF AUDION. COMPARISON 
 WITH CRYSTAL DETECTOR. 
 
 The audion detector as now sold is bulky, fragile, 
 and requires frequent care and renewal of batteries, bulb, 
 etc. Many bulbs are not constant and some give annoy- 
 ing siren effects. In very many cases there really is no 
 need to employ any such device for a crystal detector 
 will do as well or better. A well adjusted crystal de- 
 tector is very nearly as sensitive as the best audion de- 
 tector and will bring in most if not all the stations that 
 an audion will. A crystal detector such as galena will 
 
Supplement. 
 
 245 
 
 even detect signals from arc and undamped wave sets 
 under favorable conditions and the author has heard 
 such signals when using such a detector in a receiving 
 circuit containing a variometer coupler which caused the 
 necessary reaction in the circuits. The tone, however, 
 was not musical. 
 
 The audion as an amplifier, is superior, as the usual 
 received signals are amplified to advantage. Indeed the 
 
 FIG 94. 
 
 6 r 
 
 audion may be combined with a good crystal detector to 
 advantage, the one rectifying, the other amplifying the 
 rectified current. 
 
 AUDION WITH CRYSTAL DETECTOR. 
 
 The connections for using an audion with a crystal 
 detector such as galena are shown in fig. 94 and afford 
 an amplification of about 10 times the signal strength 
 obtained with the detector alone. 
 
 OTHER AMPLIFIERS. 
 
 Brown's microphone relay has found slight use. It 
 is connected in place of the phones and amplifies through 
 a microphone contact which controls a local circuit. The 
 telefunken amplifier is similar but employs a number of 
 such telephone-transmitters of special reed type in cas- 
 
246 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 cade so that the amplified current of one circuit actuates 
 the next, etc. A similar device employing a liquid micro- 
 phone instead of a contact device has been brought out 
 by L. Bishop and a few are in use. Microphonic ar- 
 rangements give amplifications of 20 upwards but are 
 difficult to keep in adjustment and in general unreliable. 
 
 TRANSCONTINENTAL WIRELESS 
 TELEPHONE. 
 
 In 1915 wireless telephone, one way communication 
 was established from Arlington, Va., to Paris, France; 
 Honolulu, Hawaii; Colon, Panama, and a few other 
 
 FIG. 36. 
 
 points. No details of the circuits used have been pub- 
 lished at this writing, but on the basis of the author's 
 own independent experiments, previous to the above 
 mentioned tests, it is probable that the circuits employed 
 were of the type shown in fig. 96. There are various 
 modifications for the same result. 
 
Supplement. 247 
 
 In this figure the current from a telephone line is 
 amplified through an audion bulb in the manner already 
 set forth and this amplified current is used to actuate the 
 grid-filament circuit of a large number of highly evacu- 
 ated bulbs connected in parallel and arranged to gener- 
 ate undamped waves after the manner already set forth. 
 An ordinary telephone transmitter may thus be used to 
 vary the strength of the high frequency oscillations set 
 up in several hundred bulbs and where one bulb is shown 
 in the diagram it will be understood that any suitable 
 number of bulbs may be substituted in a similar manner 
 to secure higher power. Continuous radiation occurs in 
 the aerial-ground circuit and this is modified in exact 
 accordance with the voice which causes the original 
 variations of the electrical current which are amplified 
 and made to control the larger current at radio-fre- 
 quency. This will be readily understood by bearing in 
 mind the previous discussions of the parts here com- 
 bined. Any receiving station with a sensitive detector 
 such as an audion with amplifying circuit can receive 
 from such a wireless telephone station and the voice 
 reproduction will be even better than over land lines. 
 
 LONG WAVE LENGTH STATIONS. 
 
 There are only a few stations of very long wave 
 length now in operation and a number of these are of 
 the undamped wave type. Wave lengths of 6,000 to 
 14,000 meters may be employed, though 12,000 meters 
 is the most recent limit for long distance work. It is 
 considered quite a feat for an amateur to hear such sta- 
 tions. This may be easily done, however, either by con- 
 structing a long receiving aerial or by loading an ordinary 
 aerial with inductance. A suitable long wave receiving 
 
248 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 aerial may consist of a single No. 14 wire supported about 
 thirty feet from the ground and 1,000, 3,000 or even 
 5,000 feet long, preferably running in a straight line 
 and insulated at the supports. Another method which 
 may work if conditions are right is to simply connect 
 the aerial terminal of the receiving set to one binding 
 post of a small variable condenser, the other binding post 
 of which is connected to one of the wires of a telephone 
 line. When this is done no telephone conversation can 
 be heard, but the telephone system is used as an aerial 
 and brought to a suitable wave length by means of the 
 series variable condenser. All the other connections and 
 tuning are the same as usual. 
 
 LOOSE COUPLERS FOR LONG WAVE 
 LENGTHS. 
 
 Tuners for long wave lengths simply are made larger 
 with more turns of wire and should be constructed with 
 taps at intervals so that adjustments may be made. To 
 say that a certain tuner has a certain wave length is 
 misleading, as wave length depends upon the product of 
 capacity and inductance as pointed out in the text where- 
 as the tuner itself is only used to supply a portion of the 
 inductance. 
 
 The accompanying table gives data which will serve 
 as a guide in constructing loose couplers of correct 
 dimensions. These were calculated by taking the aver- 
 age capacity of a large number of aerials from the small- 
 est to the largest into account. The variable condenser to 
 be used in the secondary circuit should have a maximum 
 capacity of about .0009 Mfds. If a crystal detector is to 
 be used and about one-third of this if an audion detector 
 
Supplement. 249 
 
 is to be employed. In practice only about three-tenths 
 of the condenser capacity may be needed. More turns 
 are used for the secondary in the case of audion detec- 
 tors because they are potentially operated devices of 
 high resistance and work best with large secondary 
 inductance and small capacity. In any case it is desir- 
 able to add to the wave length by means of series induc- 
 tance rather than shunt capacity as Dr. Austin has found 
 that the efficiency is decreased by the parallel condenser. 
 When considerable inductance is added in this manner 
 the circuit is said to be "stiffened" and this is supposed 
 to slightly reduce trouble from static. See fig. 97. 
 
 Loading coils for long wave lengths may be con- 
 structed in the same way as the primary coils given in 
 the table. In loading a small aerial to a long wave 
 length both the primary and secondary circuits should 
 be loaded as the ordinary secondary of the receiving 
 loose coupler alone is not large enough. The loading 
 coils in the two circuits may be coupled together like 
 loose couplers or separated like straight tuners. The 
 large cores may be made by wrapping many layers of 
 paraffined paper around a cylinder and removing this 
 tube when cold. 
 
 Wave lengths less than the maximum capacity may 
 be had by taking out taps at intervals to a switch. 
 
 TABLE FOR LOOSE COUPLERS AND LOADING 
 COILS. 
 
 WAVE LENGTH. 3,000 METERS. 
 
 Primary: core 4%" long by 4" diameter, tightly 
 
 wound with a single full layer of No. 26 S. S. C. wire. 
 
 Secondary: core 3%" diameter by 4" long, wound 
 
250 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 tightly with a single layer of No. 28 S. C. C. wire for 
 use with crystal detector or with No. 34 for use with 
 audion. 
 
 WAVE LENGTH. 6,000 METERS. 
 
 Primary: core 8" long by 5" diameter wound with 
 single layer of No. 24 S. C. C. wire. 
 
 Secondary: core 7%" long by 4%" diameter, wound 
 with a single layer of No. 30 S. C. C. wire for use with 
 crystal detector or with No. 34 wire for use with audion. 
 
 WAVE LENGTH. 14,000 METERS. 
 
 Primary: core 7%" diameter by 12" long wound 
 tightly with single layer of No. 24 S. C. C. wire. 
 
 Secondary: core 11^2" long by 7" diameter wound 
 with single tight layer of No. 30 S. C. C. wire for crystal 
 detector use or with No. 34 wire for audion circuit. 
 
 With small aerials an additional primary loading coil 
 of similar dimensions may be required in series with the 
 primary coil. An aerial intended for only 200 meters 
 has been successfully loaded to 8,000 meters and has 
 received signals over 4,000 miles with the aid of an 
 amplifying audion detector. 
 
 DEAD ENDS. 
 
 The unused portion of a tuning coil or cover is said to 
 be "dead" and may absorb some energy thus reducing the 
 efficiency. This is almost eliminated by switching ar- 
 rangements which entirely cut out the unused turns. 
 The principle is shown in figure 98 which shows dia- 
 grammatically a form of switch constructed by the 
 author for this purpose. Only the primary is here shown 
 
Supplement. 
 
 251 
 
 as the secondary winding may be arranged in the same 
 way. 
 
 A wide range of wave lengths is thus possible in a 
 single receiving set. The coil is divided into a number 
 of insulated series of turns O, O, etc., which are con- 
 nected to a switch built like a commutator so that con- 
 
 PfMMAf\Y 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 SECONDARY 
 
 FIG. $7 
 
 no. 38 
 
 tacts P, P, P, etc., may successively cause additional 
 turns to be included in the circuit while at the same time 
 unused turns at the other end of the coil are open cir- 
 cuited so that they cannot absorb the energy. Contact 
 with the ground is made through slip ring Q which 
 rotates with the switch. Each contact P, P, is of course 
 insulated from the others and all are placed at equal 
 intervals. 
 
252 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 PLURAL RECEIVING SETS. 
 
 Another plan is to make a number of separate and 
 independent receiving sets or couplers, each exactly right 
 to receive at a certain wave length or from a certain 
 station. A switch is then made to put the desired set 
 in and the others are not in use at such time. 
 
 TRANSMISSION OF TIME SIGNALS BY NAVAL 
 RADIO STATIONS. 
 
 To receive time signals an aerial about 500 feet long 
 is desirable though a much smaller one will do. Appar- 
 atus described in this book will bring in the signals with 
 either a crystal or audion type of detector. The follow- 
 ing new advice is given by the U. S. Dept. of Commerce : 
 
 Time signals are now sent out on the Atlantic coast 
 only through the radio stations at Arlington, Key West, 
 and New Orleans. Signals from Arlington and Key 
 West, which reach a zone formerly served by other coast 
 stations, are sent out every day in the year twice a day, 
 viz, from n -.55 a. m. to noon and from 9.55 to 10 p. m., 
 seventy-fifth meridian time. Time signals from New 
 Orleans are sent out daily, including Sundays and holi- 
 days, commencing at 11.55 a - m -> seventy-fifth meridian 
 time, and ending at noon. 
 
 On the Pacific coast the time signals are sent broad- 
 cast to sea through the naval radio stations at Mare Is- 
 land, Eureka, Point Arguello, and San Diego, Cal., and 
 at North Head, Wash. The controlling clock for each 
 station is in the naval observatory at the Mare Island 
 Navy Yard. Signals from Mare Island are sent out 
 every day from 11.55 to noon, and from 9.55 to 10 p. m., 
 one hundred and twentieth meridian standard time. 
 
Supplement. 253 
 
 Those from North Head, Eureka, Point Arguello, and 
 San Diego are sent out daily, excluding Sundays and 
 holidays, from 11.55 to noon, one hundred and twentieth 
 meridian standard time. 
 
 To get the maximum clearness of signals, the receiv- 
 ing circuit should be tuned to that of the sending station. 
 Arlington and Mare Island send on a 2,5OO-meter wave 
 length, North Head and San Diego on a 2,ooo-meter 
 wave length, Eureka on a i,4OO-meter wave length, 
 Key West and New Orleans on a i,ooo-meter wave 
 length, and Point Arguello on a 75O-meter wave length. 
 
 TRANSMISSION OF WEATHER REPORTS BY 
 NAVAL RADIO STATIONS. 
 
 Through co-operation with local offices of the United 
 States Weather Bureau, weather forecasts are sent broad- 
 cast to sea through naval coast radio stations at certain 
 times, varying with the locality. Storm warnings are 
 sent whenever received and the daily weather bulletins 
 are distributed by the naval radio stations at Arlington, 
 Va., and Key West, Fla., a few minutes after the 10 
 p. m. time signal. These bulletins consist of two parts. 
 
 The first part contains code letters and figures which 
 express the actual weather conditions at 8 p. m., seventy- 
 fifth meridian time, on the day of distribution, at certain 
 points along the eastern coast of North America, one 
 point along the Gulf of Mexico, and one at Bermuda. 
 
 The second part of the bulletin contains a special 
 forecast of the probable winds to be experienced a hun- 
 dred miles or so off shore, made by the United States 
 Weather Bureau, for distribution to shipmasters. The 
 second part of the bulletin also contains warnings of 
 
254 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 severe storms along the coasts, as occasions for such 
 warnings may arise. 
 
 Immediately following this bulletin, a weather bul- 
 letin for certain points along the Great Lakes is sent 
 broadcast by the naval radio station at Arlington, Va., 
 consisting of two parts. The first part contains code let- 
 ters and figures which express the actual weather condi- 
 tions at 8 p. m., seventy-fifth meridian time, on the day 
 of distribution, at certain points along the lakes. The 
 second part of the bulletin contains a special forecast 
 of the probable winds to be experienced on the lakes, 
 during the season of navigation about April 15 to 
 December 10. 
 
 The points for which weather reports are furnished 
 are designated as follows : For Atlantic coast and Gulf 
 points, S= Sydney, T=Nantucket, DB=Delaware 
 Breakwater, H=Hatteras, C= Charleston, K Key 
 West, P=Pensacola, and B= Bermuda; for points on 
 the Great Lakes, Du=Duluth, M=Marquette, U= 
 Sault Ste. Marie, G=Green Bay, Ch=Chicago, L= 
 Alpena, D^Detroit, V=Cleveland, and F=Buffalo. 
 
 All bulletins begin with the letters U. S. W. B. 
 (United States Weather Bureau) and the weather con- 
 ditions follow. The first three figures of a report rep- 
 resent the barometric pressure in inches (002=30.02) ; 
 the next figure, the fourth in sequence, represents the 
 direction of the wind to the eight points of the compass : 
 i=north, 2=northeast, 3=east, 4= southeast, 5=south, 
 6=southwest, 7^=west, 8=northwest, and o=calm. The 
 fifth figure represents the force of the wind on the 
 Beaufort Scale, given on page 255. 
 
Supplement. 
 
 255 
 
 Beaufort Scale of Wind Force. 
 
 Number and designation. 
 
 Statute miles 
 per hour. 
 
 Nautical 
 miles per 
 hour. 
 
 Calm 
 
 to 3 
 
 to 2 . 6 
 
 
 8 
 
 6.9 
 
 2 Light breeze 
 
 13 
 
 11.3 
 
 3 Gentle breeze 
 
 18 
 
 15.6 
 
 
 23 
 
 20.0 
 
 
 28 
 
 24.3 
 
 
 34 
 
 29.5 
 
 7 Moderate gale 
 
 40 
 
 34.7 
 
 8 Fresh gale 
 
 48 
 
 41.6 
 
 
 56 
 
 48.6 
 
 10 Whole gale 
 
 65 
 
 56.4 
 
 1 1 Storm 
 
 75 
 
 65.1 
 
 
 f 90 
 
 78.1 
 
 
 
 
 In order to simplify the code, no provision has been 
 made for wind force greater than 9, strong gale, on the 
 Beaufort Scale. Whenever winds of force greater than 9 
 occur, the number representing them is given in words 
 instead of figures, thus : Ten, eleven, etc. 
 
 Example of Code. 
 
 e . 
 
 U S W B Du 95826 M 97635 U 00443 G 
 Ch 95667 L 00644 D 00842 V 01054 F 01656 
 
 96046 
 
 Translation. 
 
 United States Weather Bureau. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Pressure. 
 
 Wind. 
 
 Direction. | Force.l 
 
 Duluth 
 
 29.58 
 29.76 
 30.04 
 29.60 
 29.56 
 30.06 
 30.08 
 30.10 
 30.16 
 
 1 
 
 NE 
 E 
 SE 
 SE 
 SW 
 SE 
 SE 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 3 
 6 
 7 
 2 
 4 
 4 
 6 
 
 Marquette 
 
 Sault Ste Marie 
 
 Green Bay 
 
 
 Alpena . 
 
 Detroit 
 
 Cleveland 
 
 Buffalo 
 
 
 i See Beaufort scale. 
 
256 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 U. S. PATENTS ON WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY, 
 TELEPHONY, AND CONTROL. 
 
 This is the most complete list obtainable. It should 
 be invaluable to the reader. Patents from 1881 to 
 January i, 1916, are included. 
 
 HOW TO USE THE LIST. 
 
 Look for the subject of interest or the headings that 
 might contain it. Patents considered of particular im- 
 portance have been designated with a * mark. Copies 
 complete of any of these patents can be obtained for 
 5 cents each by addressing the Commissioner of Patents, 
 Washington, D. C. 
 
 GENERAL APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS, BOTH TRANSMIT- 
 TING AND SENDING. 
 
 For any other apparatus or arrangement of circuits consult also this 
 S:neral list, as it includes patents treating of more than one related 
 ea. 
 
 Patents 
 
 numbered : 
 
 586,193 
 
 716,334 
 
 1,123,118* 
 
 1,120,054 
 
 711,266 
 
 711,184 
 
 717,773 
 
 717,769 
 
 717,771 
 
 717,772 
 
 711,183 
 
 711,182 
 
 749,584 
 
 748,597* 
 
 734,048 
 
 730,247* 
 
 743,999 
 
 749,370 
 
 749,131 
 
 737,170* 
 
 800,854 
 
 12,073 
 
 758,842 
 
 706,718 
 
 756,904 
 
 730,819* 
 
 756,719* 
 
 802,981 
 
 805,412 
 
 716,334 
 
 765,298 
 
 706,742* 
 
 710,355 
 
 710,354 
 
 703,842 
 
 768,301* 
 
 710,122 
 
 706,746* 
 
 706,745 
 
 706,743 
 
 706,500 
 
 763,893 
 
 706,741* 
 
 671,406 
 
 711,132* 
 
 11,952 
 
 700,250* 
 
 671,407 
 
 680,001 
 
 757,559* 
 
 687,440 
 
 737,072 
 
 699,158 
 
 795,762 
 
 682,974 
 
 684,706 
 
 706,736* 
 
 684,467 
 
 758,005* 
 
 750,496 
 
 753,863* 
 
 720,568* 
 
 708,071 
 
 609,154* 
 
 711,130 
 
 708,072 
 
 12,168 
 
 703,712 
 
 706,737* 
 
 706,740 
 
 707,064 
 
 717,766 
 
 743,056* 
 
 750,429* 
 
 671,732 
 
 696,715 
 
 685,742 
 
 741,622 
 
 763,772* 
 
 716,203 
 
 717,765 
 
 768,003* 
 
 674,846* 
 
 664,869 
 
 377,879 
 
 691,176 
 
 550,510 
 
 657,224 
 
 651,361 
 
 651,362 
 
 650,255 
 
 651,014 
 
 650,110* 
 
 650,109 
 
 647,009* 
 
 657,222 
 
 711,174* 
 
 644,497 
 
 627,650* 
 
 647,007* 
 
 647,008* 
 
 643,018 
 
 673,553 
 
 673,418 
 
 716,203 
 
 671,403 
 
 929,745 
 
 783,923* 
 
 781,823 
 
 716,000 
 
 962,014* 
 
 934,883" 
 
 935,721 
 
 842,910 
 
 837,616 
 
 837,901* 
 
 841,386 
 
 889,790 
 
 889,792 
 
 884,109* 
 
 889,791 
 
 884,070 
 
 884,076 
 
 957,282* 
 
 884,108 
 
 884,106* 
 
 962,017 
 
 884,071 
 
 899,239 
 
 899,243 
 
 1,129,821 
 
 728,243 
 
 701,256 
 
 884,986* 
 
 729,797 
 
 768,778 
 
 1,006,786 
 
 1,128,210 
 
 730,246 
 
 897,278* 
 
 879,409 
 
 913,718 
 
 998,567* 
 
 908,815* 
 
 994,191 
 
 706,738 
 
 717,770 
 
 894,378 
 
 754,058 
 
 727,329 
 
 727,330 
 
 730,753 
 
 767,979* 
 
 767,983 
 
 927,641 
 
 770,668* 
 
 752,895 
 
 874,745 
 
 768,000 
 
 884,987* 
 
 802,430 
 
 783,992* 
 
 786,132* 
 
 770,229 
 
 759,216 
 
 767,984 
 
 759,825 
 
 711,444 
 
 760,463* 
 
 725.635 
 
 749,434 
 
 749,178 
 
 742,779 
 
 1,162,830 
 
 12,169 
 
Supplement. 
 
 257 
 
 Patents numbered 
 
 General Systems, Continued. 
 
 706,737 
 
 767,990* 
 
 767,985* 
 
 767,991* 
 
 725,634* 
 
 767,989* 
 
 767,988* 
 
 734,476 
 
 753,864 
 
 808,641* 
 
 768,003 
 
 818,236 
 
 771,818 
 
 767,978 
 
 923,963 
 
 764,093 
 
 974,762* 
 
 966,705* 
 
 764,094 
 
 1,111,777 
 
 929,145 
 
 926,936 
 
 879,532 
 
 997,515 
 
 1,059,666* 
 
 1,106,875 
 
 1,038,506 
 
 1,106,874 
 
 899,240 
 
 986,651 
 
 935,382* 
 
 916,307 
 
 827,524 
 
 884,107 
 
 858,569 
 
 1,020,032* 
 
 1,132,568* 
 
 1,019,236* 
 
 1,080,271* 
 
 1,018,555 
 
 813,914* 
 
 954,640* 
 
 979,276 
 
 808,594* 
 
 802,432* 
 
 1,074,423* 
 
 996,090 
 
 996,088 
 
 1,001,227 
 
 706,740 
 
 1,157,094 
 
 767,987* 
 
 767,980* 
 
 767,986 
 
 767,981 
 
 767,975 
 
 725,636 
 
 767,977* 
 
 767,982* 
 
 767,976* 
 
 758,517 
 
 781,873 
 
 813,975 
 
 802,417 
 
 768,005 
 
 768,002 
 
 767,996* 
 
 929,349 
 
 1,018,555 
 
 759,826 
 
 768,004 
 
 884,989* 
 
 864,272 
 
 884,110 
 
 935,383 
 
 956,165 
 
 706,735* 
 
 793,650 
 
 913,528 
 
 793,652 
 
 1,014,002* 
 
 946,168 
 
 934,875 
 
 929,487 
 
 1,031,698 
 
 1,101,915* 
 
 824,003 
 
 899,242 
 
 889,289 
 
 822,936 
 
 937,281 
 
 1,010,669 
 
 924,560* 
 
 928,962 
 
 1,016,003 
 
 1,101,533* 
 
 1,015,881 
 
 1,003,375 
 
 1,006,635 
 
 1,006,636 
 
 1,012,456 
 
 758,527 
 
 761,450 
 
 802,418 
 
 739,287* 
 
 1,020,032 
 
 797,544* 
 
 730,753* 
 
 742,780 
 
 1,002,049 
 
 958,006 
 
 749,372 
 
 824,676 
 
 767,995 
 
 768,001 
 
 767,997 
 
 767,992 
 
 767,998 
 
 767,993 
 
 829,787 
 
 908,742 
 
 901,649 
 
 992,042 
 
 711,131 
 
 785,803 
 
 711,445 
 
 962,018 
 
 624,516* 
 
 797,169* 
 
 1,128,210 
 
 1,045,781 
 
 1,132,569* 
 
 1,114,840 
 
 1,138,652 
 
 928,371* 
 
 956,489 
 
 946,166 
 
 851,621 
 
 854,813 
 
 869,714 
 
 899,241 
 
 714,648 
 
 1,050,728 
 
 1,074,456 
 
 1,059,665 
 
 1,082,221 
 
 1,035,334* 
 
 716,334 
 
 730,819 
 
 1,123,119 
 
 1,139,226 
 
 14,012 
 
 806,966 
 
 756,720 
 
 788,477 
 
 843,733 
 
 776,337 
 
 782,181 
 
 787,780 
 
 755,846 
 
 771,819 
 
 792,528* 
 
 767,999* 
 
 767,994 
 
 943,969 
 
 935,386 
 
 946,167 
 
 965,060 
 
 1,002,051* 
 1,101,914* 
 
 915,280 
 1,014,002* 
 
 996,580 
 802,431 
 
 995,339 
 802,421 
 
 929,145 
 802,420* 
 
 711,181 
 802,419* 
 
 1,127,921* 
 444,678* 
 
 818,363 
 
 840,909 
 
 992,791 
 
 676,332* 
 
 680,002 
 
 716,000 
 
 713,700 
 
 758,004 
 
 714,246 
 
 960,304 
 
 850,917 
 
 1,021,132 
 
 1,045,782 
 
 1,080,544 
 
 1,050,441 
 
 1,022,540* 
 
 750,216 
 
 918,306 
 
 918,307 
 
 777,014 
 
 1,158,123 
 
 RECEIVING DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND CIRCUITS. 
 
 Includes selective arrangements, interference compensators, beat re- 
 ceivers, audio-tuning, bridge circuits, apparatus arrangements, static shields, 
 etc. See also related headings. Includes some detectors. 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,116,183 1,116,588 
 1,132,588* 1,139,632 
 
 1,895,342 1,138,147 1,144,968 
 
 1,113,149* 997,516* 1,134,593 
 
 1,127,368 727,327 762,829 767,971 
 
 761,258 712,764 806,052 962,417 
 
 921,531* 727,331* 995,312 936,258 
 
 780,842 902,613 897,779 962,015 
 
 883,437 936,258 962,015* 958,181* 
 
 902,613 936,163 912,726 974,985 
 
 761,258 727,331 884,988 748,306 
 
 727,328* 746,557* 745,463 737,271 
 
 773,171 773,340 774,922 775,050 
 
 783,712 961,645* 1,002,150 758,468 
 
 888,191 959,510 892,312 896,130 
 
 1,009,317 963,173 916,429* 918,618 
 
 784,762 931,586* 925,921 802,428* 
 
 852,381* 853,929 839,029* 706,745 
 
 923,699* 857,375 994,426 858,668 
 
 812,557 820,169 816,205 962,417 
 
 1,089,091 13,798 1,042,778 1,097,974 
 
 1,059,391* 1,022,539 1,044,637* 1,087,892 
 
 897,278 752,894 752,895 1,018,155 
 
 1,156,677 1,163,839 
 
 SELECTIVE SECRECY SYSTEMS. 
 
 (See also others.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,102,442 1,091,768 714,384 715,203 717,978 714,756 
 
 752,894 727,326 12,149 714,831 12,141 1,123,119* 
 
 913,718 768,001* 1,091,768 
 
 801,118 
 
 668,315" 
 12,115 
 
 962,016 
 
 974,986 
 
 892,312 
 
 796,403 
 
 744,936 
 
 782,422 
 
 905,537 
 
 877,451* 
 
 974,927 
 
 824,682* 
 
 730,247 
 
 846,081* 
 1,093,240 
 1,027,238 
 
 1,087,549* 1,132,568 
 1,012,496 716,135 
 
 1,019,236* 657,223 
 1,143,799 1,123,910 
 767,922 
 793,648* 
 665,957 
 836,531 
 921,531* 
 730,246 
 749,371* 
 755,586 
 780,842 
 924,827 
 886,154 
 952,403 
 846,414 
 802,422* 
 
 796,800 
 
 974,838 
 
 962,016 
 
 845,316 
 
 974,538 
 
 706,742 
 12,115 
 
 756,219 
 
 793,648 
 
 897,779* 
 
 883,241 
 1,012,496 
 
 930,508 
 
 802,423* 
 
 785,276 . . 
 1,087,113* 1,104,256 
 1,091,127 1,099,865 
 
 1,009,106 
 
 916,429 
 167,970 
 
 795,840 
 777,014 
 
258 
 
 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 DETECTORS. 
 
 Oscillation Responding Devices, Rectifiers, Electrolytic, Heat, Contact, 
 
 Capillary Devices, etc. 
 (For circuit arrangements, etc., see Receiving Apparatus and Systems.) 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 Patents numbered 
 772,878 877,069 
 715,043 
 
 OSCILLAPHONE. 
 
 769,005 819,779 
 
 MAGNETIC DETECTOR. 
 
 917,104 930,780 711,182 
 
 917,104 749,371 
 
 ELECTRO-CAPILLARY DEVICES. 
 Patents numbered: 
 844,080 798,484 798,483 798,482 798,481 848,083 
 
 902,569 
 727,331 
 
 ELECTROLYTIC. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 706,742 716,334 929,784 894,317* 875,105 
 894,317 875,105 962,014* 783,712 716,203 
 731,029 706,744 916,428 793,648 768,003 
 
 HEAT DETECTOR. 
 Patents numbered: 800,856 767,996 767,997 
 
 BOLOMETER. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 778,275 767,992 767,980 767,971 767,981 767,972 
 
 CRYSTAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ALL TYPES. 
 
 795,312 
 716,000 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 879,062 
 
 879,117 
 
 923,700 
 
 924,827 
 
 837,616 
 
 886,154 
 
 912,613 
 
 912,726 
 
 1,159,969 
 
 1,152,444 
 
 1,158,112 
 
 1,162,765 
 
 1,080,681 
 
 1,052,355 
 
 1,096,142* 
 
 1,048,117 
 
 1,102,184 
 
 1,104,065 
 
 1,104,073* 
 
 867,876* 
 
 899,264 
 
 824,637* 
 
 824,638* 
 
 927,314 
 
 1,013,223 
 
 986,806 
 
 966,855 
 
 954,619 
 
 959,967 
 
 867,878 
 
 867,877 
 
 912,613 
 
 879,062 
 
 917,574 
 
 1,004,784 
 
 904,222 
 
 906,991 
 
 811,654 
 
 776,359 
 
 757,802 
 
 741,570 
 
 1,003,210 
 
 905,781 
 
 901,942 
 
 962,262 
 
 836,070* 
 
 836,071* 
 
 1,155,338 
 
 879,061 
 
 820,258 
 
 902,569 
 
 706,744 
 
 707,266 
 
 711,123 
 
 756,676 
 
 787,412 
 
 1,003,374 
 
 902,569 
 
 1,136,044 
 
 1,136,045 
 
 1,137,714 
 
 1,136,046 
 
 1,136,047 
 
 1,122,558 
 
 1,128,552 
 
 1,118,228 
 
 1,115,902 
 
 1,112,411 
 
 1,145,658 
 
 1,144,399* 
 
 1,008,977* 
 
 933,263 
 
 770,228 
 
 917,574 
 
 706,735 
 
 706,736 
 
 767,985 
 
 837,616 
 
 706,735 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MERCURY AUDION, VACUUM VALVES, AUDIONS, THERMI- 
 ONIC RELAYS, AND DETECTORS. 
 
 Patents 
 1,130,008 
 837,901 
 1,127,371* 
 1,145,735 
 943,969 
 837,901 
 
 numbered 
 1,142,625 
 867,876 
 1,430,008 
 1,144,596 
 824,637 
 841,387 
 
 837,878 
 995,126 
 1,128,817 
 1,159,307 
 824,638 
 867,877 
 
 836,070 
 836,071 
 1,130,009 
 1,138,652 
 867,071 
 867,878 
 
 879,532 
 979,275* 
 1,130,042* 
 1,113,149 
 915,280 
 
 841,386 
 803,689* 
 1,128,280 
 841,397 
 824,637 
 
 979,275 
 1,130,043 
 1,137,275 
 1,156,625 
 803,684 
 
Supplement. 259 
 
 COHERORS. 
 
 (See Radio-Mechanical Control.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,019,260 932,799* 700,708 691,815 993,024 886,983 794,459* 
 800,119* 908,504 985,854 775,113 742,298 763,894 759,835 
 968,007 670,711 708,070 755,840 722,139* 710,372 1,019,260 
 741,767 1,118,410 1,150,111 
 
 WAVE 'METERS. 
 
 Patents numbered: 
 
 804,189, 1,064,325 1,018,769 804,190 932,819 846,675 918,256 
 892,311 993,316 1,152,632 
 
 GALVANOSCOPE. 
 
 Patent numbered 798,152 
 
 SYNCHRONIZER. 
 
 Patent numbered 717,768 
 
 RANGE FINDER. 
 (See also Direction Finders.) 
 Patents numbered: 749,436* 1,135,604* 
 
 SPARK GAPS, INCLUDING MUFFLED, COOLING AND TONE 
 TYPES. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,073,371 1,051,744 1,075,075* 834,054 926,933 971,935* 1,132,589* 
 1,117,681 750,180 750,005 1,163,586 792,014 706,741 768,000* 
 1,148,521* 1,161,520 1,152,272 1,162,659 
 
 WIRELESS TELEPHONY. 
 
 (See also Oscillation Producers, Transmitting and Sending Systems, etc.) 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,118,004 1,125,496* 1,122,594 1,139,413 1,062,179* 1,086,530 1,108,895* 
 
 1,044,798 1,052,49 1,088,686 803,199* 836,015* 814,942 836,072* 
 
 803,513* 1,006,429 923,962 753,863 793,649 793,750 1,148,827 
 
 RADIO-MECHANICAL CONTROL. TORPEDOES, TYPEWRITERS, 
 ETC., CONTROLLED BY WIRELESS. COHERORS. 
 
 (See also Detectors and Systems.) 
 
 715,803 1,115,530* 1,097,871 1,072,152 1,987,966 625,823 1029,573 
 789,618 976,500 828,864 907,488 1,098,379* 957,001 663,400 
 723,176 913,814 1,155,653 1,154,628 1,149,874 
 
 RECEIVING RECORDER. 
 
 Patent numbered 766,743 
 
 RELAYS AND RELAY SYSTEMS. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 717,514* 786,696* 657,221* 718,535 717,513 717,509 717,570 
 J,106,729 655,716 
 
 AUTOMATIC TICKER. 
 (See also Receiving Devices.) 
 Patents numbered: 1,098,380 1,161,142 
 
260 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 TUNING DEVICES AND COUPLINGS. 
 
 (See also Receiving Systems, Transmitting Systems, Wavemeters.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,116,130 978,604 802,425 1,070,376 1,014,722 1,014,722* 1,083,085 
 1,096,065 719,005 707,056 763,345* 717,511* 934,296 803,569 
 956,936 996,092 717,512* 1,132,568 1,127,921 714,756 714,831 
 1,151,098 1,148,279 
 
 AMPLIFIERS FOR RECEIVING. 
 
 (See also Receiving Systems, and Audions.) 
 Patents numbered: 
 
 965,884 714,832 1,041,210 12,151 12,152 1,163,180 751,818 
 
 714,833 1,165,454 
 
 ALARM SYSTEM. 
 
 (See Coherers, and Radio-Mechanical Control.) 
 Patent numbered 606,405 
 
 CONDUCTION AND EARTH SYSTEMS. 
 
 (See general system list.) 
 Patents numbered: 1,051,443* 690,151 
 
 COMBINATION SETS. RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING. 
 
 LINE AND RADIO. 
 Patents numbered: 996,089 1,104,712 1,092,294 916,483 972,721 
 
 PORTABLE STATIONS. 
 
 (See general list and Aerials.) 
 Patents numbered: 1,145,066 958,209 
 
 COMBINATION TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SETS. 
 
 (See also general list.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,116,111 1,141,453 1,141,386 751,294 777,014 736,483 726,413 
 840,908 979,144 916,895 876,281 794,334 798,158 810,150 
 793,652 
 
 TRANSFORMERS RESONANT WITH CAPACITY, FOR TRANS- 
 MITTING STATIONS. 
 
 Patents numbered: 965,168* 835,023* 
 
 DIRECTION AND DISTANCE FINDERS. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 736,432 744,897 716,135 1,069,355 899,272 12,148 941,565 
 
 943,960* 961,265 984,108 948,086* 945,440* 894,318 1,002,141 
 
 833,034 716,134 758,517 1,149,123 1,149,122 
 
 STATIONARY AND PORTABLE ANTENNA AEROPLANE, 
 AERIALS. 
 
 Patents numbered: 
 
 1,141,387 918,255 919,115 930,746 898,197 945,475 972,004 
 
 959,100 1,005,471* 793,718 793,651 948,068 860,051 1,106,945 
 
 1,101,175 1,063,671 1,132,569 767,973 717,511 706,737 1,147,010 
 
 770,229 749,436 749,131 748,597 771,819 707,746 706,738 
 
Supplement. 261 
 
 Aerials, Continued. 
 
 706,739 716,136 899,272 1,158,124 717,512 793,718 753,864 
 802,981 802,982 806,966 822,936 824,003 767,986 767,988 
 767,998 767,999 716,177 1,165,412 
 
 BREAKING SYSTEMS AND KEYSSENDING TO RECEIVING. 
 
 Patents numbered: 827,523 842,134 1,016,564* 1,073,624 
 
 MASTS AERIAL SUPPORTS, INCLUDING AEROPLANE AERIAL 
 DEVICES. 
 
 Patents numbered: 1,116,059 857,152 1,034,760 1,099,861 768,005 
 
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE-OVER SWITCH SENDING TO RE- 
 CEIVING. 
 
 Patent numbered 1,074,057 
 
 CLEARING ICE FROM ANTENNAS. 
 
 Patent numbered 750,181 
 
 PROTECTING DEVICES. 
 
 Patents numbered: 771,820 978,607 1,035,958 
 
 CONDUCTOR FOR WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY. 
 
 Patent numbered 706,739 
 
 CURRENT INTERRUPTER. 
 
 (General interrupters not included.) 
 Patent numbered 1,039,011 
 
 KEYS, CIRCUIT CLOSERS AND CONTROLLERS. 
 
 Patents numbered: 
 917,749 792,020* 792,015 769,228 934,716 749,178 792,015 
 
 TRANSMISSION OF MUSIC. 
 
 (See Radiotelephony.) 
 Patent numbered 1,025,908 
 
 PUNCHED TAPE SYSTEMS. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 725,634 725,635 725,636 767,978 767,991 767,932 767,995 
 
 STATIC VALVE. STATIC PREVENTION. 
 
 Patents numbered: 823,402 825,402 
 
 METHOD OF UTILIZING ENERGY OF WAVES. 
 
 (See general list.) 
 Patent numbered 731,029 
 
 VISIBLE AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL. 
 
 (See Coherors, Radio-Mechanical Control, etc.) 
 Patent numbered 805,714 
 
262 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 COMMUNICATION BY WAVE COMPONENTS. 
 
 (See also General Systems.) 
 Patent numbered 876,996 
 
 PRODUCTION OF TONE EFFECTS. 
 (See also Spark Gaps, General Systems, Transmitters.) 
 Patents numbered: 1,056,892* 1,056,893* 
 
 AUTOMATIC COMMUTATOR FOR WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY. 
 
 (See General Systems also for similar arrangements.) 
 Patent numbered 1,105,029 
 
 RELAYING HIGH FREQUENCY CURRENTS. 
 
 (See also Audions, Detectors, Oscillation Producers, etc.) 
 Patent numbered 1,042,069* 
 
 DETERMINATION OF FREQUENCY. 
 
 (See also Wavemeters.) 
 Patent numbered 1,022,584 
 
 SYSTEMS OF HIGH FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION. 
 
 (See also General Systems, Transmitters, Oscillation Producers.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 1,123,098* 1,122,027* 856,149* 856,150* 1,043,104* 1,043,766* 
 
 CONTROL OF SPARK PRODUCTION. 
 
 (See also Radiotelephony and General Systems.) 
 Patents numbered: 750,180 802,850 
 
 TELEPHONE RECEIVER. 
 
 (General telephone list not included.) 
 Patent numbered 936,684 
 
 DUPLEX, MULTIPLEX, SYSTEMS. 
 
 (See General Systems.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 716,136 772,829 802,429 802,426 717,767 767,970 924,168* 
 1,116,309* 1,076,312 1,042,205 749,434 720,568 716,134 772,879 
 767,980 716,134 793,652 
 
 SUBMARINE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS, COLLISION PRE- 
 VENTION, ETC. 
 Patents numbered: 
 
 711,386 1,126,095 1,073,088 749,694 802,020 914,483 913,910 
 526,609 1,099,998 
 
 PHOTOPHONES. 
 
 (See General Systems.) 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 235,120 680,614 796,254 766,355 241,909* 235,496* 235,199 
 341,213 
 
Supplement. 
 
 263 
 
 CONDENSERS, PAPER, GLASS, AIR, COMPOSITION, ETC. 
 
 (For complete list see general electrical classification omitted here.) 
 Patents numbered: 
 
 1,127,513 793,647* 786,578 793,777 1,033,095 1,150,895 1,108,793 
 1,063,105 1,094,178 1,116,013 1,111,289* 1,112,397 1,114,626 1,139,976 
 814,951 793,647 793,651 767,977 1,151,824 
 
 DIRECTIVE SYSTEMS. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 795,762 749,131 720,568 716,134 716,135 771,818 771,819 
 
 TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS. 
 
 (General list. See 
 
 also detail lists, as they are 
 See General Systems.) 
 
 not repeated here. 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,145,239 Polyphase 
 
 974,169 
 
 1,119,952 
 
 247,127 
 
 255,305 
 
 11,913 
 
 586,193* 
 
 657,363 
 
 465,971 
 
 932,821 
 
 926,900 
 
 767,974* 
 
 767,973* 
 
 749,435 
 
 685,953 
 
 685,954 
 
 685,957 
 
 785,956 
 
 754,737 
 
 767,977 
 
 755,132 
 
 775,416 
 
 776,876 
 
 876,165 
 
 792,014 
 
 787,056 
 
 910,430 
 
 935,381 
 
 950,258 
 
 932,820 
 
 921,293 
 
 1,005,338 
 
 986,405* 
 
 918,208 
 
 1,119,732 
 
 749,372 
 
 802,850 
 
 768,004 
 
 758,004 
 
 1,148,279 
 
 966,539 
 
 953,635 
 
 927,433 
 
 802,427* 
 
 851,336* 
 
 991,837 
 
 834,497 
 
 966,475 
 
 917,103 
 
 858,554 
 
 1,015,881* 
 
 921,013 
 
 1,136,411* 
 
 1,139,226 
 
 1,140,150* 
 
 1,141,717 
 714,837 
 
 1,126,966* 
 767,990 
 
 723,188 
 767,975 
 
 685,958 
 767,976, 
 
 685,955 
 767,984 
 
 714,832 
 767,989 
 
 714,833 
 767,975 
 
 767,979 
 
 1,153,717* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OSCILLATION PRODUCERS, ARC CONTROLS, PRODUCTION 
 
 OF HIGH FREQUENCY CURRENTS AND ALL KNOWN 
 
 TYPES OF WAVES. 
 
 (See Audions and General systems. This list includes mercury vapor 
 devices applied to the art, except such as are listed elsewhere.) 
 
 Patents numbered : 
 
 1,121,360 1,120,306 829,447 829,934 
 
 500,630 1,122,975 ,131,190 ,123,120 
 
 1,043,117 1,101,148 ,159,209 ,142,496 
 
 1,047,643 1,103,822 ,101,491 ,061,717 
 
 773,069 1,096,717 ,105,984 ,092,398 
 
 932,111 966,560 ,077,733 ,028,204 
 
 758,004 706,742 897,279 767,983 
 
 550,630 
 1,097,872 
 1,139,673 
 717,774 
 921,526 
 1,110,253 
 1,109,909 
 767,993 
 
 1,115,823 
 1,087,126 
 790,250 
 685,012 
 979,277 
 781,606 
 ^923,963 
 
 1,118,174 
 1,152,675 
 1,023,135 
 925,060 
 780,997 
 817,137 
 730,755 
 
 RELAY OF MESSAGE. 
 
 Patents numbered: 717,509 717,513 717,514 
 
 717,516 
 
 NOTES ON LIST. 
 
 As a guide to date of issue, the number of the first patent for a period 
 is given herewith : 
 
 247,127-1881 691,176-1902 730,247-1903 749,131-1904 802,417-1905 
 808,641-1906 840,909-1907 876,165-1908 908,742-1909 945,440-1910 
 984,108-1911 1,014,002-1912 1,050,728-1913 1,083,677-1914 1,123,910-1915 
 Numbers of five figures, as 12,073, are for re-issued patents. 
 The author assumes no liability for the accuracy of the list, but it 
 is thought to include all of the U. S. patents granted in the art. The 
 general list of electrical patents which overlaps the radio list in many 
 instances has not been included because it alone is far larger than the 
 entire wireless list. 
 
264 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 DISCUSSION OF U. S. PATENTS FOR 1914 
 
 AND 1915. 
 
 By way of pointing out indications of recent prog- 
 ress a few recent patents may be mentioned. Patents 
 numbered 1,087,113 and 1,104,256 describe the tone 
 wheel ticker, receiving system of Rudolf Goldschmidt. 
 Patents numbered 1,098,379, 1,154,628 and 1,115,530 
 describe the control system of J. H. Hammond, Jr. 
 An improved audion circuit is given in patent 
 1,113,149 of E. H. Armstrong. An arc oscillator 
 using an arc between cooled electrodes immersed in 
 alcohol and said to have transmitted telephone com- 
 munication 600 miles is set forth in Dwyer's patent 
 No. 1,109,909. A multiphase transmitter is described 
 in patent 1,114,840. A practical arrangement of an 
 aerial on an aeroplane is given in patent numbered 
 1,116,059. The duplex system of Marconi using two 
 aerials at right angles is explained in patent numbered 
 1,116,309. A receiving set which is selective and ob- 
 viates the use of the loose coupler by a practical ar- 
 rangement of inductance and capacity is described in 
 Cohen's patent No. 1,123,098. A proposed secrecy 
 system is describe by De Forest in patent numbered 
 1,123,119. 
 
 A suitable system for radiotelephony over about 
 fifteen miles is described by De Forest in patent 
 1,125,496. His arrangement uses a quenched spark 
 gap oscillator. A balanced receiving circuit which 
 attempts to prevent interference is described in 
 patent 1,127,368. A good tuning circuit for receiving 
 with both tight and loose coupling is described in 
 Tronchon's patent 1,129,821. Weintraub furnishes 
 much information on mercury vapor tubes as oscilla- 
 
Supplement. 265 
 
 tion producers in patent numbered 1,131,190. Tape 
 sending and phonographic recording is illustrated in 
 Fessenden's patent 1,132,568. Marconi describes a 
 plural circuit rotary gap method of generating con- 
 tinuous waves in patent 1,136,477. R. C. Galletti 
 shows a system utilizing high frequency unidirectional 
 impulses in patent 1,140,150. A novel aerial loaded 
 with inductance and capacity to give a large wave- 
 length range in a small space is illustrated by Frank- 
 lin in patent 1,141,387. A good exposition of the 
 heterodyne system is given in patent 1,141,717. Pat- 
 ent 1,144,969 shows a method of using a crystal de- 
 tector to receive from undamped wave stations. 
 P. C. Hewitt describes his mercury vapor receiving 
 system in detail in patent 1,144,596. Marconi ex- 
 plains his disc discharger in patent 1,148,521. An im- 
 proved coheror is illustrated in patent 1,150,111 and 
 a new manner of using it for radio control is shown 
 in patent 1,155,653. Seibt describes a practical 
 quenched spark transmitter in patent 1,153,717. 
 Vreeland illustrates his mercury arc generator cooled 
 by water in patent 1,152,675. An antimony and ferro- 
 silicon detector is shown in patent 1,158,112. A 
 secrecy method is shown in patent 14,012 of Nov. 16, 
 1915. The receiving ticker used by the Federal 
 Telegraph Co. is shown in patent 1,161,142. Quenched 
 spark gap construction is the subject of Pfund's pat- 
 ent 1,161,520. In patent 1,152,272 H. Boas makes 
 the practical suggestion of using tungsten for spark 
 gaps. One form of the plural receiving tuner men- 
 tioned on page 252 is described in patent 1,151,098. 
 A practical quenched spark system is described in 
 patent 1,162,830. Amplification by means of micro- 
 
266 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 phones in cascade is explained in patent 1,163,180. 
 Patent 1,127,371 shows how an audion may be used 
 in connection with a relay circuit for wireless control 
 purposes. Patent 1,165 >4 12 shows a practical installa- 
 tion of a wireless set on an aeroplane, but employs 
 the objectionable hanging wire antenna. 
 
 AERIALS RECOMMENDED FOR VARIOUS 
 
 WAVELENGTHS. 
 
 The following dimensions are suitable for four- 
 wire aerials of the "L" type with spacing between 
 wires not less than 0.02 of the length. The length 
 here means only the flat top length, as the lead-in 
 length will vary with the location of the set. To find 
 the amount of wire needed multiply the length of the 
 aerial and lead-in by four, which gives the number 
 of feet required. As regards range in miles which 
 such an aerial can in each case cover, it should be 
 understood that the size is no limit in this respect. 
 The values given are the approximate natural wave- 
 lengths in meters and can be increased by loading 
 with inductance or decreased by means of a condenser 
 in series. 
 
 Meters. Height above ground feet. Length in feet. 
 
 ISO 30 75 
 
 200 50 80 
 
 200 60 50 
 
 200 30 90 
 
 250 40 loo 
 
 300 60 ioo 
 
 400 80 130 
 
 500 60 180 
 
 600 80 230 
 
 For long wavelengths see page 247. The second 
 200 meter aerial is recommended for amateur trans- 
 mitting. 
 
Supplement. 267 
 
 Wavelength of Any Aerial. 
 
 This is best found with a wavemeter, but may be 
 roughly calculated from 
 
 L 
 
 W= (V+4) 4-2, where W is the wavelength in 
 meters, V the height of the flat top in feet, and 'L 
 the length of the four-wire aerial in feet. 
 
 WHEN THE WIRELESS SET REFUSES TO 
 WORK. 
 
 Probably a majority of the difficulties arise from 
 a misconception or ignorance of the fundamental 
 principles involved; for example, (i) the use of a sin- 
 gle wire for a lead-in from an aerial composed of 
 six such wires, (2) the use of too small or too large 
 a condenser for the transmitting circuit, (3) faulty 
 insulation or design of instrument, such as using a 
 helix or oscillation transformer for a % kilowatt set 
 which has No. 14 wire for its primary. 
 
 "I get a good spark, but cannot radiate any en- 
 ergy." Probable causes are a broken conductor in the 
 aerial circuit, an overheated gap, too short or too long 
 a gap, poor or practically no ground connection, 
 enormous resistance due to loose contact, a broken 
 wire, dry earth connection, a broken condenser plate, 
 punctured insulation, too much or too little primary 
 or secondary inductance or both, causing a lack of 
 resonance, a broken aerial insulator, grounded lead-in 
 wire, coupling too loose, or again, the values of ca- 
 pacity, inductance, frequency, voltage or resistance 
 may be such as to prevent free radiation. Occasionally 
 
268 Experimental Wireless Stations. 
 
 an aerial will really radiate, the apparent failure being 
 due to a burned out hot wire ammeter, which is used 
 as an indicator. The proper relation of the values for 
 capacity, inductance, resistance, voltage, amperage, 
 frequency, and the coupling used are fundamental 
 and any variation will cause some degree of loss or 
 failure. Total failure is generally due to a definite 
 leakage caused by a breakdown in the circuits. 
 
 "I am using one kilowatt of power, but cannot 
 reach a friend fifteen miles away." The cause may be 
 one already given, but in a case in mind the difficulty 
 was due to the use of too small an aerial, a poor 
 ground and very poor tuning. 
 
 "I cannot get a good spark discharge." This is 
 often due to the use of too small electrodes, too much 
 power for the size of the gap, lack of cooling, too 
 short a gap, a leaking or broken condenser ; or again, 
 it may be due to the use of long connecting wires of 
 small cross section, such as were found in one par- 
 ticular case where the connecting wires were heated 
 hot. 
 
 "I cannot get my set down to 200 meters and 
 radiate enough energy to affect my hot wire me- 
 ter." A variety of causes may include the use of too 
 large a condenser, an inductance consisting of a coil 
 of too great diameter, a poor design of oscillation 
 transformer, too long wires for connections, loose 
 contacts of the clips, or connecting wires of too small 
 a cross section. In many cases, an inductance coil 
 of the cylinder type will give better results with a 
 smaller diameter, say six inches or less, and a large 
 conductor, say No. o to 4, than is ordinarily used. 
 The aim should be to use a condenser and inductance 
 
Supplement. 269 
 
 which will allow at least one complete turn of the 
 inductance to be included in the primary 200 meter 
 circuit. A pancake type of oscillation transformer 
 embodying this principle of small diameter and large 
 conducting surface is also suitable. 
 
 "I can hear NAX clearly, why cannot I get Ar- 
 lington?" The usual reason for this is that a small 
 station has insufficient wire in use to attain the neces- 
 sary high wave length. It is a simple matter to con- 
 struct a large loading coil, with taps, to bring a small 
 set up to the longest wave length now in general use. 
 
 "A station 150 miles from here formerly came in 
 very strong, but now I can hardly hear it." It was 
 found that the station mentioned had changed its 
 wave length, but the cause might have been poor con- 
 tact of the sliders or coupler switches or a non-sensi- 
 tive detector. Often, after some months, a conductor 
 used in the circuits will become grounded or broken. 
 
 "My set tests out fine with a buzzer, but I cannot 
 get even static." This failure is due to a poor ground 
 or no ground, or a grounded aerial, or a broken 
 lead-in, or a broken wire in the primary inductance 
 (usually near the binding posts), or it may be merely 
 a case requiring intelligent tuning. 
 
 "I am operating a ship station using a motor 
 generator set, but I have to connect a battery across 
 the fields to get the generator started." This often 
 happens with small generators because of a loss of 
 magnetism due to a variety of causes, such as faulty 
 connection, the iron used in construction, etc. A few 
 dry cells are generally sufficient to supply the starting 
 energizing current, after which the fields build up 
 rapidly. 
 
INDEX TO BOOK AND 
 SUPPLEMENT. 
 
 [Numbers refer to pages] 
 
 c. 
 
 Preface, 4. 
 
 Aerials, 18; balancing, 230; 
 construction, 30-38; di- 
 rective, 26; duplex, 23; 
 flat top, 27; ground, 21, 
 231; invisible, 20; L, 27; 
 length of, 23; looped, 28; 
 long wave length, 248; 
 purpose of, 12; spacing 
 wires of, 24; supports 
 for, 20, 34. Various wave- 
 lengths, sizes for, 266. 
 
 Aerial umbrella, 25. 
 
 Aerial switch, 99. 
 
 Aeroplane wireless, 226. 
 
 Amplifier, 234, 245. 
 
 Antenna. (See Aerials.) 
 
 Antenna circuit, 79- 
 
 Armstrong audion circuit, 
 241. 
 
 Arc oscillator, 146. 
 
 Atmospheric disturbances, 
 1 6. 
 
 Audibility, of human ear, 
 172. 
 
 Audibility meter, 180. 
 
 Audion, 233; principle oi, 
 operation, 236; effect of 
 magnet on, 238; genera- 
 tor of undamped waves, 
 240; amplifier, 244; with 
 crystal detector, 245. 
 
 Automobile wireless, 226. 
 
 B. 
 
 Capacity, 50; calculation of 
 condenser, 105; for trans- 
 mitter, 73; series and par- 
 allel connections, 115. 
 
 Cascade amplifier, 234. 
 
 Cascade receiving circuits, 
 243. 
 
 Codes, wireless, 219. 
 
 Crystal detectors, 162. 
 
 Condensers, construction of 
 transmitting, 109; con- 
 struction of receiving, 
 195; how charged, 104; 
 size of, 105; transmit- 
 ting, 103; variable, 198. 
 
 Continuous waves, produc- 
 tion of, 145. 
 
 D. 
 
 Damping, 65. 
 
 Dead ends, 250. 
 
 Dielectric constants, 106. 
 
 Differential tuning, 192. 
 
 Directive aerial, 26. 
 
 Direction finder, 227. 
 
 Duplex stations, 231. 
 
 Detectors, 231; adjustment 
 of, 170; comparison of, 
 244; construction of, 165; 
 function of, 158; min- 
 erals for, 162; operation 
 of, 161; sensitivity of, 
 160; types of, 161. 
 
 E. 
 
 Beaufort scale, 255. 
 
 Break-in systems, 101. 
 
 Bridge receiving circuit, Einthoven galvanometer, 
 
 188. 173. 
 
 Buzzer test, 171. Electrolytic interrupter, 93. 
 
Index. 
 
 271 
 
 Electromagnetic waves, ve- 
 
 locity of, 18. 
 Experimenters' rights, 214. 
 
 F. 
 
 Fleming valve, 232. 
 Frequency, effect on ca- 
 pacity, 73- 
 
 G. 
 
 Goldschmidt generator, 155. 
 Grounds, 39. 
 Ground aerials, 231. 
 
 H. 
 
 Helix, construction of, 119. 
 Heterodyne receiver, 229. 
 High frequency, 67, 155. 
 Hot wire ammeter, 135; 
 construction of, 138. 
 
 I. 
 
 Inductance, 51; calculation 
 
 of, 1 1 6. 
 Insulators, 28. 
 Intensity of signals, meas- 
 
 uring, 180. 
 Interference, 15, 182. 
 Interference prevention, 180, 
 
 181, 192, 212, 229. 
 
 K. 
 
 Keys for transmitting, 97. 
 Kickback prevention, 95. 
 Korda air condenser, 196. 
 
 Lead-in, 30, 35. 
 Lepel Arc System, 149. 
 License, obtaining a, 216. 
 Lieben-Reisz amplifier, 234. 
 Lightning protection, 39, 
 
 42. 
 
 Loading coil, 124, 191. 
 Long wave length stations, 
 
 247. 
 
 Long wave receiver, 242. 
 
 Loop aerial, 192. 
 
 Loose-coupler, 189; c o n- 
 struction of, 208; for long 
 wave reception, 250. 
 
 M. 
 
 Magnetic blowout, 98. 
 Measuring instruments, 133. 
 Mutual inductance, 118. 
 
 O. 
 
 Oil key, 97. 
 
 Oscillations explained, 47; 
 
 production of sustained, 
 
 145-155. 
 Oscillation transformer, 121. 
 
 P. 
 
 Patents, 216; complete list 
 
 of U. S., 256; discussion 
 
 of recent, 264. 
 Pliotron, 234. 
 Plural receiving sets, 252. 
 Poles for aerial, 36. 
 Protective devices, 42, 95. 
 Quenched gap, adjustable, 
 
 155. 
 
 Quenched spark gap, 151. 
 Quenched spark system, 
 
 153. 
 
 Radiant energy, 17. 
 
 Radiation, determining best, 
 139- 
 
 Radiation resistance, 231. 
 
 Radio-communication, ten- 
 dency of, 217. 
 
 Railroad wireless, 226. 
 
 Range of transmission, 68. 
 
 Reactance for transformer, 
 70. 
 
 Reactance coil construction, 
 89- 
 
 Receiver, tuning a, 185. 
 
272 
 
 Index. 
 
 Receiving, long undamped 
 wave set, 242; process of, 
 159. 
 
 Receiving condensers, 191. 
 
 Receiving, long waves, aer- 
 ial for, 248; tuner for, 249. 
 
 Receiving stations, 156; cir- 
 cuit for, 187; how it op- 
 erates, 179. 
 
 Resistance, 59. 
 
 Resonance, 52; harmonic 
 effect, 57. 
 
 Rotary spark gap, 128. 
 
 S. 
 
 Series spark gap, 127. 
 Shunt resonator, 141. 
 Singing arc, 149. 
 Spark coils, capacities for, 
 
 74; data for, 91. 
 Spark gap, 78; construction, 
 
 126; in compressed gas, 
 
 132; purpose of, 125. 
 Spark rate, high desirable, 
 
 132. 
 Stations, possibilities of, 
 
 213. 
 
 T. 
 
 Telemechanics, 230. 
 
 Telephone receivers, 157; 
 construction, 176-178. 
 
 Theory of transmission, 8. 
 
 Thermionic tubes, opera- 
 tion of, 237. 
 
 Three slide tuner, 188. 
 
 Ticker, 175. 
 
 Time signals, 252. 
 
 Transformers, 81; construc- 
 tion, 84; dimensions of, 
 83; magnetic leakage, 84; 
 types of, 69. 
 
 Transmission, effect of day 
 and night on, 14. 
 
 Transmitter, 46; character- 
 istics of, 63, 64; power of, 
 72. 
 
 Tuned waves, 16. 
 
 Tuner, construction of, 204. 
 
 Tuning, 49; accurate, 60; 
 devices for, 202; good 
 and bad, 62; methods, 
 185; process of, with 
 loose coupler, 189; trans- 
 mitter, 58. 
 
 U. 
 
 Ultra-audion receiver, 239. 
 Undamped waves, 65; au- 
 
 dion generator of, 240; 
 
 receiving set for, 175, 242. 
 Universal detector, 166. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vacuum valves, 231. 
 Variometer, 207. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wave length, 19, 20; calcu- 
 lation, 75; determining, 
 134; limitation of, 56. 
 
 Wave meter, 134. 
 
 Wave transmission, 10. 
 
 Weather code, 255. 
 
 Weather reports, 253. 
 
 Wireless compass, 227. 
 
 Wireless law, 215. 
 
 Wireless telephone, 146, 246. 
 
 Wireless troubles, remedies 
 for, 268. 
 

 
 14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 nOrfMNT 
 
 
 RfegSCPJCD 
 
 
 QCT 9 19566 
 
 
 FEB2 197525 
 
 
 BEC.CIB.W5 2 78 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LD 21-100m-6,'56 
 (B9311slO)476 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
343113 
 
 -9- 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
' 1 I